The URL can be used to link to this page

Op & Maint Manual for Project #0304-12 CC Borden Constr '05 (in vault) C.C. BORDEN CONSTRUCTION, INC. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR ATLANTIC BEACH CITY HALL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS ', ATLANTIC BEACH, FL PROJECT#0304-12 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISIONS 1.16 DIVISION 1-GENERAL CONDITIONS 01000 C.C. BORDEN GENERAL GUARANTEE DIVISION 2-SITE WORK 02285 TERMITE CONTROL DIVISION 5-METALS low 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07310 SHINGLES DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL 15020 PLUMBING 15100 HVAC DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL 16000 ELECTRICAL 1019 Rosselle Street-Jacksonville,Florida 32204 904/354-3458-FAX 904/354-4770 C.C. BORDEN CONSTRUCTION, INC. Date September 9th, 2005 Form GG (Date Project Accepted by Owner) GENERAL GUARANTEE C.C. Borden Construction, Inc. guarantees all products and workmanship incorporated in the Atlantic Beach City Hall Renovations and Expansion , Atlantic Beach, FL , against defects due to a faulty product or faulty workmanship or negligence for a period of 12 months for the General Guarantee, and a period of 12 months for incidental building water tightness not covered by specific sections of the Project Manual as set forth in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions, or for such longer periods as may be designated by specific sections of the Project Manual. He shall, immediately upon notification by the Owner of water penetration and, at his own expense, do any and all work necessary to return the building to a watertight condition. He shall also, at his own expense, repair or replace any other damaged products, finishes and furnishings damaged as a result of this water penetration, to return the building to its original condition. This guarantee is binding where defects occur due to normal usage conditions and does not cover willful or malicious damage, damage caused by hurricanes or tornadoes, or other casualty. C.C. Borden Construction, Inc. (Contractor) By: Camille C. Borden Title: President Date: September 9th, 2005 Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 2005. Notary Public My Commission Expires: 1019 Rosselle Street•Jacksonville,Florida 32204 904/354-3458• FAX 904/354-4770 WDOSA02_A B&B EXTERMINATING COMPANY, INC. 215 OSCEOLA STREET • JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA 32204 (904) 389-3323 • FAX(904)389-9606 i RETREATMENT AND REPAIR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE PRETREAT SERVICING AGREEMENT fw!AY - 6 2005 Customer Name: r T-; A4112-„- xa r��r ;�, r� � cxnr r Telephone No. Covered Premises Address: T." ' ,.t H City: 7n TT AMTTf EFA!CL3 State: —, Zip Code: _42231 � Nt Treatment Date: 10 yl 5 WDO Treatment Sticker Location: Type of Structure''£00 3Q1 BT I-)G Type of Treatment: ,Z Preventive Presumptive(affected wood but no live termites) Existing(affected wood and live termites) THIS AGREEMENT WILL BECOME EFFECTIVE UPON PAYMENT IN FULL AND IS SUBJECT TO THE GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS ATTACHED HERETO. IN SUMMARY,THIS AGREEMENT PROVIDES FOR RE-TREATMENT AND REPAIRS FOR NEW DAMAGE WITH A LIVE INFESTATION TO AN AGGREGATE OF $50,000.00 SUBJECT TO THE GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS. COVERAGE: For a period of one year beginning on the treatment date shown above, B&B Exterminating agrees to provide the necessary service and treatment for the control of subterranean termites for the covered premises(also referred to as"structure")for the sum of $ P 1 T T T r`)W:R ,payable on completion of treatment by cash,check orlcredit card accepted by B&B Exterminating. In addition,B&B Exterminating will perform any further re-treatment it finds necessary,free of charge during the initial and renewal terms of this re vent subiect to the general terms and conditions attached to this Agreement.This Agreement covers Subterranean Termites only. aU15E, ,i�., t� ARET .7C��.T'�.CNG �,�..L��'�':CI�; SLAB' REPAIR:Subject to the general terms and conditions attached,if subterranean termite damage occurs in or on the covered premises,or its contents,while this agreement is in effect, then B&B Exterminating will be responsible for the reasonable costs of repairs as determined by B&B Exterminating,subject to the above limitation.B&B Exterminating is not responsible for any repair payments unless B&B Exterminating has been given the opportunity to inspect the covered premises in the area requiring repair prior to the start of any repair. RENEWAL:This agreement is renewable from year-to-year,upon reinspection of the covered premises by B&B Exterminating and upon payment of an annual renewal fee as follows: *MUST ADD SALES TAX TO RENEWAL PRICE BELOW* Renewal month/year 7 A N 2006 Amount: 450 . 00 Renewal month/year 7 A T 2008 Amount: 4510 - c")0" j f �1L Ca 1 yi^ .,0 Renewal month/year JAN ;�.��7 Amount: 4. �° , (;� Renewal month/year w <-�,j �C,G�_ Amount Following the expiration of the fourth year renewal,B&B Exterminating reserves the right to completely retreat the covered premises at a rate to be determined by B&B Exterminating,subject to B&B Exterminating and customer entering into a new servicing agreement. TERMINATION: This agreement may be terminated by B&B Exterminating at any time if customer fails to comply with its obligations under the agreement and the general terms and conditions attached.The customer must pay the annual renewal fee during the expiration month(initial treatment expiration month is the expiration month each year)of the previous agreement,or the agreement will be terminated for nonpayment. TRANSFER OF OWNERSHIP AND STRUCTURAL CHANGES:The customer agrees to notify B&B Exterminating of any additions and/or alterations to the treated structure.This may require the customer to pay for additional treatment,service charges,and/or adjustment to the annual renewal fee.In the event the property is sold,within the fourth year renewal and the agreement is currently up to date,it will be transferred to the new owner upon closing.Seller or buyer must notify B&B Exterminating of change of ownership so we may transfer all information to the new owner. The annual renewal fee will not be refunded in whole or in part due to transfer of ownership of the treated structure. CHEMICAL SENSITIVITY.At the customer's written request,B&B Exterminating will provide information about the chemicals to be used in treating the covered premises.If customer or any member of his/her household are or may be sensitive to chemicals or chemical odors, customer should consult with his/her physician before chemicals are applied in, on, or under the structure. Please notify B&B Exterminating in writing of any chemical sensitivity you may have. RELEASE AND INDEMNIFICATION:Customer expressly releases B&B Exterminating for injuries to persons or property on the covered premises arising out of or caused by any termite treatment or negligence or alleged negligence of B& B Exterminating or any of its employees,agents or representatives.Further,customer agrees to indemnify and hold harmless B&B Exterminating from any claims or causes of action brought by any third person or party asserting injury to person or property arising out of or caused by any termite treatment or negligence or alleged negligence of B&B Exterminating or any of its employees,agents or representatives. ARBITRATION:The customer and B&B Exterminating agree that any controversy or claim between them,arising out of or relating to the interpretation, performance or breach of any provisions of this agreement,shall be settled exclusively by arbitration administered by the Amefican Arbitration Association, under its commercial arbitration rules, and judgment on the award rendered by arbitrator(s)may be entered in any court having jurisdictmm in no event shall either party be liable to the other for indirect,special,or consequential damages or loss of anticipated profits. EXISTING CONDITIONS:The following conditions that are conducive to termite infestation'and/or factors that inhibit treatment procedures were found to be present at the time of execution of this agreement. In the event of a termite occurrence related to these factors or conditions, the customer agrees to accept responsibility for the expense of treatment and/or damage caused by these specified subterranean termite(s): ..w..e..��w�.n Af1�1�11.1A1\1L' Tf1 ILICGQT ATIAAI Thn fill nnnncro#inn \nii}h #hG r•mmnanv Y{I lYlnn }FIA fP.YYn flt 1F'lIR Specimen LabeI Personal Protective Equipment(PPE) Mixers and loaders must wear a minimum of long-sleeved shirt and long pants,chemical-resistaht footwear,socks,chemical-resistant gloves,and protective eyewear(goggles,faceshield,or safety glasses with front, RESTRICTED USE PESTICIDE brow,and temple protection). Mixers and loaders who do not use a For retail sale to and use only by Certified Applicators or persons under mechanical system(such as the Voyager*container or in-line injector)to their direct supervision and only for those uses covered by the Certified transfer the contents of this container must wear coveralls or chemical- Applicator's certification. resistant apron in addition to other required PPE. Pesticide applicators must wear long-sleeved shirt and long pants, TMDow AgroSciences socks,shoes,and chemical-resistant gloves. In addition,all pesticide handlers(mixers,loaders and applicators)must wear a respiratory protection device(MSHA/NIOSH approved number Tc TC-21 C or TC-23C;or respirator with an organic-vapor removing cartridge and a prefilter approved for pesticides with MSHA/NIOSH sbS approval number TC-14G;or supplied-air respirator with MSHA/NIOSH our approval number TC-19C;or self-contained breathing apparatus(SCBA) with MSHA/NIOSH approval number TC-13F)and protective eyewear when working in a non-ventilated space and all pesticide applicators must wear protective eyewear when applying termiticide by rodding or sub-slab injection. User Safety Recommendations Users should: Specialty Termiticide Concentrate • Wash hands before eating,drinking,chewing gum,using tobacco,or using the toilet. *Trademark of Dow AgroSciences LLC . Remove clothing immediately if pesticide gets inside. Then wash Active ingredient: thoroughly and put on clean clothing. chlorpyrifos:0,0-diethyl 0-(3,5,6-trichloro- 2 pyridinyl)phosphorothioate.................................. 44.9% First Aid Inert Ingredients...................................................................... 55.1% If swallowed:Immediately call a poison control center or doctor. Do not Total Ingredients..................................................................... 100.0% induce vomiting unless told to do so by a poison control center or doctor. Contains xylene range aromatic solvents. Do not give any liquid to the person. Do not give anything by mouth to an unconscious person. Contains 4 pounds of chlorpyrifos per gallon. If in eyes:Hold eye open and rinse slowly and gently with water for 15-20 minutes. Remove contact lenses,if present,after the first EPA Reg.No.62719-47 5 minutes,then continue rinsing eye. Call a poison control center or doctor for treatment advice. Keep Out of Reach of Children If on skin or clothing:Take off contaminated clothing. Rinse skin A �+ immediately with plenty of water for 15-20 minutes. Call a poison control WARNING AV I SO center or doctor for treatment advice. If Inhaled:Move person to fresh air. If person is not breathing,call 911 e liqu no sleentd de la lle. (if bu do n a undea1gurstand para quo se,f or an ambulance,then give artificial respiration,preferably mouth-to- someone a explain in it todetyou in you do not understand the label,find mouth if possible. Call a poison control center or doctor for further someone to explain it to you in detail.) treatment advice. Have the product container or label with you when calling a poison Precautionary Statements control center or doctor,or going for treatment. You may also contact Hazards to Humans and Domestic Animals 1-600-992-5994 for emergency medical treatment information. Note to physician:Contains petroleum distillate—vomiting may cause May Fatal If Swallowed•Causes Moderate Eye Irritation•Harmful aspiration pneumonia. Chlorpyrifos is a cholinesterase inhibitor. Treat If Absorbed Through Skin Or Inhaled symptomatically. If exposed,plasma and red blood cell cholinesterase Avoid contact with skin,eyes,or clothing. Avoid breathing vapors tests may indicate significance of exposure(baseline data are useful). or spray mist. Atropine, only by injection,is the preferable antidote. Oximes,such as 2-PAM/protopam,may be therapeutic if used early;however,use only in conjunction with atropine. In case of severe acute poisoning,use antidote immediately after establi d respiration. AUG 122305 C.C.BORMN CONSTRUC-TION,INC. Environmental Hazards Subterranean Termites This pesticide is toxic to birds and wildlife,and extremely toxic to fish and aquatic organisms. Do not apply directly to water,to areas where surface Dursban'TC termiticide concentrate for soil treatment is used to establish water is present or to intertidal areas below the mean high water mark. a barrier which is lethal to termites. In order to provide an effective Drift and runoff from treated areas may be hazardous to aquatic barrier between the wood in the structure and termite colonies in the soil, organisms in adjacent aquatic sites. Cover or incorporate spills. Do not disperse the chemical emulsion so as to avoid untreated gaps in the contaminate water by cleaning of equipment or disposal of equipment barrier. washwaters. Physical or Chemical Hazards It is important that the service technician be familiar with current control practices including trenching,rodding,subslab injection and low pressure Do not use or store near heat or open flame. spray applications. These techniques must be correctly employed to prevent or control infestations by subterranean termite species of Notice:Read the entire label. Use only according to label directions. Reticulitermes,Zootemtopsis,Heterotermes and Coptotermes. Choice of Before using this product,read Warranty Disclaimer,Inherent Risks appropriate proceduresincludes consideration of such variable factors as of Use,and Limitation of Remedies elsewhere on this label. If terms the design of the structure,water table,soil type,soil compaction,grade are unacceptable,return at once unopened. conditions and the location and type of domestic water supplies. The biology and behavior of the involved termite species are important factors In case of emergency endangering health or the environment involving to be known as well as suspected location of the colony and severity of this product,call 1-800-992-5994. If you wish to obtain additional product the infestation within the structure to be protected. For advice concerning information,visit our web site at www.dowagro.com. current control practices for specific local conditions,consult resources in Agricultural Chemical:Do not ship or store with food,feeds,drugs or structural pest control. clothing. General,Use.Precautidns Directions for Use All nonessential wood and cellulose containing materials,including scrap it is a violation of Federal law to use this product in a manner inconsistent wood and form boards,should be removed from around foundation walls, with its labeling. crawl spaces,and porches. This does not include existing structural soil Read all Directions for Use carefully before applying. contact wood that has been treated. Do not tank mix this product with products containing dichlorvos All leaks resulting in the deposition of termiticide in locations other than (DDVP), those prescribed on this label must be cleaned up prior to leaving the Do not formulate this product Into other end-use products. application site. Do not allow people or pets to contact contaminated areas or to reoccupy the contaminated areas of the structure until the Storage and Disposal cleanup is completed. Do not contaminate water,food or feed by storage or disposal. Retreatment for subterranean termites can only be performed if there is Storage:Store in original container in secured dry storage area. Prevent clear evidence of reinfestation or disruption of the barrier due to cross-contamination with other pesticides and fertilizers. Avoid storing construction,excavation,or landscaping and/or evidence of the above 122°F for extended periods of time. Storage below 40°F may breakdown of the termiticide barrier in the soil. These vulnerable or result in formation of crystals. If product crystallizes,store at 55-75°F reinfected areas may be retreated in accordance with application and shake occasionally to redissolve crystals. If container is damaged or techniques described in this product's labeling. The timing and type of spill occurs,use product immediately or dispose of product and damaged these retreatments will vary,depending on factors such as termite container as indicated below. pressure,soil types,soil conditions and other factors,which may reduce Pesticide Disposal:Pesticide wastes are toxic. Improper disposal of the effectiveness of the barrier. excess pesticide,spray mixture,or rinsate is a violation of Federal law. If these wastes cannot be disposed of according to label instructions, Contamination of public and private water supplies must be avoided by contact your state pesticide or environmental control agency,or the following these minimum precautions: hazardous waste representative at the nearest EPA regional office for guidance. 1. Use anti-back flow equipment or procedures to prevent siphonage of Container Disposal for Non-Refillable Containers:Triple rinse(or pesticide back into water supplies. equivalent)then offer for recycling or reconditioning,or puncture and/or 2. Do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. crush rinsed,empty container and dispose of in a sanitary landfill,or by 3. Do not treat while precipitation is occurring. other procedures approved by state and local authorities. 4. Consult Federal,state and local specifications for information or regarding approved treatment practices in your area. Triple rinse(or equivalent). Then dispose of in a sanitary landfill,or by 5. Do not contaminate wells or cisterns. See specific Treatment of incineration,or,if allowed by state and local authorities,by burning. If Structures with Wells,Cisterns or Other Bodies of Water Adjacent to burned,stay out of smoke. Treated Sites. Container Disposal for Refillable Containers:Replace the dry disconnect cap,if applicable,and seal all openings which have been opened during use. Return the empty container to a collection site designated by Dow AgroSciences. If the container has been damaged and cannot be returned according to the recommended procedures, 000, contact Dow AgroSciences Customer Service Center at 1-800-258-1470 Ito obtain proper handling instructions. 2 Specimen Label Revised 01-02-03 Rate Determination Guidelines Do not treat soil while it is beneath or within the foundation or along the exterior perimeter of a structure that contains a well or • A dilution rate of 0.5%is required for all termiticide applications. cistern. The treated backfill method may be used if soil is • A 0.5%to 1.0%dilution may be used for treatment of wood products. removed and treated outside/away from the foundation. The • A 1.0%to 2.0%dilution may be used to protect underground utility treated backfill technique is described as follows: cable and conduit and utility poles and fence posts in non-residential areas. a. Trench and remove soil to be treated onto heavy plastic Table 1 -DIIutlon Directions sheeting or similar material or into a wheelbarrow. Dursban TC Needed b. Treat the soil at the rate of 4 gallons of dilute emulsion per Gallons of 10 linear feet per foot of depth of the trench,or 1 gallon per Finished Residential Non-Residential 1.0 cubic feet of soil. See Mixing Directions section of this Dilution Desired 0.5% 1.0% 2.0% label. Mix thoroughly into the soil taking care to contain the 1 1 1/3 fl oz 2 2/3 fl oz 5 1/3 fl oz liquid and prevent runoff or spillage. 5 6 2/3 fl oz 13 1/3 fl oz 26 2/3 fl oz 10 13 1/3 fl oz 26 2/3 fl oz 53 1/3 fl oz c. After the treated soil has absorbed the diluted emulsion, 24 1 qt 1/2 gal 1 gal replace the soil into the trench. 48 1/2 gal 1 gal 2 gal 97 1 gal 2 al 4 gal 2. Structures With Adjacent Wells/Cisterns and/or Other Water Bodies:Applicators must inspect all structures with nearby water Mlxins Olrections sources such as wells,cisterns,surface ponds,streams,and other bodies of water and evaluate,at a minimum,the treatment It is important that the termiticide dilution be uniformly mixed in the spray recommendations listed below prior to making an application. tank before beginning the treatment. Once mixed,Dursban TC will not settle out in the tank although the initial mixing will be enhanced by a. Prior to treatment,if feasible,expose the water pipe(s) agitation,circulation through the treating hose,and the filling process. coming from the well to the structure,if they enter the 1. Fill tank 1/4 to 1/3 full structure within 3 feet of grade. 2. Start pump to begin by-pass agitation and place end of treating tool b. Prior to treatment,applicators are advised to take in tank to allow circulation through hose. precautions to limit the risk of applying the termiticide into ► 3. Add appropriate amount of Dursban TC. subsurface drains that could empty into any bodies of water. 4. Add remaining amount of water. These precautions include evaluating whether application of 5. Let pump run and allow recirculation through the hose for 2 to the termiticide to the top of the footer may result in 3 minutes. contamination of the subsurface drain. Factors such as depth to the drain system and soil type and degree of Appltca#ton volume compaction should be taken into account in determining the To provide maximum control and protection against termite infestation, depth of treatment. apply the specified volume of the finished water emulsion and active c. When appropriate(i.e.,on the water side of the structure),the ingredient as set forth in the Directions for Use section of this label. If soil treated backfill technique(described above)can also be used will not accept the labeled application volume,such as heavy,clay-type to minimize off-site movement of termiticide. soils,the volume may be reduced provided there is a corresponding increase in concentration so that the amount of active ingredient applied OrOc*h trOc#Ion�Subt0rtahean T1091t0 Treatment to the soil remains the same. This would also apply to sensitive areas and/or horizontal applications where less volume may be desirable. Areas treated with 0.5%end-use dilution must be reinspected Minimum volumes will be specified in the appropriate use directions. In annually for signs of reinfestation. Annual reinspection is required light textured soils such as sand or gravel,which accept larger amounts during the term of the original contract and any contract renewal of water,increased volumes that deliver the appropriate concentration of period. termiticide in the soil may be used. Maximum volumes will be specified in the appropriate use directions. Note:Large reductions of application Preconstruction applications are defined as those applications made prior volume reduce the ability to obtain a continuous barrier. Variance is to the finished grade being installed. Effective Preconstruction treatment allowed when volume and concentration are consistent with label directed for subterranean termite prevention requires the establishment of vertical rates and a continuous barrier can stili be achieved. and/or horizontal chemical barriers between wood in the structure and the termite colonies in the soil. Follow state and local regulations to meet Treat , nt 4)Structures with Wells,Cisterns„prf#heroitlea of; minimum treatment standards for preventive Preconstruction treatments. Watery Within oh Adjacent to Treated Site$ IN FLORIDA and OHIO:The vertical barrier application is required to complete the preconstruction application. After completion,a consumer Do not contaminate wells or cisterns. notice must be posted in an accessible location on or in the structure that informs the consumer that the soil under and around the structure has 1. Structures With Wells/Cisterns Inside Foundations:Structures been treated for the prevention of termites and contains the following that contain wells or cisterns within the foundation of a structure can information:date of application,identity of treatment provider,and the only be treated using the following technique. need for annual inspection and renewal of treatment contract. 3 Specimen Label Revised 01-02-03 IN KENTUCKY:Vertical and horizontal barrier applications are required b. Trenches need not be wider than 6 inches. Treat soil to complete the preconstruction application. After completion,a with the dilution as it is being replaced in the trench. consumer notice must be posted in an accessible location on or in the structure that informs the consumer that the soil under and around the Apply 4 gallons of dilution per 10 linear feet per foot of structure has been treated for the prevention of termites and contains the depth or 5 1/3 fluid ounces of Dursban TC per 10 linear following information:date of application,identity of treatment provider, feet per foot of depth from grade to top of footing in and the need for annual inspection and renewal of treatment contract sufficient water(not less than 2 gallons or more than 8 gallons)to ensure complete coverage. Do not apply at a lower dosage and/or concentration than specified on this label for applications prior to installation of the finished c. Hollow block foundations or voids of masonry can be grade. treated to make a complete chemical barrier especially if the soilwas not treated prior to pouring the footing. Prior to each application,applicators must notify the general contractor, Apply the dilution at a rate of 2 gallons per 10 linear feet construction superintendent,or similar responsible party,of the intended so that it reaches the top of the footing. termiticide application and intended sites of application and instruct the responsible person to notify construction workers and other individuals to d. For crawl spaces,establish a vertical barrier on both leave the area to be treated during application and until the termiticide is sides of the foundation and around all piers and areas absorbed into the soil. where underground utilities exit the soil. Do not apply the dilution to the entire surface area intended as the See Rate Determination Guidelines and Table 1 for dilution directions. crawl. 1. For horizontal barriers,applications shall be made using a low 3. For plenum type structures which use a sealed underfloor pressure spray(not to exceed 50 psi when measured at the space to circulate heated and/or cooled air throughout the treating tool to minimize exposure and potential for drift)after structure. Apply the end-use dilution at the rate of 4 gallons per grading is completed and prior to the pouring of the slab or 10 linear feet per foot of depth. Soil adjacent to both sides of footing. foundation walls,supporting piers,plumbing and conduits should be treated by trenching or rodding(where soil conditions a. Apply 1 gallon of dilution per 10 square feet or use permit)to a depth of 6 inches or,if less shallow,to the top of 1 1/3 fluid ounces of Dursban TC per 10 square feet in the footing. When conditions will not permit trenching or sufficient water(no less than 1/2 gallon or more than rodding,surface application adjacent to interior foundation walls 2 gallons)to provide thorough and continuous coverage may be made but the treated strip shall not exceed a width of of the area being treated(See Application Volume 18 inches,horizontally,from the foundation walls,piers or section). pipes. The surface application should be made at a rate of 1 gallon per 10 square feet as a very coarse spray under low If the fill is washed gravel or other coarse material,it is pressure(not to exceed 20 psi.when measured at the treating important that a sufficient amount of dilution be used tool). After soil treatment,a continuous vapor barrier of at least to reach the soil substrate beneath the coarse fill. 6 mil polyethylene film or other suitable vapor barrier must be installed on the ground surface over the entire subfloor area b. If concrete slabs cannot be poured over the soil the and on the inside of the plenum walls,in accordance with the same day it has been treated,a vapor barrier should be recommended practices for plenum type structures. placed over the treated soil to prevent disturbance of the termiticide barrier. Underground Utility Cable and Conduit(Non-residential) 2. For vertical barriers,apply the 0.5%end-use dilution at a rate Preventative Treatment for Use Only in Guam,Hawaii,and Other of 4 gallons per 10 linear feet per foot of depth. Establish Pacific Islands:Use a 1.0%to 2.0%dilution(See Rate Determination vertical barriers in areas such as around foundations,plumbing Guidelines and Table 1 for dilution directions). After digging the trench, lines,backfilled soil against foundation walls and other areas, place approximately 6 inches of backfill or sand at the bottom and apply which may warrant more than just a horizontal barrier. 2 gallons of the dilution per 10 linear feet. Allow to dry then replace the cable backfill. Cover with an additional 6 inches of backfill or sand and a. When treating foundations deeper than 4 feet,apply the apply another 2 gallons of emulsion per 10 linear feet. Finish filling trench termiticide as the backfill is being replaced,or if the with untreated soil. construction contractor fails to notify the applicator to permit this,treat the foundation to a minimum depth of Wherever cables emerge from the soil to enter poles,light frames,etc., 4 feet after the backfill has been installed. The treat the soil around the cable and pole or frame to establish a continuous applicator must trench and rod into the trench or trench 6 inch chemical barrier. along the foundation walls and around pillars and other foundation elements,at the rate prescribed from grade A continuous 6 inch chemical barrier must be established around the to a minimum depth of 4 feet. When the top of the cable to insure protection from termite attack. footing is exposed,the applicator must treat the soil adjacent to the footing to a depth not to exceed the bottom of the footing. However,in no case should a structure be treated below the footing. 4 Specimen Label Revised 01-02-03 Utility Poles and Fence Posts(Non-residential) Pest Control on Outside Surfaces and Preventative Treatment:Use a 1.0 to 2.0%dilution(See Rate Around Buildings Determination Guidelines and Table 1 for dilution directions). After pole (Industrial Plant Sites Only) or post hole has been dug,mix the dilution with the soil as it is being replaced to a depth of approximately 10 inches. Place pole or post on top To control ants,bees,carpenter ants,clover mites,cockroaches, of this layer. The remaining soil fill and termiticide dilution should be crickets,earwigs,hornets,millipedes,scorpions,spiders,ticks, mixed while backfilling the hole. The treated soil zone around the post or wasps and yellowjackets. pole should be approximately 6 inches wide. Soil for the base layer and backfill of each pole or post should be treated at a rate of 4 gallons of Outside surfaces:Apply Dursban TC termiticide as a residual spray to dilution per 10 cubic feet of soil. outside surfaces of buildings including g porches,window frames,eaves, Remedial Treatment:To control existing infestations or to prevent patios,garages,refuse dumps and other areas where pests congregate infestation of posts and poles already in place,use a 1.0%to 2.0% or have been observed. Treatment may be repeated as needed to dilution. The termiticide dilution should be injected into termite galleries maintain effectiveness. or channels in the wood. For maximum protection,injection sites should be at or below grade. Perimeter sprays:To help prevent infestation of buildings,treat a band of soil and vegetation 6 to 10 feet wide around and adjacent to the Posts or poles may also be treated by rodding down to the base of the building. Also,treat the building foundation to a height of 2 to 3 feet structure. Rod holes should be placed approximately 3 inches away from where pests are active and may find entrance. For scorpions,treat or the pole and about 6 inches apart. Inject approximately 12 fluid ounces remove accumulations of lumber,firewood,and other materials which of dilution per foot of depth into each rod hole. serve as insect harborage sites. It may be appropriate to use one or both treatment techniques depending Dosage and Mixing Instructions:Use Dursban TC mixed as a 0.25%to upon the specific circumstances at the work site e.g.,soil type. 0.5%dilution as indicated in the following table: Gallons of Finished Dursban TC Required Treatment of Wood Products Dilution Desired 0.25%Solution 0.5%Solution 1 2/3 fl oz 1 1/3 it oz To prevent insect attack of wood products,Dursban TC may be used 5 3 1/3 fl oz 6 2/3 fl oz for treatment of fence posts,utility poles,railroad ties,landscape 10 6 2/3 fl oz 13 1/3 fl oz timbers,logs,pallets,wooden containers,poles,posts,and 24 16 it oz 1 qt processed wood products. Applications must be made In 48 1 qt 2 qt manufacturing,Industrial,or right-of way settings only. 97 2 qt 1 gal Dosage and Mixing Direct' Terms and Conditions of Use Dursban TC is recommended for use as an aqueous emulsion containing If terms of the following Warranty Disclaimer,Inherent Risks of Use,and 0.5%to 1.0%chlorpyrifos. See Table 1 for dilution directions. Limitation of Remedies are not acceptable,return unopened package at once to the seller for a full refund of purchase price paid. Otherwise,use Advisements by the buyer or any other user constitutes acceptance of the terms under To control wood infesting insects such as powderpost beetles Warranty Disclaimer, Inherent Risks of Use and Limitations of Remedies. (Lyctidae),false powderpost beetles(Bostrichidae),deathwatch Warranty Disclaimer beetles(Anobiidae),old house borers(Cerambycidae)and ambrosia beetles(Scolytidae),treatments may be applied either as coarse sprays Dow AgroSciences warrants that this product conforms to the chemical or by brushing the product onto targeted surfaces. Use a sufficient description on the label and is reasonably fit for the purposes stated on amount of spray to cover the area to the point of wetness but avoiding the label when used in strict accordance with the directions,subject to the runoff. Use the following guidelines to determine appropriate rates of inherent risks set forth below. Dow AgroSciences MAKES NO OTHER application: EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ANY OTHER EXPRESS New Wood,(typically less than 10 years of age)apply approximately OR IMPLIED WARRANTY. 1 gallon of dilution per 150 square feet as a coarse spray. Old Wood,(typically greater than 10 years of age)apply approximately 1 gallon of dilution per 100 square feet as a coarse spray. 5 Specimen Label Revised 01-02-03 Inherent Risks of Use The terms of the Warranty Disclaimer,Inherent Risks of Use,and this It is impossible to eliminate all risks associated with use of this product. Limitation of Remedies cannot be varied by any written or verbalstatements or agreements. No employee or sales agent of Plant injury,lack of performance,or other unintended consequences may Dow AgroSciences or the seller is authorized to vary or exceed the terms instructions(including ding conditions noted on the label,such as unfavorable result because such factors as use of the product contrary to label of the Warranty Disclaimer or this Limitation of Remedies in any manner. temperature,soil conditions,etc.),abnormal conditions(such as *Trademark of Dow AgroSciences LLC excessive rainfall,drought,tornadoes,hurricanes),presence of other Dow AgroSciences LLC•Indianapolis,IN 46268 USA materials,the manner of application,or other factors,all of which are beyond the control of Dow AgroSciences or the seller. All such risks shall EPA-Accepted 08/28/02 be assumed by buyer. Label Code: D02-021-019 Limitation of Remedies Replaces Label: D02-021-018 The exclusive remedy for losses or damages resulting from this product LOES Number: 010-00021 (including claims based on contract,negligence,strict liability,or other legal theories),shall be limited to,at Dow AgroSciences'election,one of Revisions: the following: 1. Under Subterranean Termites,deleted Important Use Limitations 1. Refund of purchase price paid by buyer or user for product bought,or section,paragraphs 2 and 5 of General Use Precautions,and 2. Replacement of amount of product used Postconstruction Treatments section. Dow AgroSciences shall not be liable for losses or damages resulting from handling or use of this product unless Dow AgroSciences is promptly notified of such loss or damage in writing. In no case shall Dow AgroSciences be liable for consequential or incidental damages or losses. 6 Specimen Label Revised 01-02-03 WARRANTY The undersigned parties do hereby warranty and/or guarantee all work executed by the Sub-Contractor: Higdon Welding&Fabrication, Inc. P.O.Box 183 Baldwin, Fl, 32234 SUBCONTRACTOR PROJECT NAME: Atlantic Beach Cita Hall Additions& Alterations PROJECT LOCATION. 800 Seminole Rd Atlantic Beack F1.32233. to be free from defects of workmanship of material furnished and installed for a period of one year from date of substantial completion. The undersigned parties further agree that they will , at their own expense, repair and replace all such defective work and all other work damaged by said defective work under the Warranty/Guarantee. It is furthermore understood, that the consideration for the giving of this warranty and/or guarantee is the requirements by the General Conditions and Specifications under which the contract was let that such warranty and/or guarantee would be given. Date August 12,2005 Signature 'L& � Debra J. Higdon President Swom to and subscribed before me this 12th day of August, 2005. ,►*r Corm* n0001740 Carol Harris,Notary Public aaaw to(800) FWM Not rrrsicAmin, .y NtVNN/NNNNNNNNN ;t ory otm prescribed by Section 713.20,Florida Statutes(1996)Effective Odoberl,1996,a person tnay not require a lienor to furnish a waiver or release of lien that is different from the statutory form. f,ac, 16 2005 C.C. BORDEN ('C,NSTRUCTION,INC. 09/13/2005 18:14 9042897364 WILLIAMS ROOFING PAGE 01 Great Protection The GAF Snxn in Choice" Shingle Limited Warranty Limited Warrdtdy On GAF Materials Corporation should have ocpprred and did not due to a mallow;homg ,incl accordancf with GAFMC's pdmco application mshuolioth; Roofing Shingles dallatt CAFMC will taimburso you unly lot Inc teasrn,anlP (ill alftlelaenl.movement Wdefse'sfir ihabuildiog walls roue costs of(eUlacUly the bliivmoft shingles exclusive of kinder. dation or the roof hast twee whkil lib slit wire applied. UInItEtl Warranty. GAF fdmCl'lafs Corporation(GAFMC)war• naes aslongs)And hand sealing.rlv ranlw In yore,the original ramlaymen. m¢tal work or fl al of its rooting shingles.that (,,,I Inadequate dole ventilation or application of shingtes GAI MC Willrompensate you mrr. aIrdanre with U,is Warranty it rCntar ring ensealed shingle",. directly hilnvulalica Or to flu insulated deck unless Uripr wrif- it)yom tooling shingles(to nil rulnain tree!lour manulautua. Note!An self-sealing shmglor,,:nrluoing GAFMC's.must lin ten authorization is obtained Irvin A GAFMC Conlraclor illy oeavlu Olal(a)alivefSehY afleo fruit peliolmlime lot the subje.e,ed to Warm srnillght far several flays before fall thef- Sp wtm Manegm, (Ventilation frust meet at least FHA mal sealing can pCrur.Shinplex insfallnd in tall or writer may $cyan CneaCr, PrpiPrbpn penpn s{at¢tl belUw Ur(7)::aUSE lCCks opt serol unlit tnC following spring, biz •."ainimflm Property standards.) for( !,poler of the wantnly Win)statita lei"Or t'z)tneY U U U. S. re si which arc ro at. illi na3F;l1 by wands lip to the IhaX,ll,lllp wll(I sped,slated exposed to fim;t sunligrll to Iii aflpnnatC fUnare lEmpe Gl {21 C)artklge tel 11181NI1gbS OlUllrng hour cIIUSP.5 beyond nor - a', uUnng InE rasf S Years 1 t0 Yeuys illi Slal¢Iiu1:singles). Ions ITI3`(neves seal Fallot to l eal or shmglas+hat bin r ,R "'1•i:wear and tear,such as: provided that thermal seating lit the shingles hag om,oi rvd.or utility(luno cucm116burCCs t.cult loo,the Yat oft ht sr'If (A)alas of naturs.such of hurl.slrpng stormq.wines above, ('+)d:the R"ext Inst you alfWasen ShalQ111I WITH Areae{ate•. sealing!;Mngles, iql d marUfeGUnr,p dcfccl ted maxfman,wind speed stated a'10vc or ice,damming. Pfuter.linn,and brae-Uream algae causes a pronounced fhmml- (3)For Algae Discoloration ht epVhcablel. ilei impact of toreign objects Or tnflhc un the root. tT ur ; of;out s olugles puling rap first 7 y,t u lea SCnliopt (a)If your shllyles have Wert eilpllvd for Iom cliff vat;v.u. rq!Improper storage or.handling of Shingles, snnnlit.,;ort!the firs[10 years lot all niher shinglu5. GAFMC,s 1 uutro)ulhon will be eilhle the Cps!of ClCdninq lulu' (31 Shading of ver iallOnf in 1110 CO,Or UI YOU!6nmgIP,P or this. wrarilR' Soren Choice'U0119;Pt, Met. shiplub W the Cost to'upair W hivuvar you,8lhngtes es coovahon or contamfnafinn caused by fungus.algae Prnlesu him IN Mfg, Vaptpclai illiarn Wild daxrrihrll above ,q,in A maximum of the otiyniN!Rl!nalltd You,shingles Were gold Witt,AIUae Eatet Protection)to other Snn�gq, DONIF Jv,sl PCopd,yrs. kd1a: Spcsei,'00) cost of the aheCled nhmUles can!alrdnnds. Semi ill 70 3 $25 60 (let tot Ute cern Uri0ef u{Its Algae FOICf I lean Con/pvnnd r p t,Mll 104$OvNelgn' 25 5 34 110 GA-Mc s maxat�up curillhutipu'1111 be based ut.u1 h1, (41 Lapor costs.CICCDi A;SpeCIRL•ail y provided for above.dis osal w ROIs.• rsrv:gn 25 5 30 GD Della,Per Square Value.reduced ill IMP,a,n0ur.f Of nae vuu cos:s.and costs relating to underlairmant.oil work and hashtngi. Ma,gt',s WeafheMax 30 -5 35 80 have received trop your ehmg[Fs. ',(5)3aulage to the Interior or¢lderor of any building,Including.but Tuubcninc 30 30 5 40 70 not IimlteU to.mold growth. Timb I ne Soled 40 40 5 45 80 What You Mast Do. Tio,!vthnN labra LiiNtin,e 10 h5 110' - it) p toe a inDltn ytndpr this W.)rrant you muss send a nonce of "I-a eolle 4U 10 S5 110 .r t y. U nal!Sado Uluthne 10 130 110 'claun In writing.together with proof Of purChase tp CS110115ch Gauo SeuVQia I'dunun; 10 90 t 10'• I Iho!you are the orginnl nwner inr proof of transfer it Ihv ule, Glo,!f Canyon LlfulivaIf t0 120 110" and owner has puglarly transferred ccvoragol.and proof of Uu,woy Manwon Lilehmd 10 120 110 .application(lata:to.GRI MC..Warmly Service DCUarnneni. Cuwdty EYMN4 Wilhite 10 120 110 I1361 Alps Read.Wayne.New Jursey 07470.wilnin 30 daYs tfu le +Y ntrV `Iu,gin can I I ipiln°Ito n n "II`rip!°r,y .after-tour.discovery of the alleged delfri. NOTE:Notice to Nva, nn inr:west II.Iet nn:pit,N,gt u+e„I rut,,ty',lit, ',your tulliratidr rrr dealer is NOT nobCC r0 GAFMC.Within a Om,:an,c.rum watrart"N itt'i.po '�ra:isOnab!e tittle after proper notihCalion.GAFMC will cvalo- + :r I v ! t t tl ly 11hru;rl) on..Ilan .. Dari duns as to rhe extent of fetish.recover of cleaning rcquirrd .ate antlr c,,laim and resolve R tit Accordance with the ler,115 of tI t .Iu.nl mut Ib Ii ulna,.nuodi•d aN an fMf h rev C-w x1111 fie reasonable epsl(it rult:h work,will he made by '.uh Wlunially GAFMC may re, uir• Ot to sunmR.of out efnaah-r au'tere,i-w eaw,fluoro, ¢t oph a nmol W.I000: Isolely Y Y i U Y y ,tit!':ml,,:a,1.-I C.ur;,+u sN,v"o GAFMC. GAI MC tosorve'a the light to aramot dhoctly tot 7oua Mt asunP sau,PyI tl g for lestutg and!lhdtOgiapns.Voll Exclusive Remedies. shingles lit be repahed rrtrnwovii or civicid rn3l ad Ill re,m- should have this warranty ranthcafe signed and dated by For Ally slunDlef that tlo not perform as stated above.(,Al MG btu;ng you for ,I h week. tit(:cmP,rly Indio Um,w.rret t•I5 yotif contractor or dealer lir help tWoo lsh proul of Vtoct,ase ave(able only If,,thane shingles achlally vid bdm9 il"adamm .1,10 elated.iramm,llion,You should'ClAin this Cc IT,cpIC In, VIMrrr va;note lir pie cost Or either Itpain tog 0,tocuvo b:g vuur lig dalems of bltra-green algne gmyth at trip time.of x¢111911 m1 voa,t records In the event you need it,tilt a claim. HI mi I,•;.ab ivlluws Any replacement shingles.vol he v atrann•d only tut In(.retool l !1IFor Manufacturing Defects. car no the uup,nat warranty pe IOI, GAI MI rpsCryni,Uel,grit in ',6ofa ane Exclusive Wfuirill hu During the Smart Choice ProteCnnn PenOO.GAtMf,viol Olculnhnuu ur dud P;tFsit nye z.naludin!;Ihr noun eves.life. ITHts WARRANTY IS EXCL IISIVE AND REPLACES AL1 OTHER P,'7youthehdlreasonablecostofWierif)repairorrecpverthe WARRANTIES.WHETHER EXDRf•.SS OR IMRUtO.INCLUO ! so any replEyonr ro snnnple5 may not be ur eXarf match to ntr ',ING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES 0`MERCHANTA81L11Y AND neferhvr Shingles Iurovale rive pl untlCdAy noel.n,G walk la shingles nu your root FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Thi;,written war. Ileshings)duct will prpvldE rep!ardrnent shmgfEs GAF MG'MII not Pav n rrr ill feat oR your shingles o,to disoose of thea„ Trsnsterabnlly',Remedy lot New Owner. lan!y is ybin exclosive will iTQhI GAF MAlenals This Lifniterl Warrant% may not he IrAnn eond ill a56:{pled. Cir!I)ration Ault ovVresents tie SOLE REMEDY pvapable to ,t:Ane,lire Smart Choice PrnlwAlou Par od CiArNIC s inn- mrecfly or intim tly rocrgl fol ono ttansfe•IN followsem owner of GAFMCs shingles.GAFMC makes NO OTHER hlmrtlou In out will be baked pa either file Lola o'er&orale (it)The 4e,Und waoict ntt Ft nctny UAI Mt ill.v I(t•,ill a•-t0 RL!'Rk SENTATIUNS OR WARRANTY or my 1o,0 outer Than Valle ur at GAI MC S Pule Optnn,of(npv o,ng teulacurnv,d pays app,Ire p.uperty W lilvr bus occurred for an,coverage to that stated hermn CAFMC WILL NOT 8E 0ARI E IN ANY Cirigls Thp Connhulion 940 you will IuCeiye will he culru" bit Uanshured FVFNT FOR CONSEQUENTIAL, INDMECT OR INCIDENTAL fated by a0i0eurtg pie Oalldr Poe Souare Value for the mon- ',nAMAGES OF ANY KIND.ef;tpolnp DAMAGE t0 THE It1iERl- h( ill,,cul;ecu taod sten!les)to re0en the nmoula of use-/"I, (hr II the Irm,fur lakes pace within the. Smart Cho cc 1 OR OR I,XTERIUR OF ANY sNL.DING,whClhor lot breach of It na rnrNaved from our shin s..whirr volt let'par;Ioated by Prutothnp Penud,he snrnnd nwnar shall uL'tlr ilU[;tl fu a1 Urt, Y OC IfIItN warranty,negligence.pfrint INnhn1ly in inn or for any dvdinp(he nunnl)e, ul nlurlths wlnclr nail ,t,grsed since tllils t.pnta neo niht win ratty. it- ,rslallatd,trythe number of months in the.vaaranP• olit,Cellae.Some 5tr Coch;lip ire al1Ow thlf damexeages si)the or!rvv r pP.rin4 rel!!IhF hansh r takes UIRGC dllpr the Solari Choice Prgtl Caul! fxt;'.tr pt incidents!or LOnSCquentlaf Aameges so rbc abfvc Hit sholrlles that carry a a'atranty term of Lltelime. me,tel• Period ands,life eagt!tnf this warrant;shall be reaucea It, to exc'lusiuns or limitations.may not apply to you. lotting proration lactplS veil]apply: hvo-yew po(iov apps Owf,o!Sthp changes, During this tvio[Far period GAFMC s ret i,btlrsena,tl to the eocpnd ow,iuw will b; Modification of Warranty, vyar, Prn live I va.nv Wouu:r based Only of file Dollar Per.Societe Value.ltd cito by the This Lomeli Warranty may not be changed of modified cxCept in if 12 HS 27.28 4„!" amUunl of use-that has hpr.n roce,vad fr(Im toe si uocl!s tion wining,slonetl by an Officer pf GAFMC. No one(pfhrl man art 11 U0, 29-30 401" dare M inmAlptlinn tilos;ar of UAFrl eas authoray io assipno any addt hunal liability !y Ip 75", 11-37 3:;'M Limitations on Coverage.' hr'r Burls pilily for GAFMC litctivioubOh with your straights �!-Ia. 70", 33-34 30^v Evcu dydur rnuhng system wes nru pu)pedy arstau¢U acCU Ulasp � Isyal.rights.and you may have other rights Which vary from uxr01k rryl av dercrilled In this Warranty.ThisWarianfygivesyouspy- l9•?0 65" 35 40 25'v. in GAFMCs appltcnhQn gtrilrm;hbna, volt, frnno(i wm'a"ty state to stale. Ell"•. 41 50 20'6 remains In ellucl it your 0ingirs exhilat manofatturutg delecls. 23.2a &14 56tiftlone 101,, Wind damage.or algae discoloration lit applicable) Hov:P.ver. Effective Date. 1516 50,+. GAFMC will NOT hpny)rnsat¢you for: This I,amtted Wal laity if elieclivt for GAFMC shingfvs inatalltsd ;21 For Wind Damage It)Dantaye it)Volt shinglei or!Out rih,nlhn4 from mything 'within file ('Onbheltnl United Sta1P5 and Hawaii alter (11)yr,roverage an Slatnline shingles,5 or Coverate on Ill oma!) oihi 11han art anicap,l panufaptarinl return In Voui shing!ai January 1.2003, It your sharpies tiro blown Oil of damaged nY Which;uo 10 Ina such as. nclxnnum,wind spend stare(I above after IlWrouit sealing (a)gnpiopennsfUlletµ+n at poor shinglt.:or appf'cetnrn riot to 74083-503 " Smart Choice"Shingle Ltd WaMM4-Registndion Form Owner Warranty Record Please complete the inform1tf6n D81ow.detdch this form.and fflail to GAF Materials Corporation To 00eompltted DY owner andpUntrattor.XeeU this+varranty mein with p a a P.O.Box 395.ingomar,PA 1512 1.0395(Note:Registration is not required for warranty COverxgq.l yQUrs r CDnledi receipt la future reterenre.DO NOT SEND TO GAF OYvllet'S Nitrile_..... _W110rlfs 1 _ - Owners Name AtlnruSs.._. ,e --- d dress Where Applied .... Zip [[['''111 D'N — - 7sw!:f.ss of hpddinU,it ditterenl •--. ..._.. _..,_.. ..... ..._ Stale. Zip �'y ..- —State LD _.. _ .... Coptrartor'sName Will44.lt1tt!*�.�4.2Fi�at.G. . Ill `Z �Iaclor's Name GV1l L�f1�3 Rio o fIALG ..O IF -T Clr city 7AE. ck3,0 V Y"« Oul E ... Slil!e T G __Zip .��2.3 y ../�G Zip .5Cr.!ILrh!tirsPhmla(_foT -I .�a�y•rS/ State !3, / a-�Yractor's Phone(904 ,x 9_.--7 �� ...- yNP,ry Cinlslrun!ipu —....Re,-roofing :;mai f J!nubtlrllntl SEIaG40• J Grand Canyon r,�"t Mivrtngll lnSraNed; J,;:XA50Nc,a Sa.a'c,gr JTimnrna,t Ulra Jcglwlr,Marts[ nnlinpl ,mbarlirre 30 J Grand SIi1tC J(,VUrftry`:•tatCS J 7111.1 S•n!xe,gn J Slxtelils J Cnunur Es!afus �„LJ fV� JfABO!?uyal Sovereign' iTinlbedfue Select a0' J Grand Seouola vt an'«,,,• 'to,er r1' J rr7,y n1 weah,E Max J G`and 5la!e C. U r&1/ai Sovereign J7imhffluo" Ullra' -J Grand Cantor .1 J No ye-hne 3d JC(and Sa(pnA `d,MAiqu!s vVealharst J Slaiehne J Country MapsOf) NUO)Uer of SOUAI'CS Cololor— </yrE �L Ca61i 1 sit 011P.1 Itll!nF.Oy/n¢rs Whp play ba interested Ira viewing homes with yhur;;UIOr rind sl,rl¢UI shingle vie would like I[ Algae hater'Protection r5res -I ilio ....._ .!d0 yon[100raSs in Out 1100odl(Wdba F. No inforin,gbon other than your address shingle style.And;,olur will be elect»cd. J Yea,Gat nay oldwIN file in da dulabose lir assist ether homeowners J No.ptaasa(10 nal irl:hlly trip Ditto ui application of shinglesi_-. Nlnihm Of%hates t� ,.Color "s 4A 7-t. -AL ,[ t,.p ',.TnttlCoslntshxtglasandap icatin-� . -- ..., — -._.._.—._.. .._. .C01"1100"S Signature ..+- Da!r pl m^Cdtdtidn Carl Of Installnhon (p.. earner's nahlre . ----. . _. -- j 2003 GAFN HOmCUwOgr's Signature __ __,—.._.. ..... 12'0?RTSw71an 12102 RESWT 09/30/05 04:46pm P 001 JELD_V,rEEN `-� i TERI01 6`.10L ED AND FLUSH DOOR 5-YEAR LIMITED 'A'ARRANIv Congratulations on your choice of JELD-WEN interior to this product contained in the Installation, Care and '51 rnolded and flush doors. Every detail of a JFI.D-WEN Maintenance Instructions. If you have not received a copy of YEAR door reveals careful construction,and our commitment the Installation, Care and Maintenance instructions, please `"kM_ "NTM to supe.nor qu:ilit:y.That is why JELD-WFN is offering contact JEL D-WEN for a copy of this publication.JELD-WEN an unmatched 5-Year limited warranty against work rnanship will not be liable for product which has been damaged by and defects in material (1) accident, mishandling, or improper use, (2)negligent operation, (3)improper installation or maintenance, (4)fire, JELD-WEN INTERIOR MOLDED AND FLUSH DOORS f!cod, earthquake, storm,tornado,acts of nature,or any JELD-WEN warrants, subject to the conditions and restrictions other cause beyond the control of JELD-WEN;(5)any products, contained below, that each door manufactured by JELD-WEN components or parts not manufactured by JELD-WEN; shall be free frorn defects in materials or workmanship for a („)defects caused by failure to provide a suitable installation period of five(5)years frorn the date of manufacturc. environmeni for the product; (7) acid ra+n, salt air or other Should a JELD-WEN door be proven defective during the corrosive elements;(8)use of the producL for purposes other warranty period, I'.he buyer's remedies will be limited to the than those for which it was designed; (9)unauthorized following at JELD-WEN's option:(1) repair of the defective attachments or modifications;(10)field application of paint product, (2)replacement of the defective product, including or any other finishing materials causing variation or unsatis- the cost of shipping to the distributor or person making the factory results in gloss level,texture or appearance; (11)bow warranty claim; or(3)reimbursement of the purchase price. or nonalignment in the frame or jamb in which the door is These remedies are the only remedies available for breach hung; or(12)any other abuse or misuse by the original of warranty or any other legal theory. In no event shall purchaser or subsequent user.All disclai!ners and exclusions JELD-WEN be responsible for installation, repainting, rcrlinishir'rg contained herein apply under all conditions. or similar activities connected with the replacement of the LIMITATION OF LIABILITY door. Repair or replacement of the product is warranted for THIS WARRANTY SETS FORTH JELD-WEN'S MAXIMUM LIABILITY ninety(90) days or for the remainder of this warraniy' FOR ITS PRODUCTS.JELD-WEN SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR whichever period is longer. SPFCIAL, INDIRECT,CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES. If the claimed defect is warpage, JELD-WEN reserve=s the right YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY WITH RESPECT TO ANY AND ALL to defer remedy of the defect for a period up to twelve(12) LOSSES OR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY CAUSE WHAT- months from the date the product was installed, since a SOEVFR SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE. JELD-WEN SHALL IN temporary warp condition may occur as the door adjusts to NO EVENT BE{LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL local humidity and'temperature conditions.The deferral wil DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, HOWEVER OCCASIONED, WHETHER not be counted against the five(5)-year warranty period.Aly BY NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE. door panel larger than 3'0" wide by 8'0" (914 mm by 2450 JELD-WEN MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY OR GUARANTEE, mm)high is not warranted against warpage. This warranty Ell HER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING liMPLIED WARRANTIES does not cover warpage not exceeding 1/4" in the plane of OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR FUR- the door itself. POSE TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OR TO ANY SUBSEQUENT INSTALLATION,CARE AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCT11ONS USER OF THE PRODUCT, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY CONTAINED The remedies mentioned herein are valid only when products I1FRCIN. THE REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN SHALL BE SOLE covered by this warranty are properly installed,fiuislied and AND EXCLUSIVE. IN THE EVENT STATE LAW PRECLUDES maintained.There are additional exclusions,which apply EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES,THE 1. Iry �3�,n'3✓F,.t:fr, ,• i. �+: } t .r.. �L 1 may, ti4 ! :'t ra 11'#F .. y«i j4 �i•;V ..`may ,Sti�`�`.;A.6d 5 wx1H?� ;2.�rltxi`�3. t . t�. ) Y r f k, L4 ��t .r}+ ;St'n( �t$ c � 4�'Y �wy �•5�i'6 fi ��. .+ate rky rt .fid,[` .,�+��a,�, '� i . p"'..r ,"1 F.��ti"L- N '4 .•j'a � � i <..f...,* r i K"1 i .:. ) +s, ;k'_.:i,w 3 i.: '�.3r7_.. t �a � .,n.x 9f Fw`.y . y.},,� t'F b.�lr.+,' i.q }�� A 1 I ,r!y+�,rrRa r i y �-. �'�ek'e r. t� �" �e� ��'-�-xn�i��+��S b'f� �. 'r �H`v,a...•�� r": k,�?' .r'' 09/90/OS O4;46pm P. 002 DURATION OF ANY SUCH WARRANTIES SHALL BE NO LONGER, the product is installed. The failure to provide the original THAN,AND THE TIME AND MANNER OF PRESENTING ANY owner with this warranty will not subject JELD-WEN to any CLAIM THEREON SHALL BE THE SAME AS, THAT PROVIDED express or implied warranties, liabilities or remedies in excess IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY STATED HEREIN. of those provided herein.This warranty is not appiicable out- No distributor, dealer or representative of JELD-WEN has the side the United States or Canada. authority to change or modify this warranty, either orally or This warranty allocates the risk of product failure between in writing, in any respect.Any attempt to change and/or JELD-WEN, purchasers and ultimate users of this product. modify this warranty by a distributor,dealer, or representative This allocation is recognized by and reflected in the price of of JELD-WEN will be without legal effect. the goods. The original purchaser of this product acknowl- Cl.A1M PROCEDURE edges that they have read this warranty,understand it and are bound by its terms. To initiate a claim under this warranty, contact the distributor or contractor from whom you purchased the JELD-WEN This limited warranty is effective for all products manufactured doors. If no corrective action has been taken within a reason- by JELD-WEN on or after March 1,2002,and all previous able time,write to: JELD-WEN Doors Warranty Services, warranties shall be considered null and void as to such ATTN:JELD-WEN Marketing, 3303 Lakeport Blvd., Klamath products.Any previous warranties will continue to apply to Falls, OR 97601. Please(a)identify the product that is products manufactured by JELD-WEN prior to March t,2002. involved, the date and place of purchase, and the original purchase price if known; (b)describe completely what the Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of claimed defect is(photographs or sketches are helpful); incidental or consequential damages and/or the limitation on (c)identify yourself and those persons who have already how long an implied warranty lasts,so the above limitations been contacted and state what attempts have been made to and/or exclusions may not apply to you.This warranty gives correct the problem;(d)give the address where the defective you specific legal!rights,and you may also have other rights, product can be inspected; and(e)give a phone number which vary from state to state. where you can be reached. Jf_LD-WEN is one of the world's leading manufacturers of JELD-WEN will investigate your claim and within sixty(60) doors,windows and specialty millwork.We will be glad to days after notification take appropriate action.JELD-WEN assist with advice even after the warranty has expired. For may charge an inspection fee for any onsite inspection that more information on JELD-WEN'S doors,visit our Web site at Is required or that is requested b www'.jeld-wen.com. q G y You. ff it is determined that the product has a defect covered by this warranty,the inspection fee will not be charged. This warranty extends to the original purchaser. The term "original purchaser" as used in this warranty means the contractor/distributor/purchaser of the product. This warranty is not assignable and transferable other than to the "original owner."The "original owner" is the person or entity who is the initial owner of the structure into which the product is installed.The original purchaser hereby agrees to provide this warranty to the original owner of the structure into which r #� r t x- .x. i!r a <yyzr� { *✓ y 4�M N } 1vy ¢ '�y'� a � t ��_ y I HE IN 41� wwgg 3'a GO .5 38YDB ' WeatherMakerTM Two-Speed Split System HEATINGBCOOUN® Heat Pump with Puron® Refrigerant Visit www.carrier.com Installation and Start-Up Instructions NOTE: Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation. This symbol —+ indicates a change since the last issue. 0 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Improper installation,adjustment,alteration,service,maintenance, or use can cause explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury, or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency, or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with the kits or accessories when installing. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for brazing operations. Have fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thor- oughly and follow all warnings or cautions included in literature and attached to the unit.Consult local building codes and National A98516 Electrical Code (NEC) for special requirements. Recognize safety information.This is the safety-alert symbol® Fig. 1—Model 38YDB When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions or 2. Ensure that vapor and liquid tube diameters are appropriate to manuals,be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER,WARNING,CAUTION, capacity of unit. and NOTE. These words are used with the safety-alert symbol. 3. Run refrigerant tubes as directly as possible by avoiding DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in unnecessary turns and bends. severe personal injury or death. 4. When passing refrigerant tubes through the wall,seal opening WARNING signifies hazards which could result in personal injury with RTV or other pliable silicon-based caulk. (See Fig. 2.) or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which 5. Avoid direct tubing contact with water pipes,duct work,floor would result in minor personal injury or product and property joists, wall studs, floors, and walls, and brick. damage.NOTE is used to highlight suggestions which will result 6. Do not suspend refrigerant tubing from joists and studs with a in enhanced installation,reliability, or operation. rigid wire or strap which comes in direct contact with tubing. A WARNING (See Fig.',2.) 7. When necessary, use hanger straps which are 1 in. wide and Before installing,modifying,or servicing system,main elec- conform to shape of tubing insulation. (See Fig. 2.) trical disconnect switch must be in the OFF position. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Lock out and tag 8. Isolate hanger straps from insulation by using metal sleeves switch with a suitable warning label. Electrical shock can bent to conform to shape of insulation. cause personal injury or death. 9. Ensure that tubing insulation is pliable and completely sur- rounds vapor tube. ! CAUTION Outdoor unit contains system refrigerant charge for operation with Puron®Refrigerant systems operate at higher pressures than indoor unit of the same size when connected by 15 It of standard R-22 systems. Be certain that service equipment is field-supplied''or factory accessory tubing.For proper unit opera- rated for R-41 OA. Some R-22 service equipment may not be tion, check refrigerant charge using charging information located acceptable. Check with your distributor. on control box cover or in the Check Charge section of this instruction. INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS IMPORTANT:Maximum liquid-line size is 3/8—in. O.D. for all NOTE: In some cases noise in the living area has been traced to residential applications. AOW gas pulsations from improper installation of equipment. IMPORTANT: Only install the factory-supplied Puron® heat 1. Locate unit away from windows,patios,decks,etc.where unit pump (bi-flow) liquid line filter drier. Obtain replacement filter operation sound may disturb customer. driers from your local distributor. Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue,or change at any time,specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Book1 4 PC 101 Catalog No. 533-80088 Printed in U.S.A. Form 38YDB-5Sl Pg 1 2-03 Replaces: 38YDB-4SI Tab Sa a r NOTE:Avoid contact between tubing and structure 3i8-IN.DIA TIEDOWN KNOCKOUTS IN BASEPAN OUTDOOR WALL INDOOR WALL (2)PLACES CAULK LIQUID TUBE �•i l VAPOR TUBE )1 `1 INSULATION ��=� �J THROUGH THE WALL L b\' ,�•//�/ (� JOIST HANGER STRAP VIEW FROM TOP 83/18" (AROUND VAPOR INSULATION TUBE ONLY) 0 A97548 VAPOR TUBE O MINIMUM TIEDOWN KNOCKOUT O UNIT SIZE MOUNTING DIMENSIONS LOCATIONS O Support Feet Snow Stand A B 024 19 X 24 26 X 32 2-13/16 6-15/16 1"MIN. —� �— 036-060 26 X 32 31 X 35 4 9-3/4 LIQUID TUBE Fig. 3—Mounting Unit to Pad SUSPENSION On rooftop applications, locate unit at least 6 in. above roof A94028 surface. Fig. 2—Connecting Tubing Installation Step 4—Operating Ambient INSTALLATION The minimum outdoor operating ambient in cooling mode is 557, Step 1—Check Equipment and Job Site and the maximum outdoor operating ambient in cooling mode is 125°F. UNPACK UNIT Move to final location.Remove carton,taking care not to damage Step 5—Elevate Unit unit. INSPECT EQUIPMENT 1 CAUTION File claim with shipping company prior to installation if shipment Accumulation of water and ice in base pan may cause is damaged or incomplete. equipment damage. Step 2—Install on a Solid, Level Mounting Pad Elevate unit per local climate and code requirements to provide If conditions or local codes require the unit be attached to pad,tie clearance above estimated snowfall level and ensure adequate down bolts should be used and fastened through knockouts drainage of the unit.Fig.4 shows unit with accessory support feet provided in unit base pan.Refer to unit mounting pattern in Fig.3 installed. Use accessory snow stand in areas where prolonged to determine base pan size and knockout hole location. freezing temperatures are encountered. Refer to separate Installa- On rooftop applications,mount on level platform or frame. Place tion Instructions packaged with accessories. unit above a load-bearing wall and isolate unit and tubing set from structure.Arrange supporting members to adequately support unit and minimize transmission of vibration to building. Consult local codes governing rooftop applications. A CAUTION Do not allow POE lubricant to come into contact with roofing material. POE may deteriorate certain types of synthetic roofing. NOTE: Unit must be level to within f2° (t3/8 in./ft). Step 3—Clearance Requirements When installing, allow sufficient space for airflow clearance, wiring, refrigerant piping, and service. Allow 30-in. clearance to service end of unit and 48 in.above unit.For proper airflow,a 6-in. clearance on 1 side of unit and 12 in. on all remaining sides must be maintained. Maintain a distance of 24 in. between units. Position so water, snow, or ice from roof or eaves cannot fall A98533 directly on unit. Fig. 4—Accessory Support Feet 2 d 8. Install vapor elbow (See Fig. 6B) with equalizer adapter to suction tube of line set and suction connection to indoor coil. Adapter has a 1/4-in. male flare connector for attaching equalizer tube. 9. Connect equalizer tube of TXV to 1/4-in.equalizer fitting on SENSING vapor line adapter. BULB 10. Attach TXV bulb to horizontal section of suction line using EQUALIZER bulb strap provided.(See Fig.6C.)Insulate bulb with factory- TUBE supplied insulation tape(See Fig. 6E). See Fig. 7 for correct positioning of sensing bulb. 11. Proceed with remainder of unit installation. J;TEXPANSION MOSTATIC FAN COILS VALVE Indoor unit (flan coil) comes factory equipped with a bi-flow balance port hard shut-off TXV specifically designed for Puron® A91277 two-speed units. Changeout is not required. Fig. 5—TXV Installed To obtain efficiency rating for 38YDBO37 with FV4ANB006, fancoil TXV must be replaced with factory supplied TXV. Step 6—Check Indoor Expansion Device Rel2lacine R-22 TXV or Non-Balance Port Puron®TXV CAUTION 1. Remove any existing refrigerant and ensure coil has not been exposed to atmospheric pressure for more than 15 minutes. For proper unit operation and reliability, units must be 2• Remove coil access panel and fitting door from cabinet. installed with balance port hard shutoff TXV specifically designed to operate with Puron® two-speed unit. Do not 3. Remove and save TXV support clamp using a 5/16-in, nut install with evaporator coils having capillary tube metering driver. devices. 4. Remove TXV using a backup wrench on flare connections to prevent damage to tubing. The 38YDBO37 unit includes a factory supplied TXV kit.No other size unit includes factory supplied TXV kit. 5. Using wire cutters,cut equalizer tube off flush with vapor tube inside cabinet. FURNACE COILS 6. Remove bulb from vapor tube inside cabinet. Puron® furnace coils come factory equipped with bi-flow, hard shutoff TXVs specifically designed for Puron© two-speed units. 7• Braze equalizer stub-tube closed. Use protective barrier as No changeout is required. necessary to prevent damage to drain pan. Remove existing AccuRater® piston from indoor coil and install IMPORTANT:Route the equalizer tube of approved Puron® field accessory TXV. TXV through suction line connection opening in fitting door prior to replacing fitting panel around tubing. IMPORTANT:The TXV should be mounted as close to the indoor coil as possible and in a vertical, upright position. Avoid 8. Install TXV (Fig. 6A) with 3/8-in. copper inlet tube through mounting the inlet tube vertically down. A factory-supplied or small hole in service panel.Use wrench and backup wrench, approved filter drier must be installed in the liquid line. to avoid damage to tubing valve. Install TXV kit to indoor coil as follows: 9. Reinstall TXV support clamp(removed in item 3). Installing TXV in Place of Piston 10. Attach TXV bulb to vapor tube inside cabinet in same location as original was removed from using supplied bulb strap(See 1. Ensure coil has not been exposed to atmospheric pressure for Fig. 6C).',Insulate bulb with factory-supplied insulation tape more than 15 minutes. (See Fig.!,6E)• See Fig. 7 for correct positioning of sensing 2. Remove indoor coil inlet tube at piston body inlet. Use bulb. back-up wrench to prevent damage. 11. Route equalizer tube through suction connection opening 3. Remove piston retainer, being careful not to damage sealing (large hole) in fitting panel and install fitting panel in place. surface of O-ring. 12. Sweat inlet of TXV, marked "IN," to liquid line. Avoid 4. Remove and discard factory-installed piston.(Replace retainer excessive heat which could damage valve. if O-ring is damaged.) 13. Install vapor elbow (See Fig. 6B) with equalizer adapter to 5. Reinstall piston retainer in piston body. vapor line of line set and vapor connection to indoor coil. 6. Replace indoor coil inlet tube.Use back-up wrench to prevent Adapter has a 1/4-in. male flare connector for attaching damage. equalizer,tube. (See Fig. 6B.) 14. Connect equalizer tube of TXV to 1/4-in.equalizer fitting on CAUTIONvapor line adapter.Use backup wrench to prevent damage to To prevent damage to the unit,use a brazing shield and wrap equalizerfitting. TXV with wet cloth. 15. Proceed with remainder of unit installation. 7. Sweat swivel adapter(See Fig.6D)to inlet of indoor coil and LONG-LINE APPLICATIONS, INSTALL LIQUID-LINE attach to TXV (See Fig. 6A) outlet. Use backup wrench to SOLENOID VALVE (LSV) avoid damage to tubing or valve. Sweat inlet of TXV,marked For refrigerant piping arrangements with equivalent lengths "IN,"to liquid line.Avoid excessive heat which could damage greater than 50 ft or when elevation difference between indoor valve. and/or outdoor unit is greater than f 20 ft,follow all requirements 3 B SENSING BULB STRAP—� INLET D A • 8 0' LO 4 0' LO OIL A00399 R Fig. 7—Positioning of Sensing Bulb E Table 1—Refrigerant Connections and BULB INSULATION Recommended LiquidP and Vapor Tube Diameters 0 TAPE (In.) ® UNIT LIQUID VAPOR VAPOR(LONG-LINE) 0 0 SIZE Connection Tube Connection Tube Connection Tube e Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter e A01418 024 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 036 3/8 3/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 7/8 Fig. 6—TXV Kit Contents 037,046 3/8 3/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 1-1I8 of the Long-Line Guideline section in the Application Guideline 060 3/8 3/8 7/8 1-1/8 7/8Notes: and Service Manual—Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps Using 1.Tube diameters are for lengths up to 50 equivalent ft and/or 20 ft vertical Puron©Refrigerant.If required by Long-Line Application Guide- differential. 2.Do not increase or decrease tubing sizes. line, install LSV kit P/N KHALSO40ILLS specifically designed 3.If required by local codes,Pressure GuardTm kit is available.See Product for Puron® Heat Pump. LSV should be installed between filter Data Digest for part numbers. drier and indoor coil as close as possible to outdoor unit(within 2 feet). (See Fig. 13 for wiring diagram.) Follow the Installation If refrigerant tubes or indoor coil are exposed to atmosphere,they Instructions included with accessory kit. must be evacuated to 500 microns to eliminate contamination and IMPORTANT:Flow arrow must point toward outdoor unit. moisture in the system. OUTDOOR UNIT CONNECTED TO FACTORY-APPROVED Step 7—Make Piping Connections INDOOR UNIT These outdoor units are carefully evaluated and listed with specific A WARNING indoor coils for proper system performance. Relieve pressure and recover all refrigerant before system IMPORTANT: Do not apply to indoor coils that are not factory repair or final unit disposal to avoid personal injury or death. approved combinations. Use all service ports and open all flow-control devices, IMPORTANT: For 036 size units matched with the including solenoid valves. FV/40FK/FK005 or the FV/40FK/FK006, or for the 38YDBO48 used with the FV/40FK/FK006,a piston change is required.Refer rCAUTION to the KHAPX0201CPA Installation Instructions for details. Do not leave system open to atmosphere any longer than INSTALL ADAPTER TUBE minimum required for installation. POE oil in compressor is 1. Remove plastic retainer holding outdoor piston in liquid line extremely susceptible to moisture absorption. Always keep service valve. ends of tubing sealed during installation. 2. Check to be sure outdoor piston is properly installed in liquid line service valve. A CAUTION 3. Locate plastic bag taped to unit containing adapter tube. 4. Remove Teflon washer from bag and install on open end of If ANY refrigerant tubing is buried, provide a 6 in. vertical liquid service valve. rise at service valve. Refrigerant tubing lengths up to 36 in. 5. Remove adapter tube from bag and connect threaded nut to may be buried without further special consideration.Do NOT bury lines for lengths over 36 in. liquid service valve. Tighten nut finger tight and then with wrench an additional 1/2 turn (15 ft-lb). DO NOT OVER- Outdoor units may be connected to indoor section using accessory TIGHTEN! tubing package or field-supplied refrigerant grade tubing of correct REFRIGERANT TUBING AND FILTER DRIER size and condition.Tubing diameters listed in Table 1 are adequate for equivalent lengths up to 50 ft.For tubing requirements beyond ! CAUTION 50 ft, substantial capacity and performance losses will occur. Installation of filter drier in liquid line is required. Follow the recommendations in the Application Guideline and Service Manual—Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps Using Pu- Connect vapor tubing to fittings on outdoor unit vapor service ron®Refrigerant to minimize losses. valve. Connect liquid tubing to filter drier. (See Table 1 and Fig. Refer to Table 1 for field tubing diameters.Refer to Table 2 for 9.)Connect other end of filter drier to adapter tube on liquid line accessory requirements. service valve. 4 - Table 2—Accessory Usage REQUIRED FOR LONG;LINE REQUIRED FOR ACCESSORY APPLICATIONS" SEACOAST APPLICATIONS (OVER 50 FT) (WITHIN 2 MILES) Coastal Filter No Yes Support Feet No Recommended Puron®Balance-Port Hard Shutoff TXV Yest Yest Puron®Liquid-Line Solenoid Valve for Heating HALS0401LLS No 'For tubing line sets between 50 and 175 ft horizontal or 20 ft vertical differential refer to Application Guideline and Service Manual—Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps Using Puron@ Refrigerant.Crankcase heater and start assist are standard on two-speed units. t Required for all applications. SWEAT CONNECTION install unit in system where voltage may fluctuate above or below permissible limits. CAUTIONNOTE: Use copper wire only between disconnect switch and To prevent damage to unit or service valves, observe the unit. following: NOTE: Install branch circuit disconnect of adequate size per •Use a brazing shield. NEC to handle unit starting current.Locate disconnect within sight • Wrap service valves with wet cloth or use a heat sink from and readily accessible from unit,per Section 440-14 of NEC. material. ROUTE GROUND AND POWER WIRES Braze sweat connections using industry accepted methods and Remove access panel and control box cover to gain access to unit materials. Do not use soft solder (materials which melt below wiring. Extend wires from disconnect through power wiring hole 800°F). Consult local code requirements. provided and'into unit control box. Size wires per NEC but not LEAK CHECKING smaller than minimum wire size shown in Product Data Digest. Leak test all joints in indoor, outdoor, and refrigerant tubing. r WARNING EVACUATE REFRIGERANT TUBING AND INDOOR COIL The unit cabinet must have as uninterrupted or unbroken ground to ;minimize personal injury if an electrical fault CAUTION should occur. The ground may consist of electrical wire or To avoid compressor damage,never use the system compres- metal conduit when installed in accordance with existing sor as a vacuum pump. electrical codes.Failure to follow this warning can result in an electric shock,fire, or death. Refrigerant tubes and indoor coil must be evacuated to 500 microns. CONNECT GROUND AND POWER WIRES IMPORTANT:Never open system under vacuum to atmosphere Connect ground wire to ground connection in control box for without first breaking it open with nitrogen. safety. Connect power wiring to leads provided as shown in Fig. 11. Deep Vacuum Method CONNECT CONTROL WIRING The deep vacuum method requires a vacuum pump capable of Putting a minimum vacuum of 500 microns and a vacuum gage or Route 24v control wires through control wiring grommet and thermistor capable of accurately measuring this vacuum depth.The connect to leads provided in control box. (See Fig. 12.) deep vacuum method is the most positive way of assuring a system Use No. 18 AWG color-coded,insulated(35°C minimum)wire.If is free of air and liquid water. (See Fig. 10.) thermostat is located more than 100 ft from unit, as measured FINAL TUBING CHECK along the control voltage wires,use No. 16 AWG color-coded wire to avoid excessive voltage drop. IMPORTANT: Check to be certain factory tubing on both indoor and outdoor trait has not shifted during shipment.Ensure tubes are All wiring must be NEC Class 1 and must be separated from not rubbing against each other or any sheet metal. Pay close incoming power leads. attention to feeder tubes,making sure wire ties on feeder tubes are The outdoor unit requires a minimum of 27-va,24v control power. secure and tight. FINAL WIRING CHECK Step 8—Make Electrical Connections IMPORTANT: Check factory wiring and wire connections to ensure terminations are secured properly. Check wire routing to A WARNING ensure wires are not in contact with tubing, sheet metal, etc. To avoid personal injury or death,do not supply power to unit Step 9—Install Electrical Accessories with compressor terminal box cover removed. GENERAL Be sure field wiring complies with local and national fire, safety, Refer to the individual instructions packaged with kits or acces- asories when installing.The liquid line solenoid valve accessory is and electrical codes,and voltage to system is within limits shown on unit rating plate.Contact local power company for correction of available on these units. See Fig. 13 for wiring diagram. improper voltage. See unit rating plate for recommended circuit Step 10—Make Airflow Selections protection device. AIRFLOW SELECTION FOR 58CVA/58CVX FURNACES NOTE: Operation of unit on improper line voltage constitutes The 58CVA/58CVX Non-Condensing Variable Speed Furnaces abuse and could affect unit reliability.See unit rating plate.Do not provide high- and low-speed blower operation to match the 5 t Table 3—Required Liquid-Line Temperature (°F) SWEAT/FLARE ADAPTER LIQUID PRESSURE AT REQUIRED SUBCOOLING TEMPERATURE SERVICE VALVE (°F) (PSIG) 5 10 15 20 TEFLON 174 56 51 46 41 SEAL 181 58 53 48 43 188 61 56 51 46 195 63 58 53 48 202 65 60 55 50 209 67 62 57 52 PISTON 216 69 64 59 54 223 71 66 61 56 PISTON BODY 230 73 68 63 58 237 75 70 65 60 244 77 72 67 62 251 79 74 69 64 LIQUID SERVICE VALVE 258 81 76 71 66 265 82 77 72 67 272 84 79 74 69 A01214 86 81 76 1 71 286 88 Ss 78 73 p Fig. 8—Liquid Service Valve with Sweat Adapter z8s 293 89 84 79 74 Tube 300 91 86 81 76 LIQUID-LINE 307 93 88 83 78 FILTER-DRIER 314 94 89 84 79 LIQUID 321 96 91 86 81 SERVICE 328 97 92 87 82 VALVE 335 99 94 89 84 342 100 95 90 85 349 102 97 92 87 356 103 98 93 88 363 105 100 95 90 370 106 101 96 91 377 107 102 97 92 384 109 104 99 94 391 110 105 100 95 398 112 107 102 97 A01215 405 113 108 103 98 Fig. 9—Filter Drier with Sweat Adapter Tube and 412 114 1 109 104 99 Liquid Tube 419 115 110 105 100 426 117 112 107 102 5000 433 118 113 108 103 4500 440 119 114 109 104 447 120 115 110 105 4000 454 122 117 112 107 3500 LEAK IN 461 123 118 113 108 0 3000 SYSTEM 468 124 119 114 109 0.2500 475 125 120 115 110 V 482 126 121 116 111 22000 - 489 2000489 127 122 117 112 1500 VACUUM TIGHT TOO WET 496 129 124 119 114 1000 503 130 125 120 115 500 TIGHT 510 131 126 121 116 DRY SYSTEM 517 132 127 122 117 524 133 128 123 118 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 531 134 129 124 119 MINUTES 538 135 130 125 120 A95424 545 136 131 126 121 Fig. 10—Deep Vacuum Graph 552 137 132 127 122 capacities of the compressor at high and low speeds.To select the 559 138 133 128 123 recommended airflow and for adjustments to the manual switches 566 139 134 129 124 labeled SW 1,A/C and CF on the control board refer to the furnace 573 140 135 130 125 Installation, Start-Up, and Operating Instructions. The 580 141 136 131 126 58CVA/58CVX utilizes a control center that allows the installing 587 142 137 132 127 technician to select the proper airflows. The A/C switch deter- 594 143 138 133 128 mines the airflow during high speed compressor operation. Air- 601 144 139 134 129 flow for high and low speed can be calculated at either 350 CFM 608 145 140 135 130 6 per ton or 400 CFM per ton based on the positions of SWI-5. Table 4—LED Control Function Light Code AIRFLOW SELECTION FOR FK4,FV4,OR 40FK FAN COILS The FK4, FV4, and 40FK provide high- and low-speed blower CODE DEFINITION operation to match the capacities of compressor at high and low Constant flash No demand 10 speeds.To select recommended airflow,refer to the FK4,FV4,or No pause Stand by 40FK Installation Instructions. The FK4, FV4, and 40FK utilizes 1 flash Low-speed operation 9 an EASY SELECT control board that allows the installing w/pause flashes technician to select proper airflows. The ORANGE SYSTEM 2 flpause heHigh-speed operation 8 TYPE JUMPER wire should be set to HP—EFF or 3 flashesHP—COMFORT. The BLUE AC/HP SIZE JUMPER is used to w/pause Outdoor ambient thermistor failure select airflow to match the outdoor unit nominal size in tons of 4 flashesOutdoor coil thermistor failure 6 cooling. The BLACK AC/HP CFM ADJUST jumper is used to w/pause make slight adjustments to the selected airflow tonnage. (See 3 flashes Fancoil Installation Instructions for setting required airflow.)This pause Thermistor out of ranget 5 fan coil has an adjustable blower off delay factory set at 90 sec.for 4 flashes high-and low-speed blower operation. 5 flashes pause Low pressure switch trip 4 For other combinations of equipment consult the Product Data 1 flash Digest. 5 flashes Step 11—Start-Up w/pause High pressure switch trip 3 2 flashes CAUTION 6 flashes ompressor V,N„trip 2 w/pause To prevent compressor damage or personal injury, observe Constant light the following: No pause Board failure 1 • Do not overcharge system with refrigerant. No flash 'Function light signal order of importance in case of multiple signal request;1 Do not operate unit in a vacuum or at negative pressure. is most important. • Do not disable low-pressure switch. tCheck both thermistors to determine which is faulty. t CAUTION DIS ONNE T To prevent personal injury wear safety glasses, protective PER N.E. .AND/OR LO AL_ODES clothing, and gloves when handling refrigerant and observe ONTA TOR the following: FIELD POWER O Back seating service valves are not equipped with Schrader ——————————— Ovalves. Fully back seat (counter clockwise) valve system WIRING before removing gage port cap. O O r CAUTION FIELD GROUND ———————-0 Do not ventlrefrigerant to atmosphere.Recover during system WIRING_ GROUND repair or final unit disposal. LUG A91306 Follow these steps to properly start up the system: Fig. 11—Line Power Connections 1. The outdoor unit is equipped with a crankcase heater which operates when the compressor is OFF. Energize crankcase Table 5—Defrost Dip Switch Settings heater 24',hr before starting unit. To energize heater only, set indoor thermostat to OFF position and close power disconnect TIME DIP SWITCH#1 DIP SWITCH#2 to unit. 30 up down NOTE: Starting the compressor without a minimum of 12 hr of 60 down up crankcase heat prior to initial start-up, may result in compressor 90 down down chattering and possible damage to the compressor. 120 up up 2. Fully back seat(open) liquid and vapor tube service valves. AIRFLOW SELECTION FOR 58MVP FURNACES 3. Unit is shipped with valve stem(s) front seated and caps The 58MVP Condensing Variable-Speed Furnaces provide high- installed.Replace stem caps after system is opened to refrig- and low-speed blower operation to match the capacities of com- erant flow(back seated).Replace caps finger tight and tighten pressor at high and low speeds. To select recommended airflow, additional 1/12 turn(20 ft-lb torque)with wrench. refer to the 58MVP Installation Instructions. The 58MVP utilizes 4. Close electrical disconnects to energize system. a control center that allows the installing technician to select 5. Set room thermostat at desired temperature. Be sure the set proper airflows. For adjustments to the manual switches labeled point is below indoor ambient and is set low enough to A/C and CF and recommended switch positions, refer to Furnace energize desired speed. Installation Instructions for setting required airflow. High-speed NOTE: Carrier electronic thermostats are equipped with a 15- airflow is determined by the position of the A/C switches, and minute staging timer.This timer prevents the dual capacity system low-speed airflow is determined by the position of the CF from operating at high capacity until unit has been operating in low switches. capacity for 15 minutes unless there is at least a 5°F difference between room temperature and thermostat set point.To force high capacity, adjust the set point at least 5° below room ambient for 7 Table 6—Factory Defaults FAILED COMPONENT FUNCTION DEFAULT Defrost Initiation Defrost is initiated based on coil Ambient Thermistor temperature and time. One minute fan off delay in cooling No delay function greater than or equal to 100°F Outdoor Coil Thermistor Defrost Initiation and Termination Defrost occurs at each time interval,but terminate after 5 minutes cooling or 5° above room ambient for heating. NOTE: In heating mode, check refrigerant charge only when 6. Set room thermostat to COOL or HEAT and fan control to pressures are stable. If accessory vapor pressure switch is applied AUTO or ON as desired. Wait for appropriate time delay(s). and operating conditions cause vapor pressure switch and thereby Operate unit for 15 minutes. Check refrigerant charge. outdoor fan to cycle, check refrigerant charge in cooling or lower NOTE: If unit has not operated within the past 12 hr or following indoor dry bulb temperature.If in doubt,remove charge and weigh a unit power-up, upon the next thermostat high- or low-speed in correct refrigerant charge. demand,unit operates for a minimum of 5 minutes in high-speed. NOTE: When charging is necessary during heating season, Step 12—Check Charge charge must be weighed in accordance with unit rating plate f0.6 oz/ft of 3/8-in. liquid line above or below 15 ft respectively. A WARNING EXAMPLE: Service valve gage ports are not equipped with Schrader To calculate additional charge required for a 25-ft line set: valves.To prevent personal injury,make sure gage manifold 25 ft- 15 ft= 10 ft X 0.6 oz/ft= 6 oz of additional charge is connected to the valve gage ports before moving valves off fully back seated position. Wear safety glasses and gloves Step 13—System Functions and Sequence of Operation when handling refrigerant. The outdoor unit control system has special functions. The UNIT CHARGE following is an overview of the two-speed control functions: Factory charge is shown on unit rating plate.With unit operating, COOLING OPERATION charge Puron©units with liquid using a commercial type metering This product utilizes a 2-stage cooling indoor thermostat. With a device manifold hose. Charge refrigerant into suction line. To call for first stage cooling (Yl), the outdoor fan and low capacity check charge in cooling mode, refer to Cooling Only Procedure. compressor are energized. If low capacity cannot satisfy cooling To check charge in heating mode, refer to Heating Check Chart demand,high capacity is energized(Yl and Y2 or just Y2)by the Procedure. second stage of indoor thermostat.After second stage is satisfied, Adjust charge in both heating and cooling by following procedure the unit returns to low-capacity operation until first stage is shown on charging tables located on unit pink charging label on satisfied or until second stage is required again. When both first back side of access panel. stage and second stage cooling are satisfied, the compressor will NOTE: Unit is to be charged in high capacity only.Charging in shut off. low capacity may cause compressor chattering and possible NOTE: If unit has not operated within the past 12 hr,or following damage to the compressor. a unit power-up, upon the next thermostat high- or low-speed COOLING ONLY PROCEDURE demand,unit operates for a minimum of 5 minutes on high speed. 1. Operate unit a minimum of 15 minutes before checking NOTE: Outdoor fan motor will continue to operate for one charge. minute after compressor shuts off,when outdoor ambient is greater 2. Measure liquid service valve pressure by attaching and insu- than 100°F. lating an accurate Puron©gage to service port. NOTE: When two-speed unit is operating in low-capacity cool- 3. Measure liquid line temperature by attaching an accurate ing,system vapor(suction)pressure will be higher than a standard thermistor type or electronic thermometer to liquid line near single-speed system or high-speed operation. This normal opera- outdoor coil, tion is due to the reduced capacity operating with typically larger 4. Refer to charging label for required subcooling temperatures. indoor and outdoor coils. 5. Refer to Table 3. Find the point where required subcooling HEATING OPERATION temperature intersects measured liquid service valve pressure. This product utilizes a 3-stage heating indoor thermostat. With a 6. To obtain required subcooling temperature at a specific liquid call for first stage heating(Yl), the outdoor fan and low capacity line pressure, add refrigerant if liquid line temperature is compressor are energized. If low capacity cannot satisfy heating higher than indicated or reclaim refrigerant if temperature is demand, high capacity is energized (Y1 and Y2) by the second lower. Allow a tolerance of f 3°F. stage of the indoor thermostat. Auxiliary or back up heat is HEATING CHECK CHARGE PROCEDURE controlled by third stage (W1). After second stage of heat is To check system operation during heating cycle, refer to the satisfied,the unit returns to low capacity operation until first stage Heating Pump Charging Instructions on outdoor unit. This chart is satisfied or until second stage is required again.When both first indicates whether a correct relationship exists between system stage and second stage heating are satisfied, the compressor will operating pressure and air temperature entering indoor and outdoor shut off. units. If pressure and temperature do not match on chart, system NOTE: If unit has not operated within the past 12 hr,or following refrigerant charge may not be correct. Do not use chart to adjust a unit power-up, upon the next thermostat high- or low-speed refrigerant charge. demand,unit operates for a minimum of 5 minutes on high speed. 8 ` PROGRAMMABLE 40FK/FV4 THERMIDISTAT THERMOSTAT FK4 TWO-SPEED CONTROL SINGLE-STAGE TWO-SPEED MODEL 2S FAN COIL HEAT PUMP MODEL RH FURNACE HEAT PUMP DH RVS COOLING 2/W2 ------------- J`9 low- b JUMPER ^�] COOUHEATY1IW2 ------------- yi 24 VAC HOT -- R -------- x-�R STAGE 1 FAN l�F -- 1-1 HEAT STAGE FW W1 ---- ---- Wi COOUHEAT y/Y2 -___ -L'J ____ Y2 COOL/HEAT Y1 _______- yi STAGE u STAGE 1 RVS COOLING -------- � -FAN ---- EAT y/ __ Y/Y2 -------- Y2 24 VAC HOT E2 — ---- — ---' -ti.J STAGE STAGE 2 - Q HEAT STAGE 3 WNJt - W i ------- - `©1 J2 JUMPER 24 VAC COMM 24 VAC COMM -- Ca ----------PLE] N/A FHUM ` N/A ❑B HUMIDIFYHUM HUMIDIFIER _j (24 VAC) OUTDOOR S1 NIA r� OUTDOOR SENSOR OUTDOOR I S1 -- SENSOR 'I CONNECTION S2 SENSOR iL CONNECTION S2 ----------------- � See notes 1, 2,and 3 A01427 See notes 1, 2, 3,7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 A01422 NON-PROGRAMMABLE 40FK/FV4 THERMOSTAT FK4 TWO-SPEED MODEL 2S FAN COIL HEAT PUMP PROGRAMMABLE DUAL FUEL TWO-SPEED THERMOSTAT SINGLE-STAGE OH MODELDF FURNACE HEAT PUMP � JI JUMPER � (� 24 VAC HOT EF - R - E 24 VAC HOT �R -- R ----- 24 VAC COMM ---------- -OFAN rG HEAT STAGE FAN - ❑G i - COOUHEAT Y/Y2 - VIY2 -------- Y2 COOUHEAT STAGE - - iSoTMvaessonw �] HEAT STAGE 3 W/Wi - V'/1 RVS COOLING ONJ2 -- --- ---- -q-J J2 JUMPER COOUHEAT STAGE 1 - iwuPnassaa I low RVS COOLING O/W2 - -------- O COOL/HEAT Y1 --- V1 ________ y1 24 VAC COM C -- C ----- STAGE 1 N/A ❑B N/A OUTDOOR S1 RVS SENSING �L r OUTDOOR SENSOR OUTDOOR I S1 SENSOR CONNECTION 52 SENSOR CONNECTIONS - "----'-"'-� See notes 1, 2, 3, and 4 See notes 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, and 12 A01425 A01423 THERMIDISTAT 40FK/FV4 TWO-STAGE CONTROL FK4 TWO-SPEED THERMIDISTAT FURNACE MODEL RH FAN COIL HEAT PUMP CONTROL WITH PSC TWO-SPEED MODEL RH BLOWER MOTOR HEAT PUMP RVS COOLINGCOOL/ RVS COOLING ONV2 -------------- R--F2]STAGE I AT Yt STAGE 1 - COOL/HEAT Y1IW2 ---------------- HEAT --- --- -----HEAT STAGE 3 YY/W7 --- W7 -- Wi STAGE 1 - STAGECOOLJHEAT y/V2 _ W2 J2 JUMPER HEAT STAGE 3 W/Wi ---- WIW7------- STAGE ----- W1 STAGE 2 - j - STAGE 2 AT Y/Y2 ---- Y/Y2 ----- Y2 ^ STAGE 2 FAN I� _I I Y/Y� - Y2 FAN ED-f ____ -El [] 24 VAC HOT RR ( - © �--� 24 VAC HOT ED ---- - R� ----- -- R - - 0 - REMOVE JI W2 DEHUMIDIFY n 24 VAC COMM I f ---- ----- `-� 24 VAC COMM �-.--_ N/A HUM ___ HUMIDIFY HUM _ HUMIDIFIER R HUMIDIFY HUM -_ HUMIDIFIER N/A B24 VAC) OUTDOOR N/A �B OUTDOOR I(�S1 SENSOR OUTDOOR SENSOR y I OUTDOOR �S1 '- SENSOR -I CONNECTION S2 ------------� SENSOR CONNECTION S2 -----------------J See notes 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, and 10 A01421 See notes 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 A01426 Fig. 12—Typical 24V Circuit Connections 9 h THERMIDISTAT VARIABLE-SPEED PROGRAMMABLE VARIABLE CONTROL CONDENSING TWO-SPEED DUAL FUEL SPEED .ice MODEL RH FURNACE HEAT PUMP THERMOSTAT CONDENSING TWO-SPEED MODEL DF FURNACE HEAT PUMP RVS COOLING O/W2 ---_6EI - p� 24 VAC HOT Ea --- - -COOUHEAT 1/W ---- -_- _ ViSTAGE 1 FANHEAT STAGE3 W/^}!1 ----- --- W1 HEAT STAGE3 W/W1COOL/HEAT 11.4.TF1STAGE 2 ----- ___-- y2 COOUHEAT STAGE 2 FAN �G - _____ -G �coManesson nu a RVS COOLING OIW2 --- ---- -- O 24 VAC HOT ------- lam R� ----- �R ----- COOUHEAT O 1 O STAGE 1 DEHUMIDIFY HUM CO ----- J`❑C W2 24 VAC COMM , HUM ��---- 24 VAC COMM HUMIDIFY HUM __ HUMIDIFIER _I N/A HUM 24 VAC N/A �8 RVS SENSING �L OUTDOOR R I OUTDOOR SENSOR ENSO CONNECTION� ---------------- CONNECTIONS] SS27 �----O E--SS-R- ---1� See notes 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 13 See notes 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, and 12 VARIABLE SPEED 80% A03033 A03036 NON-CONDENSING FURNACE PROGRAMMABLE TWO-STAGE TWO-SPEED DUAL FUEL FURNACE HEAT PUMP THERMIDISTAT THERMOSTAT CONTROL TWO-SPEED MODEL RH HEAT PUMP �-------� 24 VAC HOT RVS COOLING HEAT/COOL /W2 -� W2 --- Y1 FAN STAGE 1 HEAT STAGE 3 HEAT STAGE W/M/ -- W/ ---- W1 (FURNACE) HEAT/COOLCOOL/HEAT Y/Y2 -- YIY2 ---- Y2 STAGE2 Y0 -- Y2 STAGE2 (COMPRESSOR HI) FAN E -- -E] RVS COOLING 24 VAC HOT a -- R ----- ZJ COOL/HEAT ' STAGE 1 1/W2 --- -- -- Y7 (COMPRESSOR LO) 24 VAC COM L=J -- COM ---- - T-�C W7 \ a HUM \\ 24 VAC COM C� -- - C� -- J`-FCC DEHUMIDIFY HUM i \ N/p, HUM IPL9_701 I HUMIDIFY HUM HUMIDIFIER ,j RVS SENSING�L (24 VAC) _ OUTDOOR N/A �B OUTDOOR S1 SENSOR i rr OUTDOOR OUTDOOR �S1 SENSOR CONNECTION S2 ------------� SENSOR CONNECTIONS S2 ------------ SUGGESTED DIP� See notes 1,2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 SWITCH SETTINGS A03034 See notes 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, and 12 VARIABLE SPEED BO% A01424 NON-CONDENSING FURNACE PROGRAMMABLE DUALFUEL TWO-SPEED THERMOSTAT HEAT PUMP MODEL OF RVS COOLING ONV2 I y� I I- �0 COOLlHSTAGE HEAT HEtTTESTAGE 3 WIW7 -- W/W1 ---- COOLIHEAT STAGE 2 '"REssoa, © -- JD 24 VAC HOT RO -- R ----- �-✓� 24 VAC COMM C� -- COM ---- _LCJ N/A HUM DHUM RVS SENSING O OUTDOOR OUTDOOR -Fr SENSOR SENSOR CONNECTIONS S2r -----------j See notes 1,2, 3, 5, 7, 8,and 12 A03035 -� Fig. 12-Typical 24V Circuit Connections (Cont'd) 10 v LEGEND 24 VOLT FACTORY WIRING ---- 24 VOLT FIELD WIRING r� FIELD SPLICE CONNECTION RELAY SPDT,PILOT DUTY T 24-V COIL(HN61 KK324) b OR EQUIVALENT R1 _Hjo HUMIDISTAT,OPENS ON U HUMIDITY RISE(HL38MG026) AFS AIRFLOW SELECTOR O RELAY COIL A03038 WIRING DIAGRAM NOTES: 1. Wiring must conform to NEC or local codes. 2. Underlined letter on thermostat terminal indicates its usage. For example: O/W2 means O is energized in cooling mode. 3. Refer to indoor unit Installation Instructions for any additional features and wiring information. 4. Non-Programmable Model 2S01—B,when used in heat pump installations(jumper R1'9 NOT cut),uses O/W2 to control reversing valve. 5. Furnace must control its own second-stage operation via furnace control algorithms. Refer to furnace Installation Instructions for proper setup. 6. To activate dehumidify function on FK4 or FV4 remove J1 jumper at fan coil control board. 7. Heat pump MUST have a high-pressure switch for dual fuel applications. 8. Outdoor air temperature sensor must be attached in all dual fuel applications. 9. Thermidistat Dip Switch No. l should be set in ON position for heat pump installations. 10. Thermidistat Dip Switch No. 2 should be set in the ON position for dual capacity compressor operation. 11. Thermidistat Configuration Option No. 10"Dual Fuel Selection"must be turned ON in all dual fuel applications. 12. Dual Fuel Dip Switch—D (no. 4)must be set in the ON position for dual capacity compressor operation. 13. The DE jumper located next to the DHUM terminal must be removed to enable the DEHUM input. FK4/FV4 TWO-SPEED FAN COIL HEAT PUMP YI it 1 H IY2 A JUMPER ^1 24 VAC HOT Ra _ M-3- - _. - - - , R r 1 I� 1//LLSS 24 VAC COM C� - �- - - - - ' - I�Q( �1 FAN U IJ LJ I1 COOL/HEAT STAGE 2 Y/Y2 - Y/Y2 - - - - - I 1 �__ -rl HEAT STAGE 3 /W2 - - 1 _ Y2 J2 JUMPER [P 2 - _ - - - _ `_E] 1 1 RVS COOLING /W2 - - - - - - `-i0 I 1 1 COOL/HEAT STAGE 1 N/A 8❑ OUTDOOR S1 SENSOR CONNECTION S2 A03039 Fig. 13—Typical Solenoid Valve Wiring 11 Table 7—Two-Speed Compressor ,,,k (Winding Resistance at 70°F ± 200) WINDING 024 036/037 048 060 > d Start(S-C) 2.280 1.850 1.459 0.740 c rn c Run(R-C) 0.770 0.745 0.552 0.356 > c 3 c will continue to operate for one minute after the compressor shuts Of U ..°a U U off when the outdoor ambient is greater than 100°F. LiI. .9 After termination of a defrost cycle,the outdoor fan delays coming IQ Q Low Pressure on for 20 sec. This allows refrigerant system to recover outdoor Switch Connector coil heat and minimize the"steam cloud"effect. -High Pressure •� a Switch Connector DEFROST TIME SELECTION t Thermistor The defrost interval can be field selected, dependent on local or Connection P o geographical requirements. It is factory set at 90 minutes but can Defrost Time „ be changed to either 30,60,or 120 minutes.To select defrost time, Selectors 00� ' y To Run set dip switches located on the left side of the unit board(See Fig. n m Capacitor Thermostat-014). See Table 5 for Defrost Dip Switch Settings. Low Voltage A O.D.F.Connection DEFROST Connector 6 Crankcase Heater BBHK3B� � Connection The dual capacity control logic for defrost function is time and temperature initiated, time or temperature terminated. Reserved for Defrost only occurs at outdoor temperatures less than 507. The Future Use control initiates defrost when outdoor coil thermistor is 307(f2°) A01192 or less, and selected defrost time(interval)has been accumulated Fig. 14—Control Board during unit operation. Termination occurs when coil thermistor reaches 80°F (f5°) or defrost period reaches a maximum of 10 STATUS FUNCTION LIGHTS minutes.Defrost will occur at the compressor capacity that is being A system control STATUS function light is located on the outdoor called for. During defrost, unit operates in high or low capacity, unit control board. (See Fig. 14.) The STATUS light provides energizes reversing valve O and auxiliary heat W2, and de- indication signals for several system operations. See Table 4 for energizes outdoor fan.Upon termination,there is a 20-sec delay in codes and definitions. Table 4 also provides the order of signal outdoor fan being energized. importance. FIELD-INITIATED FORCED DEFROST NOTE: Only one code will be displayed on the outdoor unit By placing a jumper across forced defrost terminals(See Fig. 14) control board (the most recent, with the highest priority). for a minimum of 5 sec and then removing it,a defrost cycle can FACTORY DEFAULTS be initiated. The cycle occurs only if outdoor ambient is less than 507,regardless of outdoor coil temperature.The cycle terminates Factory defaults have been provided in the event of failure of when coil thermistor reaches 80°F(t5°)or defrost period reaches outdoor air thermistor and/or outdoor coil thermistor. Refer to a maximum of 10 minutes. Table 6 for default and function. COMPRESSOR VOLTAGE FAILURE(6 FLASHES) ONE MINUTE SPEED CHANGE TIME DELAY The control senses the voltage of the compressor run winding. If When compressor changes speeds from high to low or low to high, compressor voltage (Vc) is less than 90v when control board is there is a 1-minute time delay before compressor restarts. The calling for compressor operation,control de-energizes compressor outdoor fan motor remains running, contactor for 15 minutes with outdoor fan running. After 15 COMPRESSOR OPERATION minutes(provided there is a call for Y1 or Y2),control attempts to start compressor. During this time, a code of 6 flashes appears at When the compressor operates in second stage operation, the control board. If Vc trip occurs 3 consecutive times during a Y1 motor rotates clockwise. Both the lower and upper pistons are request, then low capacity operation is locked out and control eccentric with the rotating crankshaft, and both compress refrig- responds to Y2 requests until a reset occurs.If 3 consecutive trips erant.When the compressor operates in single stage operation the occur in a combination of Y]and Y2 or all Y2 requests,then both motor reverses direction (rotates counter-clockwise). The lower low and high capacity operation will be locked out.The compres- piston becomes idle and the upper piston compresses refrigerant. sor voltage failure(6 flashes) can be caused by: During single capacity operation the"start"and "run"wind- compressor internal overload trip(refer to Table 7 for correct ings are reversed. winding resistance) CRANKCASE HEATER OPERATION no 208/230 volt power supply to outdoor unit The two-speed control board energizes the crankcase heater during failed compressor contactor(s) unit's off cycle. failure of start relay to pick-up properly OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR OPERATION improper wiring The two-speed control energizes outdoor fan any time compressor PRESSURE SWITCH PROTECTION is operating. The outdoor fan remains energized during the The outdoor unit is equipped with high- and low-pressure 1-minute compressor speed change time delay and if a pressure switches. If the control senses the opening of the high or low switch or compressor overload should open. Outdoor fan motor pressure switch, it will respond as follows: 12 • Defrost interval selection • THERMISTOR CURVE • Electric heat operation during defrost mode Field Connections 90 The two-speed control received 24vac low-voltage control system 80 ——-4———+ ———�——— ———�——— inputs through the screw connections on the left side of the control W I I I I I � 70-- --1---T---I----I----I--- board. p 60--- J———L Dual Capacity Compressor Y I I I I I w 50---- ——— r———I———t———I——— The dual capacity compressor contains motor windings that Z 40---- ——L——J——_1—__I—__ provide 3500 RPM operation.Refer to Table 7 for correct winding I I I I I resistance. S2 30----- ---I---t---I--- 1—__I_—— Compressor Internal Relief I I I I The compressor is protected by an internal pressure relief(IPR) 10 —— i———t ———I—— ———I——— which relievesdischarge gas into compressor shell when differen- 0 tial between suction and discharge pressures exceeds 525 psi.The 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 TEMPERATURE(DEG.F) compressor is,also protected by an internal overload attached to motor windings. A91431 Compressor Control Contactors Fig. 15—Resistance Values Versus Temperature Low and high capacity contactor coils are 24 volts.The electronic 1. De-energize the compressor hi or low speed contactor. control board controls the operation of the low speed(C-L)and the 2. Keep the outdoor fan operating for 15 minutes. high speed (GH) contactors. 3. Display the appropriate error code on the status light (see TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS Table 4). Thermistors are electronic devices which sense temperature. As 4. After a 15 minute delay,if Yl or Y2 inputs are on and the LPS the temperature increases, the resistance decreases. Thermistors or HPS is reset, energize appropriate compressor contactor, are used to sense outdoor ambient and coil temperature. Refer to either low or high. Fig. 15 for resistance values versus temperature. 5. If LPS or HPS has not closed after 15 minute delay, outdoor If the outdoor ambient thermistor or coil thermistor should fail,a fan is turned off. If the open switch closes anytime after the fault code appears at electronic control. The crankcase heater is 15-minute delay,then resume operation on call for Y and/or turned on during all off cycles. Y2 IMPORTANT: OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR PLACEMENT Mount outdoor air thermistor underneath unit base pan lip on MAJOR COMPONENTS control box side of unit as shown in Fig. 16. Attach to base pan Two-Speed Control with adhesive tape.A small piece of TXV bulb insulation tape may The two-speed control board controls the following functions: be used. • Low-and high-compressor contactor operation IMPORTANT:If outdoor air thermistoris not properly placed • Outdoor fan motor operation underneath base pan, unit may have nuisance thermistor out of • Crankcase heater operation range faults. • Compressor protection Step 14—Final Checks • Pressure switch monitoring IMPORTANT: Before leaving job,be sure to do the following: • Time delays 1. Ensure that all wiring and tubing is secure in unit before • Time/tem erature defrost adding panels and covers. Securely fasten all panels and Time/temperature covers. 2. Tighten service valve stem caps to 1/12-turn past finger tight. 0 3. Leave User's Manual with owner. Explain system operation and periodic maintenance requirements outlined in manual Control Box Side of Unit 4. Fill out Dealer Installation Checklist and place in customer file. CARE AND MAINTENANCE THERMISTOR PLACED UNDERNEATH BASE PAN For continuing high performance and to minimize possible equip- (ATTACHED TO BASE PAN WITH ADHESIVE) ment failure,periodic maintenance must be performed on this A00430 equipment. Frequency of maintenance may vary depending upon Fig. 16—View from Top of Base Pan geographic areas, such as coastal applications. A00- 13 DUAL CAPACITY CONNECTION DIAGRAM L1-----BLK BLK 208/230 1-60 L2-----YEL POWER SUPPLY BLK RED -() CH C L ------IBJ 23 11 11 EQUIP OND 23 21 21 VELffS NOTE NII RED BLK COMP BLU R C BLK OR OIN BLU BAN —BRN S PL1 1 2 4 1 2 HP/AC C SEV RVS C HI LO PL2 LPS �\LPS BAN ORCE PI-3 EUPNK- CAP DE DEFROST YEUPNK��JJJ AMP Q HP$ HPS BAN 1 BLWPNK{1 DEFROST PL4 BLWPNK\d/JI YEL TIME(MIN) OAT BLK °AT 5 1 BLU 1 �v1^'rJT1 PI-52 BLK 2 BLu 0 ________ OCT 4 BAN 4.OCT RELAY BRN i COMM STATUS BAN Y2 --------- ' YJ ________i i i VH BRN VEL YEL CAM C ------i i i i A B C D ODF LU FAN AP BLK- - i i i i i ® BLK BLK RN R - i i i i i L2 YEL i i i i i CCH RED RED CCH TO INDOOR UNIT _ A03030 —> Fig. 17—Wiring Diagram-024, 036, 048 D-ALCsA4CITY CONNECTION DIAGRAM L1---- BK BIN 208/230-1-60 Lz–_-- —1a RX POVIER SUPPLY Bit ----- 5 1 9 Q7 11 121 11 'L{QJJ C L EQUPQlU 23 21 23 21 BPN NOTEW � BU( CONP BLU BW R C BLK DAN ORI BLU BLU BAN BAN B PL1 1 2 4 1 2 HP/AC C EXV RVS C H LO PL2 � � _Bra FORCED PI-3 �' � Qw DEFROST YaM CAP HPS �� era BLUPNK DEFROST PAM2 BLu PL4 B1wNc YEL TIME(MIN) PMA1 SIX Dov s 1 BLU ra OAT —{(v5 2 B BK Ul PI-5 ocrSTARr RBAY Bra __� 0 __________�COMM STATUS OCT 4 `yV.,c/�ji Y2 ------- i - M - Yl _______--, i � i i VC Bra VH yg� Cl ---� R -, A B C D ata _ 1 ® L2 � ' i i CCH TO INDOOR UNIT A03032 Fig. 18—Wiring Diagram-037 14 DUAL CAPACITY CONNECTION DIAGRAM �7]�' AYEL 2081230 1•60 L2----�` BLK POWER SUPPLYYrm CL BLK � tt RED EQUIP GND 21 NOT k11BLK COMP m R BLK ORN ORN RED BLU C BRN BRN S PL1 1 2 3 1 2 HPAC C SEV RVS C HI LO PI-2 UPS 1 LPS START PL3 2 VELIPNK CAP'. FORCE COMP G VELIPNK DEFROST �\HPS BRN HPS 1 SLUIPNKf1-'('C,-t H DEFROST PL4 BLUIPNK\-h/JI YE m OAT 5 TIME(MIN) OAT 1 BLK BLU 2 BLK 2 BLU BRN ^ PLS QCT START BRN O ------------ COMM STATUS OCT 4 RELAY 5 BRN Y1 -------- i i VC BRN VEL VEL OFM W1 ------- i I I A B C D VH LU FAN CAP BLK 0 ---, i i ® ODF BLK BLK- -BRN L 2 VEL j l j CCH RED CCH TO INDOOR UNIT A03031 -� Fig. 19—Wiring Diagram-060 15 � installation Instructions FV4B Fan Coil,for Puron® Refrigerant 002, 003,005 , 006 oe 0 Installation Instructions Fan Coil. for Puron® Refrigerant FV4B 002, 003, 005, 006 o � 0 A98023 Fig. 1—Model FV4B NOTE: Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation. This symbol —� indicates a change since the last issue. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Improper installation,adjustment,alteration,service,maintenance,or use can cause explosion,fire,electrical shock,or other conditions which may cause personal injury or property damage.Consult a qualified installer,service agency,or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product.Refer to the individual instructions packaged with kits or accessories when installing. Follow all safety codes.Wear safety glasses and work gloves.Use quenching cloth for brazing operations.Have fire extinguisher available.Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and National Electrical Code (NEC) for special requirements. Recognize safety information.This is the safety-alert symbol 0.When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions manuals,be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE. These words are used with the safety-alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death.WARNING signifies hazards which could result in personal Form: IM-FV4B-02 Cancels: IM-FV46-01 Printed in U.S.A. 6-03 Catalog No. 63FV-461 injury or death.CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which would result in minor personal injury or product and property damage.NOTE is used to highlight suggestions which will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation. WARNING: Before installing or servicing unit, always turn off all power to unit.There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Turn off accessory heater power if applicable. Electrical shock can cause personal injury or death. INTRODUCTION Model FV413 Fan Coil units are designed for flexibility and can be used for upflow,horizontal,or downflow(kits required and manufactured and mobile home)applications.These units are designed specifically for Puron(R-410A)and must be used only with Puron air conditioners and heat pumps as shipped. These units are designed to meet the low air leak requirements currently in effect.Because of this,the units need special attention in the condensate pan and drain connection area and when brazing tubing. These units are available for application in systems of 24,000 through 60,000 Btuh nominal cooling capacities.Factory-authorized,field-installed electric heater packages are available in 5 through 30 kw. See Product Data for available accessory kits. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1—CHECK EQUIPMENT Unpack trait and move to final location. Remove carton taking care not to damage unit. Inspect equipment for damage prior to installation. File claim with shipping company if shipment is damaged or incomplete. Locate unit rating plate which contains proper installation information. Check rating plate to be sure unit matches job specifications. PROCEDURE 2—MOUNT FAN COIL Unit can stand or lie on floor, or hang from ceiling or wall. Allow space for wiring, piping, and servicing unit. IMPORTANT: When unit is installed over a finished ceiling and/or living area,building codes may require a field-supplied secondary condensate pan to be installed under the entire unit. Some localities may allow the alterative of running a separate, secondary condensate line. Consult local codes for additional restrictions or precautions. When installing any fan coil over a finished ceiling and/or living area, installation of a secondary drain pan under entire unit to avoid dunnage to ceiling is recommended. FV4B Fan Coils can be installed for upflow and horizontal-lett applications as factory shipped. (See Fig. 2,4 and 8.)Units can be installed for horizontal-right applications with field modifications.Units may be converted for downflow applications using factory-authorized accessory kits. NOTE: To ensure proper drainage for horizontal installations, unit must be installed so it is within 1/8 in. level of the length and width of unit. A. Upflow Installation If return air is to be ducted, install duct flush with floor. Set unit on floor over opening. 0111y use return-aic opening provided. All return air must pass through the coil. (See Fig. 2.) B. Modular Units The FV4B Fan Coil in size 006 is a 2-piece modular unit. Modular construction allows installer to disassemble unit into 2 components,coil box and blower box, for ease of installation. (See Fig. 3.) To disassemble unit,remove rear corner brackets by removing 2 screws which secure brackets.(See Fig.3.)Remove either 2 screws in each front corner of coil box,or 2 screws in blower box.Do not remove all 4 screws in each corner.(See Fig. 3.)Sections may now be separated by lifting top section from lower section. To reassemble,reverse above procedure. Be certain to reinstall all fasteners when reassembling. C. Horizontal Installations Be sure installation complies with all applicable building codes that may require installation of a secondary condensate pan. 1. Arrange support for unit by setting it in or above secondary condensate pan. 2. When suspending unit from ceiling dimples in casing indicate proper location of screws for mounting metal support straps. (See Fig. 4.) D. Horizontal-Right Conversion of Units with Slope Coils NOTE: Casket kit number KFAHDO101 SLP is required for horizontal slope coil conversion to maintain low air leak/low sweat performance. 1. Remove blower and coil access panels and fitting panel. (See Fig. 5.) 2. Remove screw securing coil assembly to right side casing flange. 3. Remove coil assembly. 4. Lay fan coil on its right side and reinstall coil assembly with condensate pan down. (See Fig. 5.) 5. Attach coil to casing flange using previously removed coil mounting screw. 6. Make sure the pan cap in the fitting door is properly seated on the fitting door to retain the low air leak rating of the unit. 7. Add gaskets from kit KFAHD per kit instructions. 8. Reinstall access panels and fitting panel, aligning holes with tubing connections and condensate pan connections. Make sure liquid and suction tube grommets are in place to prevent air leaks and cabinet sweating. Install grommets after brazing. —2— FIELD SUPPLIED SUPPLY DUCT LOW VOLT p0WEOv"TIONS I ENTRY OPTIONS e A 002-00521-IN. SERVICE UNIT 006 24-IN FROCLEARANCE. p03 19 In. A COIL UNITS o® U FIN �ON'DAOR DLROAIN o o II 19" UPFLOWiDOWNFLOW e e i I FIELDMODIFIED PRIMARY DRAIN SIDE RETURN 11 A LOCATION FOR 1 1 2 le SLOPE COIL UNITS ONLY o �e � I ;'- UPFLOWIDOWNFLOW I � SECONDARY DRAIN 1/ e 1 e UPFLOWIDOWNFLOW FIELD SUPPLIED PRIMARY DRAIN REW N POUM POWER ENTRY FIELD SUPPLIED OPTIONS �SUPPLY DUCT LOW VOLT ENTRY OPTIONS 002-005 21-IN. 006 24-IN.FRONT SERVICE ° CLEARANCE UNIT A A COIL 003 19 1 UNITS °® o ° UPFLOW/DOWNFLOW SECONDARY DRAIN �� 1 1,.2- t e ^ UPFLOW/DOWNFLOW ° I% 1i 91, PRIMARY DRAIN e FIELD MODIFIED I I A SIDE RETURN I I LOCATION FOR I I 2 1/L" SLOPE COIL ° e UNITS ONLY UPFLOW/DOWNFLOW SECONDARY DRAIN I I I f° UPFLOW/DOWNFLOW ° FIELD SUPPLIED PRIMARY DRAIN RETURN PLENUM A00091 Fig. 2—Slope Coil Unit in Upflow Application BLOWER BOX —, F I 2 SCREWS I I 2 SCREWS — REAR CORNER BRACKET C 2SCREWS COIL BOX A95293 Fig. 3—Modular Unit Assembly E. Horizontal Right Conversion of Units With A-Coil To convert units for horizontal right installations: 1. Remove blower and coil access panels. (See Fig. 6.) 2. Remove metal clip Securing fitting panel to condensate pan. Remove fitting panel. 3. Remove 2 snap-in clips securing A-coil in unit. 4. Slide coil and pan assembly out of unit. 5. Remove horizontal drain pan support bracket from coil support rail on left side of unit and reinstall on coil support rail on right side of unit. —3— a A-COIL HORIZONTAL LEFT FIELD SEC04 ARYY PRIMARY SUPPLIED DRAIN HANGING STRAPS 002-005 21-IN. 006 24-IN. FRONT SERVICE CLEARANCE UNIT (FULL FACE OF UNIT) LOW VOLT ENTRY OPTIONS 0 0 1 3/4 IN. FILTER ACCESS CLEARANCE ° PRIMARY I DRAIN SECONDARY POWER DRAIN ENTRY OPTIONS A00096 Fig.4—Slope Coil in Horizontal-Left Application (Factory Ready) COIL MOUNTING BLOWER SCREW ASSEMBLY COIL O SUPPORT OO RAIL O O O OO O � SLOPE COIL (� SKI n DRAINPAN REFRIGERANT PRIMARY DRAIN CONNECTIONS SECONDARY DRAIN A03001 Fig. 5—Slope Coil in Horizontal Right Application 6. Convert air-seal assembly for horizontal right. a. Remove air-seal assembly from coil by removing 4 screws. (See Fig. 6.) b. Remove air splitter(B) from coil seal assembly by removing 3 screws. (See Fig. 6-factory-shipped inset.) c. Remove filler plate (A) and install air splitter(B) in place of filler plate. d. Install filler plate(A) as shown in horizontal right application. e. Remove condensate troughs (C) and install on opposite tube sheets. f. Install hose onto plastic spout. 7. Install horizontal pan on right side of coil assembly. —4— .r A REFRIGERANT AIR SEAL CONNECTIONS ASSEMBLY OO y HORIZONTAL RIGHT A APPLICATION COIL— SUPPORT RAIL OIL SUPPRAIL OO �I OD O• g COIL C BRACKET • o DRAIN PAN SUPPORT �' BRACKET COIL cid SUPPORT RAIL COIL�� BRACKET HORIZONTAL DRAIN PAN PRIMARY DRAIN HORIZONTAL RIGHT SECONDARY DRAIN HORIZONTAL RIGHT A00071 Fig. 6—A-Coil in Horizontal-Right Application 8. Slide coil assembly into casing. Be sure coil bracket on each corner of vertical pan engages coil support rails. 9. Reinstall 2 snap-in clips to correctly position and secure coil assembly in unit. Be sure clip with large offset is used on right side of unit to secure horizontal pan. 10. Remove two oval fitting caps from left side of the coil, access panel, and fitting panel. 11. Remove insulation knockouts on right side of coil access panel 12. Remove 2 oval coil access panel plugs and reinstall into holes on left side of coil access panel and fitting panel. 13. Install condensate pan fitting caps(from Step 10)in the right side of the coil door making sure that the cap snaps and seats cleanly on the back side of the coil door. Make sure no insulation interferes with seating of the cap. 14. Reinstall access and fitting panels,aligning holes with tubing connections and condensate pan connections. Be sure to reinstall metal clip between fitting panel and vertical condensate pan. Make sure liquid and suction tube grommets are in place to prevent air leaks and cabinet sweating. F. Downflow Installations Q CAUTION: The conversion of the fan coil to downflow requires special procedures for the condensate drains on both A coil and Slope units.The vertical drains have an overflow hole between the primary and secondary drain holes.This hole is plugged for all applications except downflow,but must be used for downflow. During the conversion process,remove the plastic cap covering the vertical drains only and discard.Remove the plug from the overflow hole and discard.At completion of the downflow installation, caulk around the vertical pan fitting to door joint to retain the low air leak performance of the unit. Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in personal injury or product and property damage. In this application, field conversion of the evaporator is required using accessory downflow kit along with an accessory base kit.Use fireproof resilient gasket, 1/8- to 1/4-in. thick, between duct, unit, and floor. NOTE: To convert units for downflow applications,refer to Installation Instructions supplied with kit for proper installation.For slope fan coils, use kit Part No. KFADCO201 SLP.For A fail coils use kit Part No.KFADC040I ACL.Use fireproof resilient gasket, 1/8-to 1/4-in.thick,between duct, unit, and floor. NOTE: Gasket kit number KFAHDO101 SLP is also required for all downflow applications to maintain low air leak/low sweat performance. G. Manufactured and Mobile Home Housing Applications 1. Fan coil unit must be secured to the structure using field-supplied hardware. 2. Allow a minimum of 24"clearance from access panels. 3. Recommended method of securing for typical applications a. If fan coil is away from wall,attach pipe strap to top of fan coil using No. 10 self tapping screws.Angle strap down and away from back of fan coil, remove all slack, and fasten to wall stud of structure using 5/16-in. lag screws. Typical both sides of fan coil. b. If fan coil is against wall,secure fan coil to wall stud using 1/8-in. thick right-angle brackets.Attach brackets to fan coil using No. 10 self tapping screws and to wall stud using 5/16-in. lag screws. (See Fig. 7.) —5— 4"MAX SECURE FAN COIL TO STRUCTURE I UNIT AWAY FROM WALL PIPE STRAP 00 0 (TYPICAL BOTH SIDES) OR ®® UNIT AGAINST WALL 1/8-IN.THICK ANGLE Q o MOUNTING BRACKET (TYPICAL BOTH SIDES) DOWN FLOW -*--BASE KIT(KFACB) 0 SECURE UNIT TO FLOOR ANGLE BRACKET OR PIPE STRAP rl A02003 PROCEDURE 3—AIR DUCTS 4"MAX Fig. 7—A-Coil Connect supply-air duct over outside of 3/4-in.flange provided on supply-air opening.Secure duct to flange with proper fasteners for type of duct used, and seal duct-to-unit joint. Duct connection flanges are provided on unit air discharge connection. When using FV413 units with 20-,24-,and 30-kw electric heaters,maintain a 1-in.clearance from combustible materials to discharge plenum and ductwork for a distance of 36 in. from unit. Use accessory downflow base to maintain proper clearance on downflow installations. Use flexible connectors between ductwork and unit to prevent transmission of vibration.When electric heater is installed,use heat resistant material for flexible connector between ductwork and unit at discharge connection. Ductwork passing through unconditioned space must be insulated and covered with vapor barrier. Ductwork Acoustical Treatment Metal duct systems that do not have a 90° elbow and 10 ft of main duct to first branch takeoff may require internal acoustical insulation lining. As an alternative, fibrous ductwork may be used if constructed and installed in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA construction standard on fibrous glass ducts.Both acoustical lining and fibrous ductwork shall comply with National Fire Protection Association Standards 90A or B as tested by UL Standard 181 for Class 1 air ducts. PROCEDURE 4—ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Oil units with a factory installed disconnect with pull-out removed,service and maintenance can be safely performed on only the load side of the control package. 8 WARNING: Field wires on the line side of the disconnect found in the fan coil unit remain live,even when the pull-out is removed. Service and maintenance to incoming wiring can not be performed until the main disconnect switch (remote to the unit) is turned off. Failure to do so will result in electrical shock causing personal injury or death. A. Line-Voltage Connections If unit contains an electric heater,remove and discard power plug from fan coil and connect male plug from heater to female plug from unit wiring harness. (See Electric Heater Installation Instructions.) For units without electric heat: 1. Connect 208/230v power leads from field disconnect to yellow and black stripped leads. 2. Connect ground wire to unit ground lug. Check all factory wiring per unit wiring diagram and inspect factory wiring connections to be sure none were loosened in transit or installation. 6 WARNING: Before installing or servicing system, always turn off all power to system. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Turn off accessory heater power if applicable. Electrical shock can cause personal injury or death. & WARNING: If a disconnect switch is to be mounted on the unit,select a location where drill or fastener will not contact electrical or refrigerant components. Electrical shock can cause personal injury or death. NOTE: Before proceeding with electrical connections,make certain that supply voltage,frequency,and phase are as specified on unit rating plate. Be sure that electrical service provided by the utility is sufficient to handle the additional load imposed by this equipment. See unit wiring label for proper field high-and low-voltage wiring.Make all electrical connections in accordance with NEC and any local codes or ordinances that may apply.Use copper wire only.The unit must have a separate branch electric circuit with a field-supplied disconnect switch located within sight from, and readily accessible from the unit. —6— w O FACTORY SHIPPED BRAC OIT HORIZONTAL LEFT APPLICATION c] COIL OOOO SUPPORT RAIL B • C O DRAIN PAN SUPPORT BRACKET COIL BRACKET 0 HORIZONTAL DRAIN PAN PRIMARY DRAIN AIR SEAL HORIZONTAL LEFT ASSEMBLY SECONDARY DRAIN HORIZONTAL LEFT REFRIGERANT CONNECTIONS A00072 Fig. 8—A-Coil in Horizontal Left Application (Factory Ready) B. 24–V Control System Connections to Unit Printed-Circuit Board (PCB) Refer to unit wiring instructions for recommended wiring procedures.Use No. 18 AWG color-coded, insulated (35°C minimum)wires to make low-voltage connections between thermostat and unit. If thermostat is located more than 100 ft from unit (as measured along the low-voltage wires),use No. 16 AWG color-coded,insulated(35°C minimum)wires.PCB is circuited for single-stage heater operation.When additional heater staging is desired using outdoor thermostats or Intelligent Heat Staging,remove Jumper J2 on PCB to enable staging. Connect low-voltage leads to thermostat and outdoor unit. (See Fig. 9, 10, 11, or 12.) C. Intelligent Heat Staging Option Intelligent Heat staging of the electric heat package is possible when the FV4B is installed as a part of a single-speed heat pump system using a corporate 2-speed programmable thermostat (model TSTATXXI12S01-B), ThermidistatT" Control, or capable zoning control and any I of the following electric heat packages: Relay heaters KFCEH 1401 N09,KFCEH 1501 F 15,KFCEH 1701 C 15,KFCEH 1801 F20,KFCEH 1901 C20,KFCEH2101F24,OR KFCEH2201 F30. Complete system low-voltage wiring as shown in Fig. 9, 10, 11, or 12. NOTE: Where local codes require thermostat wiring be routed through conduit or raceways, splices can be made inside the fan coil unit. All wiring must be NEC Class 1 and must be separated from incoming power leads. A factory-authorized disconnect kit is available for installation of 0-through 10-kw applications.When electric heat packages with circuit breakers are installed,the circuit breaker can be used as a disconnect.Transformer is factory wired for 230-v operation.For 208-v applications,disconnect black wire fi-om 230-v terminal on transformer and connect it to 208-v terminal. (See Fig. 13.) The secondary circuit of transformer is protected by a 5-amp fuse mounted on printed-circuit board. IMPORTANT: Do not use outdoor thermostat with Intelligent Heat Staging. —4 D. Manufactured Housing In manufactured housing applications, the Code of Federal Regulations,Title 24, Chapter XX,Part 3280.714 requires that supplemental electric heat be locked out at outdoor temperatures above 40 deg.F.except for a heat pump defrost cycle. A corporate thermostat in conjunction with an outdoor sensor can be used to lock out supplemental heat above 40 deg.F.Refer to thermostat instructions for details.If a non-corporate thermostat is used, an outdoor thermostat may be required. E. Ground Connections Q WARNING: The cabinet must have an uninterrupted or unbroken ground according to NEC,ANSI/NFPA 70 and local codes to minimize personal injury if an electrical fault should occur. The ground may consist of electrical wire or metal conduit when installed in accordance with existing electrical codes. (See Ground/Conduit Note below.)Failure to follow this warning could result in an electrical shock, fire, or death. NOTE: Use UL listed conduit and conduit connector to connect supply wire(s)to unit and obtain proper grounding.If conduit connection uses reducing washers, a separate ground wire must be used. Grounding may also be accomplished by using grounding lug provided in control box. Use of dual or multiple supply circuits will require grounding of each circuit to ground lugs provided on unit and heaters. A010- PROCEDURE 5—REFRIGERANT TUBING CONNECTION AND EVACUATION Use accessory tubing package or field-supplied tubing of refrigerant grade. Insulate entire suction tube if field-supplied tubing is used. Tubing package has an insulated suction tube. Do not use damaged, dirty, or contaminated tubing because it may plug refrigerant flow control device. When tubing package is used and sweat connections are made within 60 see,coil and tubing system does not require evacuation.Always evacuate coil and field-supplied tubing to 500 microns before opening outdoor unit service valves. —7— 0 INDOOR CONTROL FAN COIL 1-SPEED .wllw AIR CONDITIONER "! HEAT STAGE 2 O/W2 --- W2 N/A FY1/W2 Y1 REMOVE J2 JUMPER FOR HEAT STAGING HEAT STAGE 1 F/7-11. --- VV1 COOL STAGE 1 FY/Y21.--- Y/Y2 -- - ZJ FAN --- G 24 VAC HOT ---4 RREMOVE JI JUMPER OF FOR DEHUMIDIFY MODES DEHUMIDIFY DHUM --- DH 24 VAC COMM --- C HUMIDIFY HUM - HUMIDIFIER 24 VAC N/A OUTDOOR OUTDOOR S1 - SENSOR SENSOR CONNECTION S2 ------------� A98477 Fig. 9—FV4B Fan Coil Wiring with 1-Speed Air Conditioner INDOOR CONTROL FAN COIL 2-SPEED AIR CONDITIONER HEAT STAGE 2 FO/W2 --- W2 REMOVE J2 JUMPER HEAT STAGE 1 W/W1 --- W1 FOR HEAT STAGING COOL STAGE 1 COOL STAGE 2 Y/Y2 ——— y/Y2 —— Y2 FAN 17-7-1 1 � 1 --- G 24 VAC HOT REMOVE ED J1 JUMPER FOR DEHUMIDIFY DEHUMIDIFY FHUMT --- DH MODES 24 VAC COMM HUMIDIFY HUM — HUMIDIFIER (24 VAC) N/A �B OUTDOOR OUTDOOR S1 — SENSOR i SENSOR CONNECTION S2 ------------� A98478 Fig. 10—FV4B Fan Coil Wiring with 2-Speed Air Conditioner ® CAUTION: A brazing shield MUST be used when tubing sets are being brazed to the unit connections to prevent damage to the unit surface and condensate pan fitting caps. Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. Units have sweat suction and liquid tube connections. Make suction tube connection first. 1. Cut tubing to correct length. 2. Insert tube into sweat connection on unit until it bottoms. 3. Braze connection using silver bearing or non-silver bearing brazing materials. Do not use solder (materials which melt below 8007). Consult local code requirements. —8— w INDOOR CONTROL FAN COIL 1-SPEED HEAT PUMP RVS COOLING O/W2 --- p -- - REMOVE J2 JUMPER HEAT STAGE 3 1/W2 --- W2 FOR HEAT STAGING HEAT STAGE 2 --- Wt -- ► ,W2 W/W1 HEAT/COOL y/_y -_- JY/Y2 STAGE 1 FAN --- G 24 VAC HOT � --- R -- - L_J REMOVE ElY1 J1 JUMPER FOR DEHUMIDIFY MODES DEHUMIDIFY HUM --- DH 24 VAC COMM CC --- C -- u HUMIDIFY HUM ___PHUMIDIFIER (24 VAC) RVS HEATING O OUTDOOR OUTDOOR 81 - SENSOR i SENSOR CONNECTION S2 ------------� A98475 Fig. 11—FV4B Fan Coil Wiring with 1-Speed Heat Pump INDOOR CONTROL FAN COIL 2-SPEED HEAT PUMP RVS COOLING O/W2 --- - HEAT/COOL y1/W2 --- STAGE 1 HEAT STAGE 3 YY/71 --- W1 - W1 REMOVE J2 HEAT/COOL y/Y2 JUMPER FOR W2 STAGE 2 i HEAT STAGING FAN G _ -i Y/Y2---- 24 --24 VAC HOT I ❑G R -- �❑R REMOVE JI FOR DEHUMIDIFY DEHUMIDIFY HUM --- DAH MODES 24 VAC COMM HUMIDIFY HUM - HUMIDIFIER ,l (24 VAC) RVS HEATING S1 OUTDOOR OUTDOOR - SENSOR i SENSOR CONNECTION S2 ------------J A02005 Fig. 12—FV4B Fan Coil Wiring with 2-Speed Puron Heat Pump ® CAUTION: Wrap a wet cloth around rear of fitting to prevent damage to TXV and factory-made joints.Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. 4. Evacuate coil and tubing system to 500 microns using deep vacuum method. PROCEDURE 6—CONDENSATE DRAIN To connect drains the cap openings must be removed. Use a knife to start the opening near the tab and using pliers,pull the tab to remove the disk.Clean the edge of the opening if necessary and install the condensate line.Finally caulk around the lines where they exit the fitting to retain the low leak rating of the unit. —9— SECONDARY BRN RED 0 0 YEL H BLK o PRIMARY Fig. 13 -Transformer Connections A94067 CAUTION: The conversion of the fan coil to downflow requires special procedures for the condensate drains on both A coil and Slope units.The vertical drains have an overflow hole between the primary and secondary drain holes.This hole is plugged for all applications except downflow,but must be used for downflow.During the conversion process,remove the plastic cap covering the vertical drains only and discard.Remove the plug from the overflow hole and discard.At completion of the downflow installation, caulk around the vertical pan fitting to door joint to retain the low air leak performance of the unit. Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. Units are equipped with primary and secondary 3/4-in. FPT drain connections. For proper condensate line installation see Fig. 2,4, 5,6,and 8. To prevent property damage and achieve optimum drainage performance,BOTH primary and secondary drain lines should be installed and include properly-sized condensate traps. (See Fig. 14 and 16.)Factory-approved condensate traps are available.Be sure to install plastic push-in plugs in unused condensate drain fittings.It is recommended that PVC fittings be used on the plastic condensate pan. Do not over-tighten.Finger-tighten plus 1-1/2 turns. Use pipe dope. Q CAUTION: Shallow running traps are inadequate and DO NOT allow proper condensate drainage.(See Fig.15.)Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE: When connecting condensate drain lines avoid blocking filter access panel. Prime both primary and secondary condensate traps after connecting to drain pan. NOTE: If unit is located in or above a living space where damage may result from condensate overflow,a field-supplied external condensate pan should be installed underneath the entire unit, and a secondary condensate line (with appropriate trap) should be run from the unit into the pan. Any condensate in this external condensate pan should be drained to a noticeable place.As an alternative to using an external condensate pan,some localities may allow the use of a separate 3/4-in. condensate line(with appropriate trap)to a place where the condensate will be noticeable.The owner of the structure must be informed that when condensate flows from the secondary drain or external condensate pan, the unit requires servicing, or water damage will occur. Install traps in the condensate lines as close to the coil as possible. (See Fig. 16.)Make sure that the outlet of each trap is below its connection to the condensate pan to prevent condensate from overflowing the drain pan. Prime all traps, test for leaks,and insulate traps if located above a living area. Condensate drain lines should be pitched downward at a minimum of 1 in.for every 10 ft.of length.Consult local codes for additional restrictions or precautions. 0 CAUTION: Never operate unit without a filter or with filter access door removed. Damage to blower motor or coil can result. Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. IMPORTANT: Factory authorized filters must be used when locating the filter inside the unit.(See Table 1.)For those applications where access to an internal filter is impractical, a field-supplied filter must be installed in the return duct system. PROCEDURE 7—UNIT START-UP Refer to outdoor unit installation Instructions for system start-up instructions and refrigerant charging method details. PROCEDURE 8—EASY SELECT CONFIGURATION TAPS Easy SelectTM taps are used by the installer to configure a system. The ECM motor uses the selected taps to modify its operation to a pre-programmed table of airflows. (See Table 3 and 4.)Airflows are based on system size or mode of operation and those airflows are modified in response to other inputs such as the need for de-humidification. (See Fig. 17 and 18.) The FV4B Fan Coil must be configured to operate properly with system components with which it is installed.To successfully configure a basic system(see information printed on circuit board label located next to select pins),move the 6 select wires to the pins which match the components used. A. AUX HEAT KW/CFM - Select heater range for size of electric heater installed Installer must select the auxiliary heat airflow approved for application with kw size heater installed. If no heater is installed, this step can be skipped.Each select pin is marked with a range of heaters for which airflow,also marked,is approved.For increased comfort select the narrowest kw range matching the heater size,for example, 0-10 for 10-kw heater.This airflow must be greater than the minimum CFM for electric heater —10— UNIT f 2"MIN UN A03002 Fig. 14—Recommended Condensate Trap DO NOT USE SHALLOW RUNNING TRAPS! A03013 Fig. 15—Insufficient Condensate Trap O O o ® �D FILTER ACCESS PANEL SECONDARY DRAIN WITH APPROPRIATE TRAP REQUIRED (USE FACTORY KIT OR FIELD-SUPPLIED TRAP) PRIMARY TRAP REQUIRE (USE FACTORY KIT OR FIELD-SUPPLIED TRAP OF SUFFICIENT DEPTH. STANDARD P-TRAPS ARE NOT SUFFICIENT.SEE FIGURE OF RECOMMENDED CONDENSATE TRAP) A03003 Fig. 16—Condensate Trap and Unit application with the size system installed for safe and continuous operation. (See Table 5 and 6 for airflow delivery and minimum CFM.)Note that airflow marked is the airflow which will be supplied in emergency heat mode and heating mode on air conditioners when electric heat is the primary heating source. In heat pump heating mode when electric heaters are energized,the ECM motor will run the higher of heat pump heating airflow and electric heater airflow to ensure safe heater operation.The factory selection is the largest heater range approved. (See Fig. 17,A as indicated.) B. AC/HP SIZE -Select system size installed The factory setting for air conditioner or heat pump size is the largest unit meant for application with the model of fan coil purchased.Installer needs to select air conditioner or heat pump size to ensure that airflow delivered falls within proper range for the size unit installed.This applies to all operational modes with the exception of electric heat modes. (See Fig. 17, B as indicated.) —11— Table 1—Filter Kits PART NUMBER SIZE USED WITH FILTER KIT KFAFK0212MED 002, (12 PACK) KFAFK0312LRG 003,005 KFAFK0412XXL 006 LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BLOCK PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD SECT SEC2 O O J1 EASY SELECT`M AUX HEAT KW/CFM R NW CFM tri oo ]5 ]5 J5 J2 A VIO 11Il DD_ D; W, AC/HP SIZE W2 B — g — g — g-- g Y, BLU SYSTEM TYPE ACHGC1111 1 HG-EFF C .11NN 6 A 8 1/1 Y/Y2 NOM "LK CFMQ ADJUST di ® G °�/ 8 8 Iq� ON/OFF DELAY I{f7�{rI /O� E� 91��' WHT b U U ONTINUOUS FAN AUX7 HUM1 F LO MED HI EL B B YEL a S CEBD430226-01B CESS430226-018 AUX2 HUM2 0 0 000000000000 24VAC o ® HEATER/MOTOR GRY MOLEX 12-PIN CONNECTOR A95275 Fig. 17—Detail of FV4B Printed-Circuit Board C. SYSTEM TYPE - Select system type installed AC or HP The type of system must be selected: 1. AC- Air conditioner 2. HP-COMFORT - Heat Pump Comfort provides approximately 315 CFM per ton for higher normal heating air delivery temperature. Provides approximately 350 CFM per ton cooling airflow for good humidity removal. 3. HP-EFF-Heat Pump Efficiency provides same airflow for heating and cooling modes to increase overall HP efficiency;approximately 350 CFM per ton. The factory setting is AC. (See Fig. 17, C as indicated.) D. AC/HP CFM ADJUST - Select Medium, Low, or High Airflow To provide airflow at rates described above,the AC/HP ADJUST select is factory set to the nominal(nom)tap.The adjust selections HI/LO will regulate airflow supplied for all operational modes,except non-heat pump heating modes. HI provides 15 percent airflow over nominal unit size selected and LO provides 10 percent airflow below nominal unit size selected. Adjust selection options are provided to adjust airflow supplied to meet individual installation needs for such things as noise, comfort, and humidity removal. (See Fig. 17,D as indicated.) E. ON/OFF DELAY -Select desired time delay profile NOTE: Delay selections are active in cooling and heat pump heating modes only.Auxiliary heating modes have a 1 minute off delay and zero on delay programmed into the ECM motor that cannot be overridden. Four motor operation delay profiles are provided to customize and enhance system operation. (See Fig. 17, E as indicated) Selection options are: .rry 1. The standard 90 sec off delay (Factory setting)at 100 percent airflow. 2. No delay option used for servicing unit or when a thermostat is utilized to perform delay functions. 3. A 30 sec on delay with no airflow/90 sec off delay at 100 percent airflow profile is used when it is desirable to allow system coils time to heat-up/cool-down in conjunction with the airflow. 4. ENH,enhanced selection,provides a 30 sec on delay with no airflow/plus 150 sec at 70 percent airflow/no off delay for added comfort. This profile will minimize cold blow in heat pump operation and could enhance system efficiency. —12— aEno off EASY SELECT" R 0 o a W, ACIHP SIZE D o8 oD Y, rettvE sMo WY G D D ® O R—F —Y Ear y C 01-01S.AR 0 U YE a HEATER11HT / 12-PIN MATE-N-LOCK ELECTRIC HEAT CONNECTOR A95275 Fig. 18—PCB Wiring Arrangement F. CONTINUOUS FAN - Select desired fan speed when thermostat is set on continuous fan NOTE: If installed with a 2-speed outdoor unit,do not select HI speed continuous fan.If HI is selected,low speed compression will also run HI speed possibly resulting in insufficient dehumidification. 1. LO speed - factory setting, 50 percent cooling mode airflow. 2. MED speed- move connector to MED, 65 percent cooling mode airflow. 3. HI speed -move connector of HI, 100 percent cooling mode airflow. (See Fig. 17,F as indicated.) G. Low-Voltage Circuit Fusing and Reference The low-voltage circuit is fused by a board-mounted 5-amp automotive fuse placed in series with the transformer SEC2 and the R circuit.The C circuit of the transformer is referenced to chassis ground through a printed circuit run at SEC connected to metal standoff marked with ground symbol. H. Basic Fan Coil Configuration The following basic configuration of the fan coil will provide ARI rated performance of the heat pump: 1. AUX HEAT KW/CFM- Select the heater range for the size electric heater installed. 2. AC/HP SIZE- Select system size installed. 3. SYSTEM TYPE- Select system type HP-EFF. 4. AC/HP CFM ADJUST- Select NOM. 5. ON/OFF DELAY- Select 0/90 profile. 6. CONTINUOUS FAN - Select desired fan speed when thermostat is set to continuous fan. I. COMFORT OPTIONS -WARMER HEATING AND SUPER DEHUMIDIFY(See Fig. 21 for Quick Reference Guide) TheFV4B Fan Coil provides better than average humidity control and heated air temperature. This configuration will improve the comfort provided by the heat pump system if more humidity removal or if warmer heating air is desired.While providing this improved comfort,the heat Pump system will operate efficiently, but not at the published HSPF or ARI SEER efficiency. The following fan coil configuration is recommended for maxinuun heating and cooling/dehumidifying comfort: (See Fig. 17.) 1. AUX HEAT KW/CFM - Select narrowest heater range to match size of electric heater installed (skip this step if no heater is installed). 2. AC/HP SIZE - Select system size installed. —13— 3. SYSTEM TYPE - Select system type HP-COMFORT (for heat pump system)or AC (for air conditioner system). 4. AC/HP CFM ADJUST - Select LO. 5. ON/OFF DELAY - Select ENH profile. 6. CONTINUOUS FAN - Select desired fan speed when thermostat is set to continuous fan. 7. If the fan coil is installed with Intelligent Heat Staging capable electric heaters, remove jumper J2. (See Fig. 17.) NOTE: If configuring to run wanner heating, do not remove jumper J2 when using 5-, 8-, or I0-kw heaters. 8. Remove jumper J1 to activate dehumidify modes. 9. Wire low voltage connections as shown in Fig. 9, 10, 11, or 12. 10. Configure Thermidistat (or capable zoning system) following its installation instructions for enhanced dehumidification and SuperComfort/Perfect Heat operation. This configuration provides the following comfort enhancements: a. A 30 second blower on delay with 150 seconds at 70 percent airflow to allow the indoor coil to warm up or cool down before the blower is asked to deliver 100 percent airflow reducing the cold blow sensation at start up in heating and allowing the indoor coil to more quickly reach wet coil operating conditions in cooling. b. No blower off delay eliminates cold blow which may be associated with running the blower after shut down of the compressor and avoids re-evaporation of condensed moisture after cooling/dehumidifying operation. c. Lower airflow while the compressor is running to reduce draft effects and increase heating air temperature and improved humidity control during cooling operation. d. Intelligent Staging of the electric heater elements to more closely match heating load requirements and provide more consistent heating air temperatures. PROCEDURE 9—ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Accessory Electric Heaters Electric heaters may be installed with the FV4B Fan Coil per instructions supplied with electric heater package. See unit rating plate for factory-approved electric heater kits. NOTE: Units installed without electric heat should have a field-supplied sheet metal block-off plate covering the heater opening. This reduces air leakage and formation of exterior condensation. B. Auxiliary Terminals The AUX and HUM terminals on the Easy Select Board are tied directly to the G terminal,and provide a 24-vac signal whenever the G terminal is energized.(See Fig. 17 and 18.)During Super Dehumidify and SuperComfort/Perfect Heat modes,the G signal is not present and the auxiliary terminals are not energized. If the installation includes the use of these operating modes, do not use these terminals to control accessories. See Electronic Air Cleaner and Humidifier sections for further information. C. Electronic Air Cleaner Connections The AUX 1 and AUX2 terminals are not always energized during blower operation,as described above.When using an electronic air cleaner with the FV4B Fan Coil, use Airflow Sensor Part No. KEAACO101 AAA.The airflow sensor turns on electronic air cleaner when the fan coil blower is operating. D. Humidifier/Humidistat Connections Easy Select Board terminals HUM] and HUM2 are provided for direct connection to the low-voltage control of a humidifier through a standard humidistat. (See Fig. 19.)These terminals are energized with 24vac when G thermostat signal is present. (See Fig. 20.) Alternately, the 24-vac signal may be sourced from the W and C terminal block connections when electric heaters are used as primary heating source. When using a Thermidistat""'Control,Zone Perfect Plus or Comfort Zone 11,the 24-vac signal may be sourced directly from the Thermidistat HUM terminal. (See Fig. 9, 10, 11, and 12.) HUMIDISTAT HUM 1 —� i (C) 24-VAC TO HUMIDIFIER HUM 2 (G) HUMIDIFIER WIRING A95317 Fig. 19—Humidifier Wiring E. Dehumidify Capability with Standard Humidistat Connection Latent capacities for systems using the FV4B Fan Coil are better than average systems.If increased latent capacity is an application requirement, the field wiring terminal block provides connection terminals for use of a standard humidistat. The FV413 Fan Coil will detect the humidistat contacts opening on increasing humidity and reduce its airflow to approximately 80 percent of nominal cooling mode airflow.This reduction will increase the system latent capacity until the humidity falls to a level which causes the humidistat to close its contacts.When the contacts close, the airflow will return to 100 percent of the selected cooling airflow.To activate this mode,remove Jumper JI and wire in a standard humidistat. (See Fig. 20.) —14— EASY SELECT BOARD TERMINAL BLOCK J1 DH — --- HUMIDISTAT REMOVE �R -- ---� JUMPER A95316 Fig. 20—Humidistat Wiring for De-Humidify Mode F. Dehumidify and Super Dehumidify Capabilities This model fan coil is capable of responding to a signal from indoor system control (Thermidistat,zoning control)to operate in comfort control modes such as Super Dehumidify Mode.Consult literature provided with indoor system control to determine if these operating modes are available, and to see control set up instructions. No special setup or wiring of fan coil is required. PROCEDURE 10—FV4B FAN COIL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION The FV4B will supply airflow in a range which is more than twice the range of a standard fan coil. It is designed to provide nominal cooling capacities at a 507 evaporator temperature and the required airflow which enables it to match with 4 air conditioner or heat pump system sizes. Table 2 outlines the CFM range for the different FV4B Fan Coil sizes. A. Continuous Fan • Thermostat closes circuit R to G. • The blower runs at continuous fan airflow. B. Cooling Mode -Single speed • If indoor temperature is above temperature set point and humidity is below humidity set point, thermostat closes circuits R to G, R to Y/Y2 and R to 0. • The fan coil delivers single speed cooling airflow. C. Cooling Mode - Dehumidification • If indoor temperature is above temperature set point and humidity is above humidity set point,thermostat or ThermidistatTM closes circuits R to G, R to O, and R to Y/Y2, and humidistat or Thermidistat opens R to DH. • The fan coil delivers airflow which is approximately 80 percent of the nominal cooling airflow to increase the latent capacity of the system. D. Cooling Mode -Super Dehumidify Operation (See Fig. 22 for Quick Reference Guide) NOTE: The indoor control used, such as Thermidistat, must be capable of providing Super Dehumidify operation mode and control must be configured as outlined in its installation instructions. Consult indoor control literature to determine if control is capable of providing Super Dehumidify inputs and for configuration instructions. If the indoor temperature is below the temperature set point and the humidity is above the humidity set point, the Thermidistat closes circuit R to O,opens circuits R to DH and R to G,and cycles circuit R to Y/Y2(for single speed system R to Y 1,or R to Yl and Y/Y2 for 2-speed system). The ECM motor reads the G signal to the fan coil while the heat pump is operating, (circuit R to Y/Y2 for single speed system,R to Y1 or R to Yl and Y/Y2 for 2-speed system),closed(24 vac).If circuit R to G is closed(24 vac),the motor will deliver airflow at the full cooling or cooling Plus dehumidify mode requested value.If circuit R to G is open(0 vac)for super dehumidify rnode,the motor delivers reduced airflow to maximize the humidity removal of the system while minimizing overcooling. E. Electric Heat Heating Mode • Thermostat closes circuit R to W/W 1, or W2. • The fan coil delivers the selected electric heat airflow. F. Heat Pump Heating Mode -Single speed • Thermostat closes circuits R to G and R to Y/Y2. • The fan coil delivers single speed heat pump heating airflow. G. Heat Pump Heating with Auxiliary Electric Heat Thermostat closes circuits R to G, R to Y/Y2 and/or R to Y1 with R to W/W1 or W2 (and R to O in the case of defrost). In the event that electric heating is called for by the thermostat while the heat pump is also operating in either heating or defrost modes,the motor will modify its airflow output, if necessary,to provide an airflow which is defined as safe for the operation of the electric heater during heat pump operation. That airflow is the greater of the heat pump heating airflow and the electric heater only airflow. PROCEDURE 11—TROUBLESHOOTING ECM MOTOR AND CONTROLS 0 CAUTION: High voltage is always present at motor. Disconnect power to unit before removing or replacing connectors or servicing motor. Wait at least 5 min after disconnecting power before opening motor. Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. —15— Table 2—CFM Range for FV4B Units FAN COIL SIZE SYSTEM SIZES CFM RANGE FV413NF002 024,030,036 450-1275 FV41INF0U3 024,030,036,042 525-1475 FV4BNF1105 036,042,048 550-1700 FV413NBU06 042,048,060 550-2150 Table 3—FV4B Fan Coil Airflow Delivery (CFM) in Cooling Mode OPERATING MODE Two-Speed OUTDOOR Single-Speed Application UNIT UNIT Application High Speed Low Speed FAN ONLY SIZE � P CAPACITY Nominal A/C Nominal A/C Nominal A/C LO/MED/HI A/C Cooling A/C Cooling A/C Cooling Cooling Dehumidity Cooling Dehumidity, Cooling Dehumidity 018 525 420 — — — — 350/350/525 002 024 700 560 735 590 440 350 350/440/700 030 875 700 — — 440/550/875 036 1050 840 1100 880 660 530 525/660/1050 024 700 560 735 590 440 415 415/440/700 003 030 875 700 — — — — 440/550/875 036 1050 840 1100 880 660 530 525/660/1050 042 1225 980 — — 610/770/1225 030 875 700 — — — — 440/550/875 005036 1050 840 1100 880 660 530 525/660/1050 042 1225 980 — — 610/770/1225 048 1400 1120 1470 1175 880 705 700/880/1400 036 1050 840 1100 880 660 530 525/660/1050 042 1225 980 610/770/1225 006 048 1400 1120 1470 1175 880 705 700/880/1400 060 1 1750 1400 1 1835 1470 1 1100 880 875/1100/1750 NOTE 1.The above airflows result with the AC/HP CFM ADJUST select jumper set on NOW 2.Airflow can be adjusted+15 percent or-10 percent by selecting HI or LO respectively for all modes except fan only. 3.Dry coil at 230 volts and with 10kw heater and filter installed. 4.Airflows shown are at standard air conditions. Table 4—FV4B Fan Coil Airflow Delivery (CFM) in Heat Pump Only Heating Mode OPERATING MODE Two-Speed OUTDOOR Single-Speed UNIT Application FAN ONLY SIZE UNIT Application High Speed Low Speed LO/MED/HI CAPACITY Heat Pump Heat Pump Heat Pump Heat Pump Heat Pump Heat Pump Comfort Efficiency Comfort Efficiency Comfort Efficiency 018 420 525 — — — — 350/350/470 0112 024 560 700 660 735 395 440 350/395/630 030 700 875 — — 440/520/785 036 840 1050 990 1100 595 660 525/595/945 024 560 700 660 735 415 440 415/415/630 003 030 700 875 — — 440/520/785 036 840 1050 990 1100 595 660 525/595/945 042 980 1225 — — — — 610/695/1100 030 700 875 — — — — 440/520/785 U05 036 840 1050 990 1100 595 660 525/595/945 042 980 1225 610/695/1100 048 1120 1 1400 1320 1470 795 880 700/795/1260 036 840 1050 990 1100 595 660 525/595/945 006 042 980 1225 610/695/1100 048 1120 1400 1325 1470 795 880 700/795/1260 060 1400 1750 1655 1835 990 1100 1 875/990/1575 NOTE 1.The above airflows result with the AC/HP CFM ADJUST select jumper set on NOM. 2.Airflow can be adjusted+15 percent or-10 percent by selecting HI or LO respectively for all modes except fan only. 3.Dry coil at 230 volts and with 10kw heater and filter installed. 4.Airflows shown are at standard air conditions. The ECM motor used with this product contains two parts: the control module and motor winding section. Do not assume the motor or module is defective if it will not start. Go through the steps described below before replacing control module, Easy Select Board or entire motor. The control module is available as a replacement part. —16— Table 5—FV4B Airflow Delivery (CFM) FAN OUTDOOR ELECTRIC HEATER KW RANGE UNIT UNIT 0 5 0-10 0-15 0-20 SIZE CAPACITY 13'11-1IH LO NOM HI LO NOM HI LO NOM HI LO NOM HI 18,000 625 625 625 675 675 675 24,000 650 725 835 " 725 835 875 875 875 0112 30,000 815 905 1040 * 905 1040 900 900 1040 1100 1100 1100 36,000 980 1085 1250 980 1085 1250 980 1085 1250 1100 1100 1250 24,000 675 725 835 875 875 30,000 815 905 1040 875 905 1040 1100 1100 1100 00336,000 980 1085 1250 980 1085 1250 1100 1100 1250 1225 1225 1250 42,000 1140 1270 1460 1140 1270 1460 1140 1270 1460 1225 1270 1460 FAN OUTDOOR ELECTRIC HEATER KV1' RANGE UNIT UNIT 0-10 0-15 0-20 0-30 517E CAPACITY 13TUH LO NOM HI LO NOM HI LO NOM HI LO NOM HI 30,000 975 975 1040 1100 1100 1100 * * • * * + 0115 36,000 9811 1085 1250 1100 1100 1250 1250 1250 1250 * * + 42,000 1140 1270 1460 1140 1270 1460 1250 1270 1460 " 48,000 1305 1450 1 1665 1305 1450 1665 1305 1450 1665 1500 1500 1665 36,000 1100 1100 1 1250 1350 1350 1350 * * + + * + 11U6 42,000 1140 1270 1460 1350 1350 1460 1525 1525 1525 48,000 1305 1450 1665 1350 1450 1665 1525 1525 1665 1750 1750 1750 6Q000 1630 1810 2085 1630 1810 2(IR5 1630 1810 2085 1750 18]0 2085 Airflow not recommended for heater/system size. NOTE:LO,NOM,and HI refer to AC/HP CFM ADJUST selection. Table 6—FV4B Minimum CFM for Electric Heater Application FAN HEAT PUMP CFM COIL UNIT HEATER SIZE KW UNIT SIZE 5 8,9, 10 15 18,20 24,30 Heater Only 625 625 725 875 — 018 625 625 — — — 002 024 650 725 875 — — 030 800 875 875 1040 — 036 970 970 970 1040 — Heater Only 675 700 1050 1050 024 675 875 - — — 003 030 800 875 1100 — — 036 975 975 1100 1225 — 042 1125 1125 1125 1225 — Heater Only 675 700 1050 1050 1400 030 800 875 1100 — — 005 036 975 975 1100 1225 — 042 1125 1125 1125 1225 — 048 1305 1305 1305 1305 1400 Heater Only 1050 1050 1050 1050 1750 036 1100 1100 1350 1350 — 006 042 1125 1125 1350 1350 — 048 1300 1300 1350 1465 1750 060 1625 1625 1625 1750 1750 NOTES: 1.Heater Only-Air conditioner with electric heater application. 2.These airflows are minimum acceptable airflows as UL listed.Actual airflow delivered will be per airflow delivery chart for Electric Heating Modes. A. If motor turns slowly: 1. Replace panel. Motor may appear to run slowly if access panel is removed. 2. It is normal operation to run noticeably slower if G terminal is not energized in cooling or heat-pump modes. B. If motor does not run: Turn off power and check the following: 1. Check 5 amp fuse on Easy Select Board. 2. Check for 24vac on SEC and SEC2. If no voltage is present, check transformer. 3. Check all plugs and receptacles for any deformation which could cause loose connections. Be sure plugs are fully seated. —17— J1 JUMPER–PULL FOR DEHUMIDIFICATION CONTROL " Aq J2 JUMPER–PULL FOR LOW VOLTAGE SCREW TERMINALS HEAT STAGING SEC1 SEC2 O DH —DEHUMIDIFICATION INPUT EAE " —24 VAC HOT R J2 W1 —AUXILARY HEAT STAGE 1 VIO b W2 —AUXILIARY HEAT STAGE 2 OtBRLU g Y1 —LOW SPEED COMPRESSOR SYSTEM TYPE u Cf- HP-E ® Y/Y2 —SINGLE OR HI SPEED ORN 8 g g AC/HP CFM ADJUST ® G —COMPRESSOR NOM LO HI BLK 8 8 8 ® O —FAN ONIOFF DELAY 9 — ENH ® C —REVERSING VALVE WHT b 0 COMMON ONTINUOUS FAN AU 11 HUM1 LO MED HI EL B B Y7a a ADX2 HDM2 G Y/Y2 W2 24V DH CEBD4�30226-01B CESS430226-010 OOI 0000000000 24VAC ❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑ PIN 12 '' { ERY 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 HEATER/MOTOR _ 12-PIN CONNECTOR EE 1E ❑❑❑❑❑ (PL-1) PIN 1 Y1 16-PIN PLUG C W1 C A03004 Fig. 21—Control Signals (Easy Select Board & 16-Pin Plug) 4. Verify that approximately 230vac is present at motor. 5. Verify low-voltage control signals to motor. The motor receives its control signals through the 12-pin plug(PL-1) on Easy Select Board and 16-pin plug on wiring harness. (See Troubleshooting Example.)The combinations of pins energized will determine motor speed.(See Fig.20.) See Table 7 for circuit board,low-voltage screw terminals energized and for voltage present at each pin on 12-pin plug (PL-1). See Table 7 for pin number on 16-pin plug which should have voltage when Easy Select Board screw terminals have 24vac. C. Use following procedure to check control signals: THERMOSTAT 1. Remove all thermostat wires from Easy Select Board. 2. Jumper screw terminals(1 at a time):R-G,R-Y/Y2,R-Yl,R-1AI1.If motor runs in all cases,thermostat is miswired,configured incorrectly or defective. if motor runs in some cases, but not others, continue to check wiring harness and circuit board. WIRING HARNESS 1. Shut off power to unit; wait 5 min. 2. Remove 5-pin plug from motor. 3. Remove 16-pin from motor. 4. Replace 5-pin plug and turn power on. 5. Check for appropriate voltages on 16-pin connector with screw terminals jumpered. (See Table 7 for values and see examples below.) If signals check correctly and motor does not run, inspect wiring harness for loose pins or damaged plastic that could cause poor connections.If connections are good, either control module or motor is defective. If proper signals are not present, check circuit board using procedure below: 12-PIN PLUG (PL-1) ON EASY SELECT BOARD 1. Unplug harness from board. 2. Check for appropriate voltages on pins with Easy Select Board screw terminals jumpered.(See Table 7 for values and see example below.) If proper signals are not present, replace Easy Select Board. If present at board and not at 16-pin connector, wiring harness is defective. TROUBLESHOOTING EXAMPLE: Motor is not running on a call for heat-pump heating. System is a single-speed heat pump. 1. After performing checks in Thermostat section, follow steps 1 thru 5 in Wiring Harness section. Then proceed with example. 2. With all thermostat wires removed from Easy Select Board,place a jumper wire between R and Y/Y2 low-voltage screw terminals on the Easy Select board. 3. Check Table 7 for pin number on 16-pin connector associated with the Y/Y2 signal. The correct pin is#14.The far right column shows that (-) 12vdc should be present between pin 414 and pin 41 (common) on the 16-pin connector. —18— Table 7—Wiring Connections of FV Fan Coil Wiring Harness 16-IN PLUG ON WIRING HARNESS I O MOTOR WIRING HARNESS CONNECTION TO EASY SELECT BOARD Pin on 12-Pin Plug Signal on Pin with ['in on 16-Pin Plug Description or Set-up Selection Wire Color Screw Terminal hnnpered to R* I Common Pin 9 on PL-I Brown 2 W1 Auxiliary Heat Stage 1 Pin 7 on PL-1 Violet 24VAC** 3 Common Pin 10 on PL-1 Orange 4 On/Off Delay Selection On/Off Delay Selection White 5 AC/HP Size Selection AC/HP Size Selection Blue 6 Y1 Low Speed AC or HP Pin 3 on PL-1 Black (-) 12VDC** 7 AC/HP CFM Adjust AC/HP CFM Adjust Selection Selection Black S Not Used N/A Not Used 9 System Type Selection System Type Selection Orange 10 Dehumidify Pin 12 on PL-1 Gray 0V(24VAC on no call) 11 Aux Heat Size Aux Heat Size Selection Selection Violet 12 24v AC Pin 8 on PL-1 Red 24VAC continuous 13 W2 Auxiliary Heat Stage 2 Pin 4 on PL-1 White 24VAC** Single Speed AC or 14 Y/Y2 HP, High Speed Pin 2 on PL-1 Yellow (-) 12VDC** 2-Speed AC or HP 15 G Fan Pin I on PL-1 Green 24VAC** 16 Not Used N/A Not Used Check voltages with 16-Pin Plug disconnected from motor. "These signals will start motor. 4. Set meter to read DC voltage.Place meter between pins#I and#14 and check for(-) 12vdc (common side of meter on pin#l).If signal is present, the problem is in the module or motor. If signal is not, problem is either in wiring harness or Easy Select Board. These steps can be repeated for other modes of operation. To check Easy Select Board: 1. Leave jumper wire in place between R and Y/Y2. 2. Check Table 7 under"Wiring Harness Connection to Easy Select Board"column and row for pin #14 to see pin#on Easy Select Board that should have voltage. The correct pin is#2. The column on far right will show voltage that should be present between pin#2 and#9 (or#10 common). 3. Place meter between pins #2 and#9 on Easy Select Board and check for(-) 12vdc. 4. If voltage is present, the wiring harness is bad; if not, the Easy Select Board is bad. D. Verify Motor Winding Section: Before proceeding with module replacement, check the following to ensure motor winding section is functional. With control module removed and unplugged from winding section: 1. The resistance between any 2 motor leads should be similar. 2. The resistance between any motor lead and the unpainted motor end plate should be greater than 100K ohms. If motor winding section fails one of these tests, it is defective and must be replaced. START-UP PROCEDURES Refer to outdoor unit Installation Instructions for system start-up instructions and refrigerant charging method details. CARE AND MAINTENANCE For continuing high performance, and to minimize possible equipment failure, it is essential that periodic maintenance be performed on this equipment. The only required maintenance that may be performed by the consumer is filter maintenance. zt WARNING: Disconnect all power to unit before servicing field wires or removing control package. The disconnect (when used) on access panel does not disconnect power to the line side of disconnect, but does allow safe service to all other parts of unit. If unit does not have a disconnect, disregard the foregoing. Instead, make sure that a disconnecting means is within sight from,and is readily accessible from,the unit. Disconnect all electrical power to unit before performing any maintenance or service on it.A failure to follow this warning can cause electrical shock,fire, personal injury, or death. The tninilnU n maintenance requirements for this equipment are as follows: 1. Inspect and clean or replace air filter each month or as required. 2. Inspect cooling coil,drain pan,and condensate drain each cooling season for cleanliness.Clean as necessary.An inspection port is provided on all A-coil delta plates. Remove plastic plug to inspect. —19— M IDE Ik TEMPERA ! : , ®+• TURES 000LING LCT BOARD LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BLOCK 1. Configuration Taps (See Installation Instructions,for detailed description.) 62 sec, secz A. AUX HEAT-Set for heater size(Ex:0-10 for 10 kw) � B. AC/HP SIZE-Set for size of outdoor unit DH C. SYSTEM TYPE-Select"HP COMFORT" EASY SELECT'" D. AC/HP CFM ADJUST-Select"LO" AUX HEAT KW/CFM R ze " 0-5 E. ON/OFF DELAY-Select"ENH" Ate/ ors 25 zs 32 W F. CONTINUOUS FAN-Select desired speed wo Jt L 2. Install heater with Intelligent Heat Stagingg,and remove Ac/HP SIZE W2 Jumper J2,except when using 5-,8-,or]0-kw heater. _ � ax OW W4 o3. Remove Juniper J 1 to activate all dehumidify modes. B SLU !1 A D g Y, 4. Complete wiring and install outdoor temperature sensor SYSTEMTYPE according to Installation Instructions. C'�•oRN g W-COM a, HP--EFF ® Y/Yz It • '• 1 1111M AG/HP CFM ADJUST ® U` D LK "gN & b ® 1. Set"UIP Switches"-Set the dip switches(back of Thermidistat (� O Control Board)appropriately for specific system being installed. ON/OFF DELAY t2. Thermidistat Control Configurations 9 1 o EH„ ® C (See ThermidistatT"Control Installation Instructions for E wHT detailed description.) IS b ONTINUOUS FAN • Option 5(Variable Speed Motors)-set to ON AUxi HUM, (Super Option 7(Su Dehumidify )-set to ON F L MED HI EL B B P P y EL a a Option 9(Intelligent Heat)-set to ON if installing with Auxz HUMz GEBD430228-01B cessa3ozze�o,e ® o a single speed heat pump 0 0 0.cc 0 0 0 0 0 0 zavnc Option 12(Heaters during Defrost)-setting"2"is suggested for all heaters ® HEATER/MOTOR GRY_>7 • Option 16-Set to ON for warmer heat below 40°F. • Option 17-Select programmable or non-programmable mode. 3. Set desired humidity level on front of Thermidistat MOLEX 12-PIN CONNECTOR (50 to 55%RH recommended). For cool to dehumidify operation,both"dhu"and"cool"must be displayed. A03100 Fig. 22—Set-Up Instructions for Warmer Heating Temperatures and Super Humidity Control in Cooling 3. Inspect blower motor and wheel for cleanliness each heating and cooling season. Clean as necessary. 4. Inspect electrical connections for tightness and controls for proper operation each heating and cooling season. Service as necessary. Consult Fan Coil Service Manual available from equipment distributor for maintenance procedures. A\ WARNING: As with any mechanical equipment,personal injury can result from sharp metal edges,etc,therefore,care should be taken when removing pants. Using the Owner's/User Manual furnished in outdoor unit,the installing technician Should explain system operation to the consumer with particular emphasis on indoor fall coil operation sounds and filter maintenance. —20— ' PURON R QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INSTALLERS AND TECHNICIANS • Puron refrigerant operates at 50-70 percent higher pressures than R-22. Be sure that servicing equipment and replacement components are designed to operate with Puron. • Puron refrigerant cylinders are rose colored. • Recovery cylinder service pressure rating must be 400 psig, DOT 4BA400 or DOT BW400. • Puron systems should be charged with liquid refrigerant. • Use a commercial type metering device in the manifold hose. • Manifold sets should be 750 psig high-side and 200 psig low-side with 520 psig low-side retard. • Use hoses with 750 prig service pressure rating. • Leak detectors should be designed to detect HFC refrigerant. • Puron, as other HFC's, is only compatible with POE oils. • 'Vacuum pumps will not remove moisture from oil. • Do not use liquid-line filter driers with rated working pressures less than 600 psig. • Do not install a suction-line filter drier in liquid line. • POE oils absorb moisture rapidly. Do not expose oil to atmosphere. • POE oils may cause damage to certain plastics and roofing materials. • Wrap all filter driers and service valves with wet cloth when brazing. • A liquid-line filter drier is required on every unit. • Do not use an R-22 TXV. • If indoor unit is equipped with an R-22 TXV, it must be changed to a Puron TXV. • Never open system to atmosphere while it is under a vacuum. • When system must be opened for service, break vacuum with dry nitrogen and replace filter driers. • Do not vent Puron into the atmosphere. • Do not use capillary tube indoor coils. • Observe all warnings, cautions and bold text. —21— 1 if 030M, HEATING&COOUN® Thermidistat"I Control Visit www.carrier.com Installation, Start-Up, and Operating Instructions NOTE: Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation. This symbol -) indicates a change since the last issue. INDEX Page SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS.....................................................1 INTRODUCTION..........................................................................1 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS.......................................1 Q INSTALLATION........................................................................2-8 Thermidistat Control Location.................................................2 A98a26 Set DIP Switches......................................................................2 HEIGHT(IN.) WIDTH (IN.) DEPTH(IN.) Install Thermidistat Control..................................................2-3 4-3/8 7-3/8 ( 1-3/8 Set Thermidistat Control Configuration...............................3-7 System Start-Up and Checkout.............................................7-8 Fig. 1—Thermidistat Control HUMIDITYttCONTROL FEATURE 8 S.....................................8 .. INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS Humidification..........................................................................8 POWER Dehumidification.................................................................9-10 Note that this control does not require batteries and is not"power Vacation.............................................................................10-11 stealing." It does require 24vac (R and C terminals) of the OPERATIONAL INFORMATION.............................................11 low-voltage transformer to be connected to it for proper operation. THERMIDISTAT CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING............11 It will not operate without these 2 connections. THERMIDISTAT CONTROL CONFIGURATION RECORD.12 WIRING DIAGRAM..............See Thermidistat Wiring Diagrams MODELS SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS There is a single programmable/non-programmable model for all Read and follow manufacturer instructions carefully. Follow all applications. It can be configured for AC or HP, 1- or 2-speed local electrical codes during installation.All wiring must conform compressor, and for dual fuel installations, allowing it to be used to local and national electrical codes. Improper wiring or installa- in place of all Carrier thermostats. tion may damage Thermidistat Control. HUMIDIFY EQUIPMENT AND CONNECTIONS Recognize safety information.This is the safety-alert symbol ®. The humidify output connects directly to 24vac operated humidi- When you see this symbol on the equipment and in the instruction fiers.No other connection or interlock is required.Any of several manual,be alert to the potential for personal injury. installer-selectable operating modes are available. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAU- TION. These words are used with the safety-alert symbol. DAN- A WARNING GER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe DO NOT connect Furnace HUM terminal directly to personal injury or death. WARNING signifies a hazard which Thermidistat HUM terminal.This will bypass furnace safety could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to controls. See Low Voltage Wiring Daigrams and notes for identify unsafe practices which would result in minor personal proper connection. injury or product and property damage. INTRODUCTION DEHUMIDIFY EQUIPMENT AND CONNECTIONS Carrier's 7-day programmable/non-programmable Thermidistat The dehumidify output connects to the dehumidify input on Control is a wall-mounted, low-voltage control which combines variable-speed furnaces and fan coils.Additional dehumidification temperature and humidity control in a single attractive unit. An is done by controlling the compressor. A variety of operating extension of Carrier's proven line of thermostats, it provides modes are available. separate set points for heating and cooling,and now adds humidi- fication and dehumidification. Different heating and cooling set OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR points and times are programmable for 4 periods per day and 7 Optimum performance is obtained when an outdoor temperature days per week. The Thennidistat Control can also be field- sensor is used with the Thermidistat Control. Plan installation so configured as a non-programmable thermostat.When operating in that 2 wires can be run from Thermidistat Control to an outdoor the non-programmable configuration it will still have both tem- location, preferably on the north side of the house or refer to low perature and humidity control. Humidify and dehumidify outputs Installation Instructions included with the outdoor temperature provide direct control of humidity. Batteries are not used. During sensor for simplified connection. Sensor can be mounted to power loss an internal memory stores programs and settings for outdoor unit and existing control wires may be used for its unlimited time, and the clock continues to run for at least 8 hr. connection. Details are provided in sensor instructions. Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue,or change at any time,specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Booll 1 1 4 PC 101 Catalog No. 03TS-TA17 Printed in U.S.A. Form TSTAT-23S1 Pg 1 8-99 Replaces: TSTAT-19SI Tab Imisc.Imisc. INSTALLATION TO SET: Step 1—Thermidistat Control Location OFF—for normal operation. This is factory default. Thermidistat Control should be mounted: ON—for installer test mode. • Approximately 5 ft (1.5m) from floor. Step 3—Install Thermidistat Control • Close to or in a frequently used room, preferably on an inside partitioning wall. • On a section of wall without pipes or duct work. Before installing Thennidistat Control, turn off all power to Thermidistat Control should NOT be mounted: equipment. There may be more than I power disconnect. Electrical shock can cause personal injury or death. • Close to a window,oilan outside wall,or next to a door leading to the outside. 1. Turn off all power to equipment. • Exposed to direct light or heat from a lamp, sun, fireplace, or 2. if an existing thermostat is being replaced: other temperature-radiating objects which could cause a false a. Remove existing thermostat from wall. reading. b. Disconnect wires from existing thermostat, 1 at a time. • Close to or in direct airflow from supply registers and return-air registers. c. As each wire is disconnected, record wire color and • In areas with poor air circulation, such as behind a door or in terminal marking. an alcove. d. New or additional wire may be needed to accommodate Step 2—Set DIP Switches added humidity outputs. There is a 4 section DIP switch within the Thermidistat Control e. Discard or recycle old thermostat. which must be properly set by the installer.It is easiest to set these NOTE: Mercury is a hazardous waste and MUST be disposed of 4 switches before the Thennidistat Control is mounted to the wall, properly. so STOP and complete the following steps: 3. Select Thermidistat Control rear plastic.(If it is not separated 1. Open hinged Thermidistat Control cover. from the remainder of the Thermidistat Control,refer to Step 2. Remove cover completely by snapping it apart at hinge. 2 above.) 4. Route wires through large hole in rear plastic. Level rear 3. Open Thermidistat Control by pressing back half of the right plastic against wall (for aesthetic value only—Thermidistat end of plastic case inward while, at the same time, pulling Control need not be leveled for proper operation) and mark front and back halves apart at the right end.The 2 halves will wall through 2 mounting holes. swing apart. 4. Snap hinge apart to completely separate the 2 halves. 5. Drill two 3/16-in. mounting holes in wall where marked. 6. Secure rear plastic to wall with 2 screws and anchors 5. Switches are located in upper right corner of circuit board.To provided. Additional mounting holes are available for more change switch position, use corner of a small screwdriver to secure mounting if needed. Make sure all wires extend slide switch to opposite position. through hole in mounting base. 6. After switches have been set,do not reassemble the 2 halves. 7. Adjust length and routing of each wire to reach proper The rear plastic will first be mounted to the wall. connector block and terminal on rear plastic with 1/4-in.extra SWITCH 1—AC/HP SELECT length. Strip only 1/4 in. of insulation from each wire to Use this switch to select between air conditioner and heat pump prevent adjacent wires from shorting together when con- systems. nected. TO SET: 8. Match and connect equipment wires to proper terminals of OFF—for air conditioner installations. This is factory default. each connector block. (See Low Voltage Wiring Diagram ON—for heat pump installations,using either a fan coil or furnace Reference Chart and Figs. I through 28 in separate Wiring (dual fuel). Diagram literature). Remember R and C must be connected SWITCH 2-1 SPEED/2 SPEED for proper operation. This switch tells the system whether the compressor is 1 or 2 A CAUTION speed. Improper wiring or installation may damage Thermidistat TO SET: Control.Check to make sure wiring is correct before proceed- OFF—for single-speed compressor. This is factory default. ing with installation or turning on power. ON—for 2-speed compressors, whether AC or HP. SWITCH 3—SMART/CONVENTIONAL RECOVERY 9. Push any excess wire into wall and against rear plastic. Seal hole in wall to prevent air leaks. Leaks can affect operation. Selects between conventional and smart recovery from setback. 10. Reattach Thermidistat Control body to rear plastic by first Conventional recovery changes to new set point at programmed time. Smart recovery,which is active in both heating and cooling, reattaching hinge. starts 90 minutes earlier and smoothly adjusts set point so room 11. Close Thermidistat Control assembly, making sure pins on will arrive at programmed temperature at programmed time. back of circuit board align with sockets in connector. TO SET: 12. Turn on power to equipment. _ OFF—for smart recovery. This is factory default. On power up,all display segments will light for 5 sec.For the next ON—for conventional recovery. 5 sec, a 2-digit code appears on large display which identifies SWITCH 4—INSTALLER TEST OFF/ON Thermidistat Control configuration: Selects a special installer test mode which assists with system 1. AC—for 1-speed air conditioner startup and checkout. See Step 5, System Startup and Check-out. 2. HP—for 1-speed heat pump 2 V 3. A2—for 2-speed air conditioner press SET TIME/TEMP button once. The large display will now 4. H2—for 2-speed heat pump flash, indicating that up and down buttons now control available choices within that option. Each press of TIME/TEMP button 5. dF—for 1-speed dual fuel switches between available option (small display) and available 6. d2—for 2-speed dual fuel selections within each option (large display). 7. HS—for 1-speed heat pump with Intelligent Heat Staging CONFIGURATION OPTIONS—SELECTION: (3-stage auxiliary heat with 4017K,FK4C,or FV4A Series fan Option 1—Anticipator Adjustment coils.) This adjustment controls sensitivity and cycle rate of Thermidistat When this identifier disappears, normal operation begins. The Control.Higher numbers decrease sensitivity and slow cycle rate. MODE control should be set to OFF and FAN control to AUTO, Lower numbers increase sensitivity and cycle rate. However, a so equipment does not start until further configuration and check- limiting feature will not allow more than 4 cycles per hr,regardless out is completed. of setting. Anticipator values can range from 1 to 9. Factory Step 4—Set Thermidistat Control Configuration default is 3.This default selection provides optimum performance Configuration options,like DIP switch settings,are intended to be in nearly all installations.Try it first.Do not change setting unless selected at installation and normally are not modified by the there is evidence of need to do so. homeowner. These options are not discussed in the homeowner's Unlike conventional anticipators,this setting is not detennined by manual and therefore must be made as part of the installation. A current draw. There is no need to measure, know, or compensate special procedure allows entry into the configuration mode.While for current draw. There is also no droop with this Thermidistat in configuration mode, up to 17 selections can be made. A Control.Regardless of setting and number of stages,both heating description of each selection and how to use the configuration and cooling will control to their respective set points. mode follows. TO ADJUST: CONFIGURATION OPTIONS—SUMMARY: 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there.See Step 4"To Option 1—Anticipator adjustment Enter Configuration Mode." The upper small (COOL set Option 2—Clean filter timer adjustment point) display will be flashing 1. If not, use up and down buttons to move it to 1. Option 3—English/Metric selection 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash current selection Option 4—Fan (G) ON with W selection of 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 on large display.Factory default Option 5—Variable-speed blower present selection is 3. Option 6—Cooling lockout below 55° selection 3. Use up and down buttons to move between available choices. Option 7—Variable-speed super dehumidification selection (only 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small available when variable-speed blower is used) display for selection of another option, or press END to exit Option 8—Auxiliary heat lockout temperature setting(only avail- configuration mode. able when heat pump is used) Option 2—Clean Filter Timer Option 9—Intelligent Heat Staging selection(only available when Select hours of blower operation(heating, cooling, or fan)before single-speed heat pump is used) CLEAN FILTER icon is displayed.With OFF selected,icon will Option 10—Dual Fuel selection(only available when heat pump is never come on, disabling this feature. Time selection can range used) from 400 to 3600 hr by selecting numbers 1 through 9. (Time is 400 X number selected.) Factory default is 2 (800 hr). Recom- Option I]—Balance point setting(only available when Dual Fuel mended selections are: disposable filter--400 to 800 hr, media is selected) filter-1200 to 1600 hr,or electronic air cleaner-1600 to 2400 hr Option 12—Defrost heat selection(only available when heat pump of blower operation. is used) TO SELECT OR ADJUST: Option 13—Room temperature offset adjustment 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4"To Option 14—Heat/cool dead band adjustment Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make Option 15—Enable Auto mode small (now flashing)display indicate 2. Option 16—Enables Super Comfort Heat Mode 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash current selection of OF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 on large display. Factory Option 17—Non-Programmable selection default is 2. TO ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE: 3. Use up and down buttons to move between available choices. Press and hold FAN button for approximately 10 sec until COOL 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small set point display indicates a flashing 1. The Thermidistat Control display for selection of another option, or press END to exit is now in configuration mode.It will automatically exit this mode configuration mode. if no button is pressed for 3 minutes.Pressing END button will exit configuration mode immediately. Option 3—English/Metric WHILE IN CONFIGURATION MODE: Select between Fahrenheit and Celsius operation. Factory default is Fahrenheit. The upper small (COOL set point) display indicates selected TO SELECT OR ADJUST: option number and large display indicates selection made within that option.One of these will be flashing.The up and down buttons l• Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4 "To are used both to move between available options and to make Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make selection for each option.When option number(small display) is small (now flashing) display indicate 3. flashing,up and down buttons adjust it,moving between available 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash current selection option numbers. After desired option number has been selected, of F or C. Factory default is F. 3 3. Use up and down buttons to move between F and C on large call for cooling. Not all products with ICM blowers have this display. feature. Check Installation Instructions for ICM air handler used. 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small Select OF for normal operation (Y and G supplied on a cooling display for selection of another option, or press END to exit call). Select ON for super dehumidification (Y with no G on a configuration mode. dehumidify only call). Factory default is OF (off). Option 4-Fan (G) On With W TO SELECT: This selection determines whether fan (G) output is to be ON or 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4 "To OFF when any W (furnace or strip heat) output is ON. Most Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make furnaces and fan coils manage their own blowers and do not small (now flashing)display indicate 7. require separate G signal.For these applications,select OFF.Some 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. auxiliary heaters require separate G signal to tum on blower. In this case, select ON.Factory default is OF (off). 3. Use up or down buttons to alternate between OF and ON on TO SELECT: large display. Factory default is OF. 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4 "To 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make display for selection of another option, or press END to exit small (now flashing) display indicate 4. configuration mode. 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. Option 8-Auxiliary Heat Lockout Setting 3. Use up or down buttons to alternate between OF and ON on This option requires prior selection of heat pump (DIP switch I— large display. Factory default is OF. ON). It allows selection of an outdoor temperature of 5°through 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small 55°F. (or equivalent values in C), or OF (off). Auxiliary heat display for selection of another option, or press END to exit (furnace in Dual Fuel applications)is prevented from operating for configuration mode. outdoor temperatures above selected temperature. If OF (off) is selected,auxiliary heat(furnace if Dual Fuel)operation is allowed Option 5-Variable-Speed (ICM) Blower at all outdoor temperatures. If selected,emergency heat(EHEAT) If furnace or fan coil contains a variable-speed (ICM)blower, set overrides this feature.Factory default is OF(off).This setting can this option to ON. For normal (ASC) blowers, set to OF. This only be equal to or above the setting choice made for Option 11. selection enables system to use special features available only in Moving this setting lower may 'push' Option 11 setting down- units with an ICM blower. Factory default is OF (off). ward. TO SELECT: TO SELECT: " 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4 "To 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4 "To Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make small (now flashing) display indicate 5. small (now flashing)display indicate 8. 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. 2, Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. 3. Use up or down buttons to alternate between OF and ON on 3. Use up or down buttons to move between OF, 5, 10, 15,20, large display. Factory default is OF. 25, 30, 35,40,45, 50, or 55 on large display.Factory default 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small is OF. display for selection of another option, or press END to exit configuration mode. 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small display for selection of another option, or press END to exit Option 6-Cooling Lockout Below 55°F configuration mode. This option disables cooling when outdoor temperature is below Option 9-Intelligent Heat Staging 557.It requires an outdoor temperature sensor.Set to OF to allow cooling below 55°F. Set to ON to prevent cooling below 557. This option requires prior selection of single-speed heat pump Factory default is OF (off). (DIP switch 1-ON, DIP switch 2-OF). It provides 3 stages of TO SELECT: electric heat from W1 and W2 by sequencing WI only, then W2 only, then both W1 and W2. See FK or FV Series Fan Coil 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4 "To Installation Instructions for further information. For 3-stage heat, Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make select ON. For normal 1- or 2-stage heat, select OF. Factory small (now flashing)display indicate 6. default is OF(off). 2. Press SET TIME/T'EMP button once to flash large display. TO SELECT: 3. Use up or down buttons to alternate between OF and ON on 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4"To large display. Factory default is OF. Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small small (now flashing)display indicate 9. display for selection of another option, or press END to exit configuration mode. 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. Option 7-Variable-Speed Superdehumidify 3. Use up or down buttons to alternate between OF and ON on , This option requires prior selection of variable-speed (ICM) large display. Factory default is OF. blower(Option 5). When selected, this option operates blower at 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small further reduced airflow from that of normal dehumidification when display for selection of another option, or press END to exit there is a dehumidification demand without a cooling demand, configuration mode. achieving maximum humidity removal with minimum cooling. It is done by supplying blower with a Y signal and no G signal on a 4 Option 10—Dual Fuel Equipment to operate.This can be somewhat complicated to determine and it involves knowing the cost of gas and electricity, as well as the ! CAUTION efficiency of the furnace and heat pump.For the most economical All dual fuel installations must be equipped with a high operation, the heat pump should operate above this temperature pressure switch to turn off compressor under a high indoor (assuming it has sufficient capacity), and the furnace should coil pressure condition. operate below this temperature. COMFORT BALANCE TEMPERATURE: The high pressure switch protects compressor and indoor coil from overpressure which would occur if a failure or wiring error When the heat pump is operating below this point, the indoor resulted in the heat pump and furnace operating at the same time. supply air feels uncomfortable (i.e. too cool). This is purely High Pressure Switch Kit includes required switch and instructions subjective and will depend on the homeowner's idea of comfort. Below this temperature,the gas furnace should operate in order to for proper operation. For all dual fuel installations, outdoor satisfy the desire of indoor comfort. temperature sensor must be attached.If not,E3 error message will appear. See "Error Codes." TO SELECT: This option requires prior selection of heat pump (DIP switch 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4"To 1—ON),and must be selected in dual fuel installations.It prevents Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make simultaneous operation of both furnace and heat pump, and small (now flashing) display indicate 11. prevents direct transition from heat pump to furnace operation. 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. When system is dual fuel (heat pump and furnace), set to ON. 3. Use up or down buttons to move between OF, 5, 10, 15, 20, When system contains fan coil, set to OF. Factory default is OF 25,30, 35,40,45,50,or 55 on large display.Factory default (off). is OF. TO SELECT: 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4"To display for selection of another option, or press END to exit Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make configuration mode. small (now flashing)display indicate 10. Option 12—Defrost Heat Select 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. This option allows installer to select the amount of heat provided 3. Use up or down buttons to alternate between OF and ON on by Thermidistat Control during a heat pump defrost cycle.This can large display. Factory default is OF. be very helpful in maintaining a comfortable leaving air tempera- 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small tore during defrost.The Thermidistat Control senses when defrost display for selection of another option, or press END to exit is in progress by monitoring voltage placed on the O line by the configuration mode. heat pump while defrosting. It responds by turning on selected Option 11—Balance Point Setting combination of WI and W2 during defrost.Note that this is veryThis option is for dual fuel installations only. It requires prior different from the operation of an ordinary thermostat, which cannot sense defrost in progress and only turns on its W outputs in selection of heat pump (DIP switch 1 -- ON) and dual fuel response to a temperature demand. Combinations of WI and W2 equipment (Option 10 -- ON). 1t allows selection of an outdoor are selected via the following: temperature of 5"F.through 55'F. (or equivalent values in C.),or OF (off). Heat pump is prevented from operating for outdoor Table 1—W1 / W2 Outputs temperatures below selected temperature. If OF (off) is selected, heat pump operation is allowed at all outdoor temperatures. SELECTION DEFINITION or W2 is turned on. Factory default is OF (off). This setting can only be equal to or 0 Neither W1 fa below the setting choice made for Option 8. Moving the setting This is factory default. I Only W1 is turned on. higher may 'push' Option 8 setting upward. 2 Both W1 and W2 turned on. If the outdoor temperature is above the"balance point setting",the heat p um will energize first to to satisfy the indoor tempera- g Only W2 turned on (available pump g D' y p only if 3-stage heat is selected). ture demand. If the heat pump does not make a sufficient improvement within a reasonable time period (i.e. 15 minutes), The selection procedure is given below.If 0 is selected,operation then the gas furnace will come on to satisfy the indoor temperature is like that of an ordinary thermostat, and a wire is required demand. If the outdoor temperature is below the "balance point between W2 of outdoor unit and a selected W on indoor unit. setting" the heat pump will not be allowed to operate(i.e. locked When selection 1, 2, or 3 is made, no wire should be connected out), and the gas furnace will be used to satisfy the indoor from outdoor W2 because this connection may override selection temperature. made. Obviously the heater must be in 2 sections, and fan coil There are three separate concepts which are related to selecting the jumper must be removed between W1 and W2 for there to be a final"balance point setting".Read each of the following carefully difference between selections 1,2,and 3.For most heaters,W1 is to determine the best "balance point setting" in a dual fuel lower wattage heater,and W2 is higher,although some have equal installation: elements for WI and W2. Consult fan coil/heater combination for CAPACITY BALANCE TEMPERATURE: the actual wattage connected to each of WI and W2. This is the point where the heat pump cannot provide sufficient In dual fuel applications,above selection choices apply and can be capacity to keep up with the indoor temperature demand because used to select low or high heat if furnace is 2 stage. W1 will of declining outdoor temperature. At or below this point, the produce low heat. W1 and W2 together produce high heat. This furnace is needed to maintain proper indoor temperature. option provides no value with single-stage furnaces because only ECONOMIC BALANCE TEMPERATURE: 1 value of heat is available. Above this point, the heat pump is the most cost efficient to The selection choices guarantee selected outputs will be on during operate,and below this point,the furnace is the most cost efficient defrost. If room temperature demand requires additional heat, it 5 will be supplied,resulting in additional outputs being turned on.If that it cannot switch between heat and cool without a 20 minute room overheats,specified outputs will not turn off,guaranteeing a "off'time between the 2 operations.Specifically,to switch from 1 sufficiently wane leaving air temperature during defrost.Tempera- mode to the other,there must be no demand for the old mode and ture overshoot during defrost can occur, but is almost never a demand for the new mode,and this must exist continually for 20 noticeable because of the short duration of the defrost cycle (4 minutes before transition to the new mode will occur. minutes typical, 10 minutes maximum). TO SELECT: An additional feature of Thermidistat Control defrost is that it 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4"To always allows defrost cycle to run to completion.The Thermidistat enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make Control leaves the Y output on as long as outdoor unit holds small (now flashing) display indicate 14. voltage on the 0 line, even if it is satisfied. This prevents premature termination of defrost cycles, which occur with normal 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. thermostats. 3. Use up or down buttons to move between 0, 1,2,3,4,5,or 6 TO SELECT: on large display. Factory default is 2. 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4 "To 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make display for selection of another option, or press END to exit small (now flashing) display indicate 12. configuration mode. 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. Option 15--Enable Auto Mode 3. Use up or down buttons to move between 0, 1, 2, or 3 (if This option allows the installer to enable or disable AUTO mode (automatic changeover between heat and cool). When disabled, available) large display. See Table 1 for effect of these AUTO icon does not appear when successive presses of MODE choices. Factory default is 0. button are used to move between OFF, HEAT, COOL, and 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small EHEAT (in heat pump systems). Factory default is ON (AUTO display for selection of another option, or press END to exit enabled). configuration mode. TO SELECT: Option 13—Room Temperature Offset Adjust 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4 "To This option allows calibration (or deliberate miscalibration) of Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make room temperature sensor. There are various reasons why home- small (now flashing)display indicate 15. owners may want to have displayed temperature adjusted to a 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. higher or lower value. The selected number is number of degrees farhenheit, plus or minus,which will be added to actual tempera- 3. Use up and down buttons to move between OF and ON on ture.The numbers can range between-5 and+5.Factory default is large display. Factory default is ON(AUTO enabled). 0.This adjusted value will be used as actual temperature for both 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small display and control action. For example, if 2 is selected, 72°F display for selection of another option, or press END to exit actual will read 74°F.If set point is 72°F,the room will control to configuration mode. an actual temperature of 707 which will be displayed and acted Option 16—Enable Super Comfort Heat Mode upon as if it were 72°F. The effect is that a positive number This option requires prior ON selection of heat pump(DIP switch selection will make the room temperature lower and vice versa. No. 1) and Configuration Option No. 5 (Select Variable-Speed The Thermidistat Control is calibrated within an accuracy of plus Blower). Super Comfort Heat mode is part of the Comfort Heat or minus I°F when shipped from the factory, so this adjustment pump system, which comprises a selected combination of Ther- will provide the best accuracy when set to 0. midistat Control, variable speed Fan Coil, and 3-stage electric TO SELECT: heater to provide superior heat pump leaving air temperatures 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4"To under all conditions. This option selection modifies heat pump Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make blower and auxiliary heat operation to contribute to comfortable small (now flashing)display indicate 13. leaving air temperature. Specifically, this selection provides: 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. Reduced heat pump airflow for outdoor temperatures between 3. Use up or down buttons to move between-5,-4,-3,-2,-1,0, 12° and 40°F. 1, 2, 3,4, or 5 on large display. Factory default is 0. At least 1 stage of electric heat ON for all heating below 12°F. 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small While outdoor air temperature is between 12°F and 407, the display for selection of another option, or press END to exit Thermidistat Control removes the G signal during heat pump configuration mode. heating. The 40FK, FK4C, or FV4A Variable-Speed Fan Coils Option 14—Heat/Cool Dead Band Adjustment respond by reducing their airflow in the absence of the G signal, raising leaving air temperature. For any heating demand below This option selects the minimum difference between heat and cool 12°F, G and W/W 1 are turned ON, assuring at least 1 stage of set points. A larger difference saves energy and a smaller differ- electric heat is on, and also increasing leaving air temperature. ence decreases temperature difference between heating and cool- As part of the Comfort Heat pump system, Configuration Option ing.Factory default is 2,which means cooling set point must be a No.9(Intelligent Heat Staging)should also be set to ON if the heat minimum of 2°above heating set point. An attempt to move them closer will result in one "pushing" the other to maintain the pump is single stage and a 3-stage heater is present. required difference. TO SELECT: Depending on set points, moving dead band closer than 2° may 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4"To result in regular cycling between heat and cool when AUTO mode Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make is selected.However,this cycling cannot occur more often than 1 small (now flashing)display indicate 16. transition every 20 minutes.The system has a built-in requirement 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. 6 V COPY PREVIOUS PAY PROGRAM MODE SETC004 ,�' ;;SET DRUM MODern 1 �s � Ka Y CHANGE DAY ,. - HUMIDITY FAN � SET HEAD °- SET HUM' �. 5 8 2 f 9 UK6 • 9 PROGRAMMABLE CONFIGURATION NON-PROGRAMMABLE CONFIGURATION (OPTION 17 OFF) (OPTION 17 ON) A99059 Fig. 2—Programmable/Non-Programmable Keypad Labels 3. Use up and down buttons to move between OF and ON on 1. Enter configuration mode if not already there. See Step 4"To large display. Factory default is OF. Enter Configuration Mode."Use up and down buttons to make 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small small (now flashing)display indicate 17. display for selection of another option, or press END to exit 2. Press SET TIME/TEMP button once to flash large display. configuration mode. 3. Use up and down buttons to move between ON and OF on Option 17—Enable Non-Programmable Operation large display.Factory default is OF. This option converts the programmable Thermidistat Control to a 4. Press SET TIME/TEMP button again to flash upper small non-programmable control for those users who do not want display for selection of another option, or press END to exit programmability. The clock is retained, but the days of the week configuration mode. and the daily schedules have been eliminated,making it operate as REDEFINITION OF BUTTONS if HOLD were permanently ON. Some of the buttons (used in Fig.2 shows the original(programmable)button labels on the left programming only and now not needed)are redefined to simplify and the redefined(non-programmable)buttons on the right.In the the non-programmable operation. To match these redefined but- figure,the buttons are numbered for easy reference. They are not tons,a new keypad label,included with the Thermidistat,must be numbered on the actual product. Six of the buttons (numbers 1 placed over the original keypad label. Fig. 2 shows both the through 5 and 9) have been redefined. original keypad label and the non-programmable keypad label. When this option is selected,the new keypad label must be applied Button 3 originally alternated between time, cool set point, and over(or in place of) the original. Because these adhesive-backed heat set point with each press.Now,button 1 selects the cool set keypad labels are not designed to be removed, this conversion point,button 2 selects the heat set point,and button 3 selects time, should be considered pennanent. Once the change to non- now used only to set the clock.Note that the days of the week are programmable operation is done, a procedure is not provided to gone. easily change it back. Should this change be needed, it is best to Button 5 used to alternate between humidify and dehumidify.Now trade the Thermidistat for one which has not been converted. button 4 selects dehumidify and button 5 selects humidify. Both programmable and non-programmable versions of the Ho- Button 9 now loses the HOLD label, making it END only. This meowner's Manual are available.Be sure to leave only the correct button is only used to END the humidity screen and the configu- version of the Homeowner's Manual with the homeowner. ration mode. Once it has been determined that a particular installation is to be These changes both simplify operation for the homeowner and find made non-programmable, the only changes required are: use for the buttons which are no longer needed when programma- • Attach non-programmable keypad label over original program- bi]ity is removed. mable one. Step 5—System Start-Up and Checkout • Attach non-programmable start-up sticker instructions to back The Thermidistat Control is designed with a built-in installer test of door. capability.It allows easy operation of equipment without delays or • Set Configuration Option No. 17 to ON. set point adjustments to force heating or cooling. • Leave non-programmable homeowner's manual with home- To enable installer test mode, move DIP switch No. 4 to ON owner. position. To access this switch,open case as described in Step 2. Use the corner of a small screwdriver to slide switch No.4 to ON To attach the provided non-programmable keypad label,carefully position. peel off its backing and apply it over the original keypad label. PLEASE HEED:Once the new keypad label makes contact,it will While in installer setup mode, clock will display "Inst," FAN stick firmly in place and adjustments cannot be made. CARE- button will control fan,and MODE button will control heating and FULLY locate an edge of the keypad label, making sure its cooling. position and orientation are correct.Then,from the attached edge, TO TEST FAN: smooth the rest of the keypad label over the original.Make sure the Fan button switches FAN icon between AUTO and ON.While ON new keypad label does not interfere with the motion of the buttons is displayed, G output will be on, turning fan on. Allow up to 10 which it surrounds. sec after button is pressed for fan to turn on and off.On some fan TO SELECT: coils,fan continues to operate for 90 sec after G signal is removed. 7 Table 2—Equipment Outputs 1-SPEED AC 2-SPEED AC 1-SPEED HP 2-SPEED HP Cool-0 to 2 minutes Y, G Y1, G Y, G, O Y1, G, O Cool—2 to 4 minutes Y, G Y1,Y2, G Y,G, O Y1,Y2, G, O Heat-0 to 2 minutes W1 W1 Y, G Y1, G Heat-2 to 4 minutes W1, W2 W1, W2 Y, G Y1,Y2, G Eheat-0 to 2 minutes W1 W1 Eheat-2 to 4 minutes ___ --_ W1 W2t W1* 'Two-stage heat not available NOTE: For Y—use terminal Y/Y2,for Y1—use terminal Y1/W2,for W2—use terminal O/W2, for 0—use terminal O/W2,for W1—use terminal W/W1,for W2f,use terminal Y1/W2 TO TEST COOLING AND DEHUMIDIFICATION: Table 3—Energy Star Default Schedule Press MODE button until COOL icon turns on. Cooling begins SCHEDULE HEAT COOL within 10 sec and remains on for 4 minutes. If system is 2-speed, Wake 6:00 AM 68°F 78°F low speed comes on for first 2 minutes,followed by high speed for Day 8:00 AM 60°F 85°F second 2 minutes. At the end of 4-minute run, cooling stops, and Evening 5:00 PM 68°F 78°F MODE reverts back to OFF.At any time during 4-minute run time, Sleep 10:00 PM 60°F 82°F cooling may be turned off by pressing MODE button until OFF appears. While cooling is on, successive presses of HUMIDITY The FAN button may be used to select between AUTO (fan on button turn dehumidify output on and off. While this output is only with equipment) and FAN(fan on continuously) fan modes. active, "dh" appears in cool set point display. Equipment outputs for different equipment types are listed in Table 2. For further information on temperature selection and program- ming, refer to Homeowner's Guide. TO TEST PRIMARY HEATING AND HUMIDIFICATION: HUMIDITY CONTROL FEATURES Press MODE button until HEAT icon turns on. Primary heating The various humidity control features of the Thennidistat Control begins within 10 sec and remains on for 4 minutes. This will be are explained below. They are grouped into 2 sections: humidifi- furnace or electric heat in AC system and heat pump heating in cation and dehumidification. At the end of each section, instrue- heat pump system. If system has 2 stages of primary heat, first tions on how to select each feature are given. stage will be on for 2 minutes followed by second stage for 2 HUMIDIFICATION minutes. At the end of 4-minute run, heating stops, and MODE The Thennidistat Control directly connects to a standard 24-vac reverts back to OFF.At any time during 4-minute run time,heating humidifier to control humidification in the home. A humidify set may be turned off by pressing MODE button until OFF appears. point between 10 and 45 percent relative humidity is selected by While heating is on,successive presses of HUMIDITY button turn the homeowner, or all humidification can be turned off. When humidify output on and off. While this output is active, "hu" humidity in home drops below set point,humidifier will be turned appears in heat set point display. Equipment outputs for different on to raise humidity level. Humidification can only occur in equipment types are listed in Table 2. heating mode(HEAT or AUTO/HEAT). Five different humidifi- TO TEST AUXILIARY HEATING: cation selections are available and are described below. Auxiliary heating only exists in heat pump systems.To test,press 1. Normal Humidify MODE button until EHEAT icon turns on. This will be electric In normal humidify, humidifier will be on if there is a heat in standard heat pump systems and furnace in dual fuel humidity demand and any heating equipment is on. This will systems.Auxiliary heating begins within 10 sec and remains on for include furnace, heat pump, or auxiliary heat. In heat pump 4 minutes.If there are 2 stages of auxiliary heat,first stage comes applications, this is an improvement over using an external on for 2 minutes followed by second stage for 2 minutes. At the humidistat,which only supplies humidity when auxiliary heat end of 4-minute run, heating stops and MODE reverts back to is on. OFF.At any time during 4-minute run time,heating may be turned 2. Fan Humidify off by pressing MODE button until OFF appears. Actual outputs This configuration allows a humidify demand to turn on fan for different equipment types are listed in Table 2. and humidifier together,even if there is no heat demand.It is Step 6—Final Settings particularly useful when the furnace is oversized,resulting in Be sure to return DIP switch No. 4 back to OFF position to exit short heating cycles. It allows the humidifier to run longer, installer setup mode. Assuming system is to be left in operation supplying more humidity to the home.Note that fan hours will after installation is complete,use MODE button to select between increase, using more electricity. Also, the humidifier delivers HEAT,COOL, or AUTO to provide desired operation of heating, less moisture to cooler air than it does to heated air. cooling, or both. 3. Auto Humidify The default set points and programmed schedule conform to the This feature is designed to eliminate the problem of sweating Energy Star HO requirements of the U.S. Department of Energy for windows in very cold weather.When selected,the set point is both heating and cooling. These provide energy saving tempera- automatically reduced by 1 percent for every drop of 2°F in lure settings. Refer to Table 3. outdoor temperature between 50°F and 0°F.The set point may be changed at any time, and it will continue to track outdoor If programmed schedule is to be used, make sure HOLD icon is temperature from the new set point and current outdoor off. This feature is turned on and off by HOLD button. temperature. The adjusted set point range is still limited to If fixed temperatures are desired, use HOLD button to turn on between 10 and 45 percent relative humidity. To use this HOLD icon. This will maintain set points, not allowing them to feature, an outdoor temperature sensor MUST be attached. If change with programmed schedule. not, E3 error message will be displayed. 8 Table 4—Humidification Selections HUMIDIFY SET POINT SELECTION MODE DISPLAY FAN DISPLAY DISPLAY Normal Humidify Blank Blank Humidify Set Point Value Fan Humidify Blank FAN Humidify Set Point Value Auto Humidify AUTO Blank Humidify Set Point Value Auto and Fan AUTO FAN Humidify Set Point Value Humidify Off Blank Blank OF 4. Auto and Fan Humidify The cool to dehumidify selection tells the system to operate The 2 choices of AUTO and FAN can be selected together. the compressor, within limits, when there is a dehumidify This provides both functions simultaneously. demand even if there is no cooling demand.The limits are that the system may overcool up to 3', but no more, while 5. Humidify Off attempting to satisfy a dehumidify demand. Within this 3° The humidify function can be turned off completely.This does range,there is an additional balance between overcooling and not require changing existing set points. humidity satisfaction. When overcooling must occur, the To Select Humidification (Between NORMAL, FAN, AUTO, dehumidify set point is adjusted upward by 2 percent per FAN and AUTO,or OFF) (See Table 4.) degree of overcooling. For example, a cooling set point of 767 and a dehumidify set point of 60 percent is equivalent to Press HUMIDITY button to bring up humidity select screen.It is a cooling set point of 757 and a dehumidify set point of 62 indicated by "hu" or "dhu" in clock display. Successive presses percent. This dehumidify set point change is internal to the will change between "hu" and"dhu" in clock display. Select"hu" Thermidistat Control and is not shown on the display. for humidity functions. The large display shows actual humidity During cool-to-dehumidify demand, the compressor runs a level. The smaller display (in heat set point location) shows maximum of 10 minutes on, followed by 10 minutes off. humidity set point (Humidify Set Point) or OF (off). When When the compressor turns off, the fan (G output) is also Humidity Set Point value is displayed, its value can be changed turned off immediately. The immediate fan shutoff prevents with up and down buttons. Successive presses of MODE button re-evaporation of water on the coil, improving dehumidifica- will move between 5 choices described above and each will be tion. If fan is set to continuous, the G (fan on) signal is indicated as shown in Table 4. removed for 5 minutes starting when compressor turns off. To exit humidity select screen, press END button. In most furnaces and fan coils,the blower operates for 90 sec Additional Humidify Comments after both Y and G disappear. This 90-sec delay should be The humidifier is actually turned on when humidity is 2 percent removed, if possible, for maximum dehumidification perfor below set point and turned off when it reaches 2 percent above set mance. Consult furnace or fan coil Installation Instructions to point. This built-in hysteresis prevents humidify output from see if delay can be disabled. toggling on and off when humidity level is near set point. 3. Dehumidify Off The vacation mode provides some additional humidification func- Dehumidification can be turned off completely. This can be tions. These are specially designed to provide protection for an done without changing existing set points. unoccupied home while simultaneously minimizing energy use. To Select Dehumidification (Between NORMAL, COOL TO, Refer to "Vacation" section for additional information, and OFF) DEHUMIDIFICATION Press HUMIDITY button to bring up humidity selections.Succes- Dehumidification is done only during cooling.Depending oil type sive presses will show"hu"or"dhu"in clock display.Select"dhu" of equipment used, compressor speed, blower speed, set point for dehumidify selections.The large display shows actual humidity adjustment,and equipment cycling are modified to provide added level. The smaller display (in cool set point location) shows dehumidification. A dehumidification set point (separate from dehumidify set point (DSP) or OF (off). When DSP value is humidification set point) is available to the homeowner. It can displayed, its value can be changed with up and down buttons. range from 50 to 90 percent relative humidity. When actual Successive presses of MODE button moves between 3 choices humidity is higher than set point, a dehumidification demand above and each will be indicated as in Table 5. exists. The Thermidistat Control responds by activating its dehu- Superdehumidify (With Cool to Dehumidify) midify output. It may also control the compressor and blower, This selection only affects cool-to-dehumidify operation.It is part depending on equipment type and dehumidify selection choice. The 3 available selections are described below. of the installer setup(see Configuration Option No.7)and must be made by installer. The Homeowner's Guide does not cover this The amount of extra dehumidification available is very dependent selection.A requirement is the use of a variable-speed indoor unit on the type of equipment in the home. Without a variable-speed with superdehumidify capability. During cool-to-dehumidify call, blower, the system's ability to adjust dehumidification is very it provides maximum dehumidification by reducing airflow to a limited. minimum.The actual superdehumidify command from Thermidis- 1. Normal Dehumidify Operation tat Control to the indoor unit is a Y signal without a G signal in When non-nal dehumidify is selected,the compressor will not addition to dehumidify signal. The indoor unit responds to this turn on without a cooling demand. If dehumidify demand combination by reducing the airflow to a minimum. All other exists while cooling, dehumidify output will also be active characteristics of cool to dehumidify are the same. (24vac removed). This output commands variable-speed Additional Dehumidify Comments blowers to reduce their airflow, which improves water re- Deli in can be enhanced(with some efficiency loss)by moval from the cooled air. turning blower off immediately at the end of each cooling cycle 2. Cool to Dehumidify (eliminating normal 90 sec blower off delay). Where maximum 9 Table 5—Dehumidification Selections SELECTION MODE DISPLAY FAN DISPLAY DEHUMIDIFY SET POINT DISPLAY Normal Dehumidify Blank Blank Dehumidify Set Point Value Cool to Dehumidify COOL Blank Dehumidify Set Point Value Dehumidify OFF Blank Blank OF humidity removal is desired, this should be done, if possible. Fan Carrier 58MVP Furnaces also have a DEHUM input. The DE- coils have the capability of removing this off delay, furnaces do HUM input acts differently depending on which style of variable- not.On FK or FV Fan Coils,set delay tap to 0/0.Oil standard fan speed furnace control you have. The older style variable-speed coils, a jumper can be cut to disable off delay. Refer to fan coil furnace control DOES NOT have a DE connection while the newer Installation Instructions for details. If FAN is set for continuous style variable-speed furnace control has a DE connection.Both of operation (fan ON icon displayed), G output is turned off for 5 these variable-speed furnace controls function the same except the minutes at the end of each cooling cycle as long as dehumidify DEHUM logic is reversed. demand exists. On the older style variable-speed furnace controls, a field- Like humidify,dehumidify actions are initiated when humidity is supplied relay is required between the Thermidistat Control 2 percent above set point and are terminated when humidity drops and furnace.The relay coil is connected between DHUM output to 2 percent below set point.This prevents unnecessary toggling of on the Thermidistat Control and COM terminal on the furnace dehumidify actions when humidity is near set point. control. Its normally closed contact is connected between R and The vacation mode contains additional dehumidify features de- DEHUM terminals on the furnace control, where the DEHUM signed to protect an unoccupied home. Refer to the "Vacation" terminal is a spade lug located next to the transformer secondary section for additional information. connections. (See Wiring Diagram Reference Chart and Fig. 21 With any dehumidify selection, if the system has a 2-speed through 24 in Wiring Diagram literature). When a dehumidify compressor (DIP switch No. 2 is ON) and does NOT have a demand exists,relay is de-energized,and normally closed contacts variable-speed blower(Configuration Option No.5 set to OFF),all supply 24vae to the furnace DEHUM terminal. As a result the cooling will be done at high speed while dehumidify demand furnace control reduces the blower airflow by 15 percent. exists. This is because the combination of 2-speed compressor On newer style variable-speed furnace controls, a field- without variable-speed blower generally has poor water removal supplied relay IS NOT required. The DHUM output on the on low speed. Thermidistat Control is instead connected directly to the DEHUM Dehumidify Output and Equipment Connections tenninal on the furnace control, where the DEHUM terminal is a When there is a dehumidify demand, dehumidify output is spade lug located next to the transformer secondary connections. activated, which means that a 24-vac signal is removed from the In addition the DE jumper located next to the DEHUM terminal DHUM output terminal.In other words,dehumidify output logic is must be removed to enable the DEHUM input. (See Wiring reversed — output is turned ON when no dehumidify demand Diagram Reference Chart and Fig. 25 through 28 in Wiring exists and is turned OFF when demand exists. This logic reversal Diagram literature).When a dehumidify demand exists the furnace has come about from historical use of a standard humidistat to do control reduces the blower airflow by 21 percent. dehumidification. The humidistat contacts open on high humidity, VACATION thus removing a 24-vac signal to initiate dehumidification.Equip- ment has been designed to operate in this manner, so the A vacation selection is available specifically for times where the Thermidistat Control must now accommodate the existing equip- home will not be occupied for an extended period. For conve- ment. nience, I button selects vacation mode which is indicated by OUT icon on display. Vacation mode also has an automatic hold, Carrier FK and FV Series Variable-Speed Fan Coils, all 58UHV meaning that set points are not affected by the programmed and 58UXV 80% Variable-Speed Furnaces, and 58MVP 90% schedule. While in vacation mode, the system provides tempera- Variable-Speed Furnaces with the DE connection have dehumidify tore and humidity protection for the home in all seasons, but not inputs which connect directly to Thermidistat Control DHUM comfort. output.They are compatible with the reverse logic output and will reduce their cooling CFM by approximately 20 percent when a Vacation Set Points dehumidify demand is present. A special set of temperature and humidity set points exists which The FK and FV Series Fan Coils have a terminal marked DH are active in vacation mode. They are adjustable by the home- which should be connected to the Thermidistat Control DHUM owner, are exclusively for vacation mode, and are remembered output. Jumper J1 on fail coil MUST be removed. It is located from I vacation selection to the next. These set points will be behind the DH terminal.Additionally blower delay tap on fan coil higher for cool and dehumidify and lower for heat and humidify Should be set to 0/0(no ON delay and no OFF delay)when using than those of occupied mode. cool to dehumidify. With this selection, the blower stops when G Vacation Humidification signal is removed,preventing re-evaporation of water from the coil Normal humidify is available, using vacation set points. Humidi- which would occur during the normal 90 sec blower off delay.(See fication by fan only is not available as vacation selection. Auto Wiring Diagram Reference Chart and Fig. 5 through 8 in Wiring humidification is available, adjusting its set point with outdoor Diagram literature), temperature the same as when occupied. The maximum humidity On 58UHV and 58UXV Furnaces,a green wire marked DHUM is set point can be adjusted separately from the occupied value,but connected to a spade lug which is connected to the G input it must always be less than occupied value. This allows humidi- terminal. Unplug spade lug, Curt off spade receptacle from wire fication to track outdoor temperature identically,whether occupied end, and splice a wire between green DEHUM wire and Thermi- or vacation, but allows maximum humidification to be less when distat Control DHUM terminal. (See Wiring Diagram Reference unoccupied. Vacation humidification can be turned off indepen- Chart and Fig. 17 through 20 in Wiring Diagram literature). dently of occupied humidification. 10 Thermidistat Control Troubleshooting SYMPTOM WHAT TO CHECK No display Open Thermidistat Control.Check for 24vac between R and C at screw terminals on mounting base.Reassemble,making sure pins on board engage sockets in mounting base.If display does not appear,replace Thermidistat Control. in place of room temperature Thermidistat Control cannot properly read room temperature.Replace Thermidistat Control. "E3"or"—"in place of outdoor temperature Thermidistat Control cannot properly read outdoor temperature.Check outdoor sensor and its wiring. "E4"or"E5" Internal failure.Replace Thermidistat Control. "EV System is stuck in defrost.Check wiring and heat pump defrost control board. "Clean Filter"icon displayed Filter timer has expired.Clean or replace filter and then press VACATION and HOLD/END buttons together to reset. Cooling or heating will not come on See Installer Setup to force heating or cooling.Check for 24vac at equipment terminals.If not present,check wiring. Humidify or dehumidify will not come on See Installer Setup to force HUM or DEHUM.Check for 24vac at equipment terminals.If not present,check wiring. Vacation Dehumidification located under heat set point. These 2 arrows are also used to Normal Dehumidify, Cool to Dehumidify, and Dehumidify OFF, indicate state of humidify and dehumidify outputs. See next are all available in vacation mode,and selection of 1 of these can section. be different from that of occupied. Vacation dehumidification HUMIDIFY AND DEHUMIDIFY INDICATORS selection and set points are remembered the next time vacation is The humidity screen(selected by pressing the HUMIDITY button) used. uses the same triangles referenced in the above paragraph to Cool to dehumidify operates slightly differently, allowing the indicate the state of the HUM and DHUM outputs. When home to be cooled to as low as 70°F when trying to achieve humidification or dehumidification is active,the triangle under its dehumidify set point. The balance between dehumidify and set point is turned on. temperature set point adjustments is 1 percent set point increase AUTO CHANGEOVER per degree of overcooling for temperatures below 76°F. For When auto changeover mode is selected, a change from heat to example, at 74°F dehumidify set point is raised 2 percent, and at cool(or vice versa)will not occur until an opposite mode demand 72°F dehumidify set point is raised 4 percent. At temperatures has existed for 20 minutes. If set point is changed, 20-minute above 767, dehumidify set point is not changed. requirement is deleted. OPERATIONAL INFORMATION EMERGENCY HEAT MODE FIVE-MINUTE COMPRESSOR TIMEGUARD When Thermidistat Control is configured as a heat pump and This timer prevents compressor from starting unless it has been off emergency heat is selected, all Y signals are locked out, and W for at least 5 minutes. It can be defeated for 1 cycle by becomes energized upon a call for heat. simultaneously pressing FAN button and INCREASE TEMPERA- TURE button. POWER ON CHECK FIFTEEN-MINUTE CYCLE TIMER When AC power is first applied,all segments of display are turned on for a few seconds.Following this,temperature display indicates This timer prevents the start of a heating or cooling cycle until at model/configuration via following 2-digit code: least 15 minutes after the last start of the same cycle.Its function is to assure that equipment is not cycled more than 4 times per hr. AC-1-speed air conditioner, HP-1-speed heat pump, A2-2- This timer is defeated for 1 cycle when desired temperature is speed air conditioner,H2-2-speed heat pump,HS—I-speed heat manually changed. It can also be defeated for I cycle by pump with 3-stage auxiliary heat, dF—dual fuel, d2—dual fuel simultaneously pressing FAN button and INCREASE TEMPERA- with 2-speed. TURE button. ERROR CODES FIFTEEN-MINUTE STAGING TIMER "--" — If Thermidistat Control cannot properly read room tem- In multistage heating or cooling, this timer prevents any higher perature, display will indicate -- and all outputs (except stage from turning on until preceding stage has been on for 15 fan if on)will turn off. minutes.This timer is defeated if temperature error is greater than E1,E2 — There is no EI or E2 error message. 5°F (usually due to a large change in desired temperature). E3 — If Thermidistat Control cannot properly read outdoor THREE-MINUTE MINIMUM ON TIME temperature,and it is needed for proper operation,display will indicate E3. In normal operation,when a stage turns on,it will not turn off for E4 — If Thermidistat Control's internal memory fails,E4 will be a minimum of 3 minutes. If the set point is changed,this timer is displayed. Replace Thermidistat Control. automatically canceled,allowing the equipment to turn off imme- E5 — If Thermidistat Control cannot properly read humidity,E5 diately when the demand is removed. will be displayed. Replace Thermidistat Control. HEAT/COOL SET POINTS (DESIRED TEMPERATURE) E6 — If defrost cycle continues for longer than 15 minutes. E6 A minimum difference of 2° is enforced between heating and will be displayed. Check heat pump wiring or for failed cooling desired temperatures.This is done by allowing 1 setting to heat pump defrost control. "Push" the other, to maintain this difference. This difference is SMART RECOVERY adjustable via Configuration Option 14. With Smart Recovery selected, transition out of setback begins a EQUIPMENT ON INDICATORS fixed time period before selected recovery time and gradually When cooling equipment is on,a COOL icon preceded by a small adjusts room temperature so desired temperature will be achieved triangle is displayed below cool set point. While cooling equip- at selected recovery time. The fixed time period is 1.5 hr. It ment turn on is delayed by a staging or cycle timer, triangle will operates in both heating and cooling. This only applies to flash. The same is true for HEAT icon and its preceding triangle programmable operation. 11 I I U=1 EI of NI U of >I THERMIDISTAT CONTROL CONFIGURATION RECORD M 91 � Date Ui Owner/Operator Thermidistat Model No. A) Hardware Configuration B) Mode Settings Switch A AC/HP Select.(OFF=AC) Hold(On or Off) Switch B_1 or 2-Speed Compressor.(OFF= 1-Speed) _ Mode(Off,Heat,Cool,Auto,Eheat) Switch C_Smart Recovery.(OFF=Enable) _ Heating Set Point Value Switch D_Installer Test.(OFF=Disable) Cooling Set Point Value _ Fan(Auto or On) C) Configuration Options 1 Anticipator(1-9:factory default=3) 2 Clean Filter Timer(Off or 1-9:factory default=2) 3 Fahrenheit or Celsius(F or C:factory default=F) 4 Fan On with W(Off or On:factory default=Off) 5 Variable Speed ICM Motor(Off or On:factory default=Off) 6 Cooling Lockout Below 55°F(Off or On:factory default=Off) 7 Variable Speed Superdehumidify(Off or On:factory default=Off,or Not Available) 8 Auxiliary Heat Lockout Setting(Off or 5-55°F:factory default=Off,or Not Available) 9 Intelligent Heat Staging Selection(Off or On:factory default=Off,or Not Available) 10 Dual Fuel Equipment Selection(Off or On:factory default=Off,or Not Available) 11 Balance Point Setting(Off or 5-55°F:factory default=Off,or Not Available) 12 Defrost Heat Select(0, 1,2,3:factory default=0,or Not Available) 13 Room Temperature Offset(-5 to+5:factory default=0) 14 Heat/Cool Dead Band(0 to 6:factory default=2) 15 Enable Auto Mode(On or Off:factory default=On) 16 Enable Super Comfort Heat Mode(Off or On:factory default is Off,or not Available) 17 Enable Non-Programmable Operation(nP or P:factory default is P for programmable) D) Schedule WAKE DAY EVE SLEEP I TIME HEAT COOL TIME HEAT COOL TIME HEAT COOL TIME HEAT COOL I Mon I Tue Wed _ Thu I Fri Sat Sun I E) Humidity Settings Heat Mode Cool Mode selection Set Point% Display Selection Set Pnint/ Display Normal Humidify (hu) Normal Dehumidify (d hu) Fan Humidify (hu, Fan) Cool to Dehumidify (d hu,COOL) I Auto Humidify (hu,AUTO) Dehumidify Off no set point (d hu,OF) Auto and Fan Humidify (hu,AUTO, Fan) Humidify Off no set point (hu, OF) I E) Vacation Humidity Settings Heat Mode Cool Mode Selection Sat Point°/ Display Selection Sat Po nt lav Normal Humidify (hu,OUT) Normal Dehumidify (d hu, OUT) Auto Humidify (hu,OUT,AUTO) Cool to Dehumidify (d hu,OUT,COOL) Auto and Fan Humidify (hu, OUT,AUTO, Fan) Dehumidify Off no set point (d hu, OUT,OF) Humidify Off no set point (hu,OUT, OF) I A99015 Copyright 1999 CARRIER Corp.•7310 W.Morris St.•Indianapolis,IN 46231 tstt23si Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue,or change at any time,specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Bookj 1 1 4 PC 101 Catalog No. 03TS-TA17 Printed in U.S.A. Form TSTAT-23SI Pg 12 8-99 Replaces: TSTAT-19SI abmise. mise. Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 to (904)260-4302 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 BALANCING BUREAU Certified Test, Adjust, and Balance Report Date: June 29, 2005 Project: Atlantic Beach City Hall Location: Atlantic Beach, FL Architect: PQH Architects, Inc. Engineer: Estrella Engineering, Inc. HVAC Contractor: Certified Air Contractors NEBB TAB Contractor: Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. Project No: CA05-005 Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 6* ® (904)260-4302 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 BALANCING BUREAU Certification Project: Atlantic Beach City Hall Location: Atlantic Beach, FL Scope: The data presented in this report is an exact record of system performance and was obtained in accordance with NEBB standard procedures. Any variances from design quantities which exceed specified tolerances are noted throughout this report. Air Balance: The air distribution systems have been tested and balanced and final adjustments made in accordance with NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing -- Adjusting-Balancing of Environmental Systems" and the project specifications. NEBB Contractor: Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. Reg.No. 2734 Air TAB Supervisor: Curtis Wm. Smart S�gms BO S itted and Certi ed By: 5� �o� (' z1 )-J ,, TAB Supervisor Curtis Wm. Smart Date y CURTIS W. SMART Thermal Systems Balancing,Inc. Y CERTIFICATE h� Reg.No. 2734 2 7 3 4 Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 ® (904)260-4302 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 BALANCING BUREAU TAB Summary Project: Atlantic Beach City Hall Location: Atlantic Beach,FL Scope: This project consists of additions and alterations to the existing City Hall. These alterations included an addition of new Offices and a Conference Room. The addtions to the HVAC System included the installation of(3)new Direct Expansion Heat Pumps. The Heat Pumps are constant volume fans with direct drive motors. Procedure: The total CFM's for each HP were determined by outlet summation, with each outlet being read using a direct CFM readout Flow Hood. The fan RPM's were adjusted using the speed taps on the motor. Once the fan speed was set, the outlets were balanced using the installed spin-in dampers. The thermostat was set to full cooling, and the entering and leaving temperatures were recorded. The electric heat was then energized and the amperage draw was recorded. a Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Air Apparatus Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 Test Report *10 5 (904)260-4302 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 BALANCING BUREAU Project: Atlantic Beach City Hall -Atlantic Beach FL Project No.: CA05-005 Test Date: 6/29/05 System/Unit: AHU-7 Area/Floor: Office 105 Unit Data Motor Data Make Carrier Make G.E. Model No. FV4BNF003 _ Frame — Type/Size SWDI H.P. 1/2 Serial Number 0906A75913 RPM 3-Speed Arr./Class Draw Through Volts 240 Discharge Up Phase/Hz. 1/60 Make Sheave Direct Drive F.L. Amps 4.3 Sheave Diam/Bore Direct Drive S.F. — Make Belts Direct Drive Make Sheave Direct Drive No. Belts/size Direct Drive Sheave O.D. Direct Drive Filters type Pleated Sheave Bore Direct Drive No. Filters/size 1/20x22x2 Operating Diameter Direct Drive 2nd set filters — Sheave Center Distance Direct Drive00W Test Data _ Design I Actual Test Data Design Actual Total CFM 1,200 1,201 External Discharge S.P. 0.41 External Suction S.P. -0.18 Fan RPM High External S.P. _ 0.53 0.59 Motor Volts 240 207 Fan Discharge S.P. 0.41 Fan Suction S.P. -0.9 Motor Amps T-1 4.30 2.9 Fan Total S.P. 1.31 Motor Amps T-2 Motor Amps T-3 _ Reheat Coil Diff. S.P. Cooling Coil Diff. S.P. Preheat Coil Diff. S.P. _ C.F.L.A. 4.99 Filters Diff. S.P. _ B.H.P. 0.29 Vortex Damp. Pos. Outside Air CFM 105 108 Out.Air Damp. Pos. Return Air CFM 1,095 1,093 Ret.Air Damp. Pos. _ Remarks: Printed: 8/2/2005 TAB 4-83 Readings by: C.W. Smart Page 4 of 11 Pages CA05-005 Air Apparatus Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Air Apparatus Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 Test Report *t6e (904)260-4302 AOW NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 BALANCING BUREAU Project: Atlantic Beach City Hall -Atlantic Beach, FL Project No.: CA05-005 Test Date: 6/29/05 System/Unit: AHU-8 Area/Floor: Office 108 Unit Data Motor Data Make Carrier Make G.E. Model No. FV4_BW006 Frame — Type/Size SWDI H.P. 3/4 Serial Number 0905A74801 _ RPM 3-Speed Arr./Class Draw Through Volts _ 240 Discharge Up Phase/Hz. 1/60 Make Sheave Direct Drive _ F.L. Amps 6.8 Sheave Diam/Bore Direct Drive S.F. — Make Belts Direct Drive Make Sheave Direct Drive No. Belts/size Direct Drive Sheave O.D. Direct Drive Filters type Pleated Sheave Bore Direct Drive No. Filters/size 1/22x24x2 Operating Diameter Direct Drive 2nd set filters — Sheave Center Distance Direct Drive Test Data Design Actual Test Data Design Actual 1� Total CFM 1,600 1,664 External Discharge S.P. 0.42 External Suction S.P. -0.29 Fan RPM High External S.P. 0.61 0.71 Motor Volts 240 207 Fan Discharge S.P. 0.42 Fan Suction S.P. -0.86 Motor Amps T-1 6.80 3.8 Fan Total S.P. 1.28 Motor Amps T-2 Motor Amps T-3 Reheat Coil Diff. S.P. Cooling Coil Diff. S.P. Preheat Coil Diff. S.P. C.F.L.A. 7.88 Filters Diff. S.P. B.H.P. 0.36 Vortex Damp. Pos. Outside Air CFM 110 113 Out. Air Damp. Pos. Return Air CFM 1,490 1,551 Ret.Air Damp. Pos. Remarks: Printed: 8/2/2005 TAB 4-83 Readings by: C.W. Smart Page 5 of 11 Pages CA05-005 Air Apparatus Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Air Apparatus Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 Test Report *IiD (904)260-4302 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 BALANCING BUREAU Project: Atlantic Beach City Hall -Atlantic Beach FL Project No.: CA05-005 Test Date: 6/29/05 System/Unit: AHU-9 Area/Floor: Conference 112 Unit Data Motor Data Make Carrier _ _ Make G.E. Model No. FK4DNF001 Frame Type/Size SWDI - --- _— - H.P. 1/2 Serial Number 0605A84770 _ RPM 3-Speed Arr./Class Draw Through _ Volts 240 Discharge Up _ _ Phase/Hz. 1/60 Make Sheave Direct Drive F.L. Amps 4.3 Sheave Diam/Bore Direct Drive _ _ S.F. — _ Make Belts Direct Drive _ Make Sheave Direct Drive No. Belts/size DirectDrive __ Sheave O.D. Direct Drive Filters type Pleated Sheave Bore Direct Drive No. Filters/size 1/18x22x2 Operating Diameter Direct Drive 2nd set filters — Sheave Center Distance Direct Drive � . D. Design Actual Test DataTotal CFM 600 626 External Discharge S.P. 0.32 External Suction S.P. -0.22 Fan RPM Low External S.P. 0.54 Motor Volts 240 207 Fan Discharge S.P. 0.32 Fan Suction S.P. -0.47 Motor Amps T-1 4.30 0.9 Fan Total S.P. _ 0.79 Motor Amps T-2 Motor Amps T-3 Reheat Coil Diff. S.P. Cooling Coil Diff. S.P. Preheat Coil Diff. S.P. C.F.L.A. 4.99 Filters Diff. S.P. B.H.P. _ _ 0.09 Vortex Damp. Pos. Outside Air CFM 160 164 Out. Air Damp. Pos. Return Air CFM 440 462 Ret. Air Damp. Pos. Remarks: Printed: 8/2/2005 TAB 4-83 Readings by: C.W. Smart Page 6 of 11 Pages CA05-005 Air Apparatus Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Apparatus Coil Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 Test Report ® (904)260-4302 Direct Expansion NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 Air to Air BALANCING BUREAU Project: Atlantic Beach City Hall -Atlantic Beach, FL Project No.: CA05-005 Test Date: 6/29/05 Coil Data JCoil No. HP-7 JCoil No. HP-8 JCoil No. HP-9 JCoil No. Indoor Carrier Carrier Carrier Model No. FV4BNF003 FV4BN006 FK4DNF001 Coil Type Fin Tube Fin Tube Fin Tube No. Rows 3 3 -- Fins/In. 14.5 14.5 -- Face Area Sq.Ft. 13.46 7.42 -- Outdoor HP-7 HP-8 HP-9 Model No. 38YDBO36310 38YDBO48310 38BYCO24360 _ Serial No. 4804E21908 4804E27840 3504E01652 Comp. Model/# - - _ZR22K4-PV-1 _ Refrigerant R-41 OA R-41 OA R-22 _ Lbs. 10 13.9 6.25 Test Data Design Actual I Design Actual Design . Actual Design Actual, Indoor Unit Air Qty.,CFM 1,200 1,201 1,600 1,664 600 626 Air Vel.,FPM 347 347 216 224 Press.Drop, In.Wg. Ent. Air DB 79.0 72.0 78.4 72.0 81.9 70.0 Lvg. Air DB. 57.1 57.8 53.6 DB Air Temp.Diff. 14.9 _ 14.2 16.4 Ent. Air WB 65.8 65.6 65.9 65.6 68.3 65.6 Lvg. Air WB 56.3 56.3 53.0 _ WB Air Temp.Diff. 9.3 9.3 12.6--,-- Total 2.6 _Total Heat MBH 35.0 35.1 47.8 48.6 24.5 23.9 %OSA=RA-MA/RA-OA _ OSA CFM=%OSAxFan CFM 1051 108 110 164 1101 113 Outdoor Unit Voltage 208 205 208__ 208 205 Comp.RLA 14.1 11.9 22.3 16.1 12 7.1 Ent. Air DB (Ambient) 95.0 78.3 78.3 78.3 95.9 96.2 89.9 Condenser Temp. --- Suction Temp. Remarks: Printed: 8/5/2005 TAB 5-83A Readings by: C.W. Smart Page 7 of 11 Pages CA05-005 Apparatus Coil DE Air-Air Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Electric Coil/Duct Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 Heater Test Report ® 5 (904)260-4302 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 BALANCING BUREAU Project: Atlantic Beach City Hall -Atlantic Beach FL Project No.: CA05-005 Test Date: 6/29/05 Description Rated Data Test Data AHU-7 Carrier 10.0 1 230/1 36.2 77 33.9 AHU-8 Carrier 9.0 1 230/1 32.8 207 31.5 AHU-9 Carrier 5.0 1 230/1 26.0 207 18.8 Remarks: Printed: 8/2/2005 EDH 12-98 Readings by: C.W. Smart Page 8 of 11 Pages CA05-005 Electric Duct Heater Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Duct Traverse *1 Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 Summary Sheet iD (904)260-4302 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 BALANCING BUREAU Project: Atlantic Beach City Hall -Atlantic Beach FL Project No.: CA05-005 Test Date: 6/29/05 Area Sq. Design Test I Final Test System Duct Size AHU-7 Supply 12x17 1.42 845 1200 765 1086 846 1201 _ Return — — — 1095 — 979 — 1093 `* AHU-8 Supply 26x10 1.8 889 1600 812 1462 924 1663 Return — — — 1490 — 1349 — 1551 *" AHU-9 _ _- Supply 26x10 1.8 _889 1600 812 1462 924 1663 Return — — — 1490 — 1349 — 1551 Common OSA 12x12 1 — 375 420 **' 385 -0.04 Remarks: "CFM determined by outlet summation. "*Common Return Plenum. 'Read Inlet Louver with Flow Hood. Printed: 8/2/2005 TAB 3-96 Readings by: C.W. Smart Page 9 of 11 Pages CA05-005 Duct Traverse Summary Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Air Outlet Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 Test Report *too (904)260-4302 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 BALANCING BUREAU Project: Atlantic Beach City Hall -Atlantic Beach, FL Project No.: CA05-005 Test Date: 6/29/05 System: AHU's Test Apparatus: Flow-Hood OutletArea I I Design Preliminary Final Served 1No.1 Type I size I Vell. CFM Vell. CFM Vell. I CFM of Design AHU-7 101 1 CD 24x24 245 226 _ 234 96% 102 2 CD 24x24 255 243 265104% 103 3 CD 24x24 175 121 158 90% 104 4 CD 24x24 225 266 235 104% 105 5 CD 24x24 300 231 _ 309 103% 1200 1087 1201 100% AHU-8 106 1 CD 24x24 290 291 300 103% 106 2 CD 24x24 180 153 _ 196 109% 106 3 CD 24x24 325 248 ------ 337 104% 106 4 CD 24x24 315 300 323 103% 106 5 CD 24x24 235 245 243 103% 106 6 CD 24x24 255 225 265 104% 1600 1462 1664 104% AHU-9 111 1 CD 24x24 80 133 83 104% 112 2 CD 24x24 125 130 120 96% 112 3 CD 24x24 125 115 136 109% 111 4 CD 24x24 70 103 68 97% 113 5 CD 24x24 130 _ 128 143 110% 114 6 CD 24x24 70 124 76 109% 600 733 626 104% Remarks: Printed: 8/2/2005 AO 98-02 Readings by: C.W. Smart Page 10 of 11 Pages CA05-005 Air Outlet Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 11631 Ayala Road Jacksonville, Florida 32258-1607 6* to (904)260-4302 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL Fax(904)262- 7390 BALANCING BUREAU Instrument Calibration Instrument Application Serial# Calibration Shortridge 860 Air Data Direct CFM Differential Multimeter/ Pressure M00500 6/28/2005 Micromanometer Shortridge HDM 300 Water Pressure/ W02021 11/3/2004 Hydrodata Multimeter Differential Readings Monarch Pocket-Tech RPM Readings 1372246 1/15/2005 Commercial Electric Amperage/Voltage Digital Clamp Meter 2604302 6/22/2005 HDSA 500 Readings Vel-grid Anemometer LCA Air Velocity Readings M96779 11/30/2004 6000 Fluke 52 Temperature 5820338 11/3/2004 Davis Air Velocity Meter Air Velocity Readings A34490 11/3/2004 STATEMENT OF WARRANTY ATLANTIC BEACH CITY HALL ADDN & ALT Certified Air Contractors, Inc. warranties parts and labor on this project for a period of one (1) year from date of substantial completion. The labor warranty only applies to parts and components condemned by Certified Air Contractors, and will not cover labor for parts and components that are condemned or removed by others. All parts covered under the manufacturers warranty must be ordered through Certified Air Contractors to insure the proper warranty documents are completed. This warranty covers defects in installation or manufacture only, and does not cover abuse, neglect, lack of routine preventative maintenance, or acts of God. All warranty work will be performed during normal working hours of 8:00-4:30 Monday-Friday only. Should service be needed please contact our office: Certified Air Contractors, Inc. 4505 Marquette Avenue Jacksonville, Florida 32210 Phone: 904/389-7950. '41 `NOUXINISNOD R�Q2I0� 'T7 5002 6 d3S ' C C CC knz •. � 'C� � �� W.'1i V'� � IX � �C o d r ui -0 law � �.5 0 z a ' c io �U H k CL 4n °.� o z z LU �30 -jCL ' cc IN Ka~c a OO .400 a a a O fn FA 00 Ol- CC 02 UF 4c z cy. O W m ppMCI"K O 'ren e t 03 A Z C � J � �Z Lm Lu W z� mot �� . cn •�+ w �O � a4"aL'lilr ®Ori d � GSW �3$s � � tit � � - V -1V -fix S'Gi�r"'fi1'rt C�Gh.GtX^c 1••iocaror�►,rac un..r.- .�..... .-. _ Z,d 9Z6b688tr06 aiv Pel IJ90 dL6:t0 90 6Z deS Sep 29 05 04:12p Certified Air 9043 594925 ,. •��• � '..vr.aun �rnmc.rr,.�ra7o f u 7JtstiW7L'� p.3 o qy� cu 4 o � � o A m m d 4 �`ttt C s I I � P CL t 8 m 7 Q E �j °f a e, ` '6 v o O0 MJ 79 i CD � � H m m E E H 1L� J w .z lL. 01 4. a O !L ® A1oQ � Lu 0 C RECEI ** TOTAL PAGE.J3 * SEP 2 9 2005 C.C.BORDEN CONSTRUCTION, INN". Meadows Electric, Inc. 2730 Clydo Road Jacksonville, FI. 32207 (904) 367-0676 Atlantic Beach CHall low Operation & Maintenance Manual Electrical & Datacom Products 2365 DENNIS ST. JACKSONVILLE. FL 32204 6-L os (904) 356-9000 S�Q 0 BOLO SW CO DEEPCEL plus DPA2G18LP332 Pae 1 of 2 2'x4' RECESSED FLUORESCENT, 3" DEEP, 18 CELL PAR O IT8 OR ER 9 STATIC OR AIR SUPPLY/RETURN, 3 A 12 FEATURES • 5"deep body. • Individual lamp compartments. • 77.6%efficient. • Clean contoured interior. • Eyeleted heat removal vents in fixture ends. • One-piece housing has ribbed construction for added strength. Ir.. • Black exterior for cooler ballast operating temperature. • Hemmed over side rails for safe handling. • Fixture ends turned-in for safe handling. • Built-in earthquake clips(patent no.5,072,344). • Pre-anodized aluminum parabolic louver. • Vertical grain louver eliminates reflected lamp images on cross baffle. eS ' -loaded rooster head latches. Pr m 9 • 18 gauge steel hinges. • Louver frame with integral positive light stop. • Louver has protective film dust guard. MOUNTING METHODS DIMENSIONS © exposed T-grid ceiling © exposed slot T-grid telling. O Q 0 5' (127mm) 2-11/1fi' 1/4'mta—x. _ 24'1610mm) -- —� Air supply slots 1-1/2'max. 1-1/6'max. 6'(152mm1 w x 2-1/2'access plate (DPA only) I,;;z 15116' 24' 9/16' ' 24' v _� or 1 I _ Q concealed Z-spline Ceiling. direct concealed two directional© T-grid calling.(see options for 3-1/2 - splay trim) (89m — 1/4'max. 1-1/9'min. 1-716'maz. x 774793112- (997mmi ML 24-11/16' 24' 3/6' 11216mm). Type• A © plaster ceilinglflanged, drywall kit.(See options) Type"G" Support .lob Name: ATLANTIC BEACH CITY HALL Fixture (by others) Cat.No.:DPS2G18LP33212050-735F4 Drywall Kit Plaster Opening (See Options) Lamp(.): 24-118' Drywall 1-1/8'min. (b ethers) Volts/Ballast: ' Ceiling Openng 1— — 1 15/16' 13116' 24-5116'x48'-5116' 24-11116' Lightolier a Genlyte Thomas Company www.lightalier.com Technical Information:(978)657-7500•Fax(978)658-0595 631 Airport Road,Fall River,MA 02720•(508)679-8131 •Fax(508)674-4710 _ We reserve the right to change details of design,materials and finish. ©2002 Genlyte Thomas Group LLC(Lightolier Division)SECTION 2JFolio G51-44 j A0902 1 DEEPCEL plus DPA2G18LP332 Page 2 of 2 2'x4' RECESSED FLUORESCENT, 3" DEEP, 18 CELL PARABOLIC LOUVER STATIC OR AIR SUPPLY/RETURN, 3 LAMP T8 OR T12 Luminaire Efficacy Rating PHOTOMETRY MODEL NO.OPA2GISLP332 LER-68.6 Watts-85.9 BF-0.89 coefficients of utilization-zonal cavity method 20 20 RF 20 50 30 ' RC 80 � boulder `"""mu RW 70 50 30 50 30 10 50 30 10 1 86 84 81 79 77 75 76 74 73 ,manxuo: uuca,:au.i.ixc.uo°www.•wn.ea.un.c°wmu..«o.,9rlon"..,"+ 0 2 BD 75 70 71 67 64 68 65 63 AePOAT memos:aLal563 DASE: 1]/31199 itl 3 74 67 61 63 59 56 61 58 55 PAElAAED rtl0.:LIGMCLlC1 D q 68 60 54 57 52 48 55 51 48 cnrAmc xlreaa:DeA1a16Lr331uoo3 63 54 48 51 46 42 50 45 42 LUmxA2A9:rAmI:CATED xe:fu,MOVsIW:XITx'i0t)Te lA2Nr®INt[x30x PINISx. 47 41 37 45 41 37 PAaP2CATr0 51xITa PAIMTtx xCfw aALl.9aT e°VC99.PASaICATaD N 5 sail-sescuLAe ertTw rA9AaaLn:Ie-caL tarvea. 0 6 58 49 42 42 37 33 41 37 33 ].Axes:Txpac 32-xsrr T-6 P))Tasels Ll"m rw est .` E 7 54 44 38 eALw9i:In»wLA a-ep-Ya-uL-l10 0 8 50 40 34 39 33 30 38 33 29 rtuslclma euncmD ImcwaT PAcrox-6e.n, 35 30 27 exxx:sx0:eac&9sW g 47 37 31 36 30 27 DTw naPLa_CZ or e9nrry 91.e 6 TNa 5 M.A.a .39 PARA ..=T"W Is. 1D 44 34 28 33 28 24 32 28 2 TOTAL SpM..w.- 99.9 AT 110.°VDrT6 L1aaD%m cA)m9l.A -Va..9.11 visual comfort probability VCP ovate a 1001c;reflectances 80/50/20 MORT is 9Asw w 265c L'.amm m LAxr• ceiling height cArmt:LA DI3TAIG-1a, aux ,�-� room size ceiling height 0.6 23.3 69.0 61.5 90.0 L 8M§2 5 100 13.0 16.0 8.5 10.0 13.0..16.0 0 1670 a6]: 3910 1630 •610 w84 eo 77 77 s :w u39 aul 1116 3c1a uo ''!�. -'�,�1 20 20 67 76 is.11.1 x679 2s11 161! �cc9' -Ila ��•- 20 30 66 65 86 83 79 75 1s ]ua1 13x0 ]911 I< r66 1115 86 85 82 77 )5 1Ul] 2363 3656 1611 ]ale 1539 ID 40 71 66 6sae3 3x30 1112 2196 tan s59 60 74 70 86 85 85 80 55 .]aI l 66 11]6 163 691 995 as 12. 6sa. 39e 1w els In i 20 70 75 87 82 77 76 a 15 16 23 39 17 3e "• 30 20 89 a5 79 73 30 30 69 65 s6 0 0 0 0 0 ._ 89 86 82 76 aoxw Luxe:cuwmAx / 30 40 73 66 89 86 B4 79 z0xe L:nrls trAxo nu^. "� ' 30 60 76 70 '' "� /. 89 86 85 79 use u.1 3x.s 30 80 79 73 m 369a 61.1 ss.s 9-ea e1a0 :1.0 9].9 ,?` 40 20 5 74 77 m 87 82 80 76 0-90 6665 ) 1 300.0 83 80 73 67 fA 89 85 81 74 30 CT s6-lou a u 40 -70-110 6665 2 loo.0 40 40 d 85 82 77 69 v 89 86 B4 76 :•arw L.allxATaE rrric3sxcv- %%%6 _-- � I ' 40 60 86 83 79 72 y 89 86 86 79 CTE TYYI'-DlP3I:9` 3 i \\,--� 40 B0 _ 86 83 81 74 � 89 B6 86 79 a-Ixa: so--De0 c 86 83 81 74 89 86 86 79 qp avi`ix0 cxirirtl", ,.] l.a \. 100 ssIEL°ler;AY{ibx6' Is f6 -'' 60 30 83 80 73 71 B9 BS 83 75 i•x0i16 Lwcrtx %i1•s ii.uo -�, » 60 40 - 85 81 78 72 89 86 85 78 l;Mr31MtE DArA Lu cAxw.ArsO x --- 60 60 86 84 80 74 89 87 87 80 AeE+Lz Avnuc9 A'rasA°a A`m�Ass "`".-'- 60 80 86 84 82 77 89 87 87 80 M:_ . Lx DrD a-Ixx a9-Ds0 so-uc 89 87 87 80 a5 ooze. suY. aeca. 60 100 86 84 82 77 -89 86 85 78 95 3669. 3669. 1990. CMv9M --- 65 3011. T5 Ise. us. loo. A9°9.m-(l.7Aa,.. 100 40 85 81 78 72 89 87 87 80 100 60 86 84 80 75 .,.K.«..6•".°""°'°^"�•""°"'""°"'"'O""'°•""'°'"""`'` 100 80 66 84 82 77 89 87 87 80 �`.6.a•"�"°�� }"+ 100 100 86 84 82 77 89 87 87 81 ORDERING INFORMATION Explanation of Catalog Number. Example:DPA2G18LP33212003RF DP S 2 4 18 � P � 32 120 SO 74 CEILING TYPE: LOUVER LAMP VOLTAGE: OPTIONS: BODY STYLE: GriFINISH': QUANTITY 120 or 277 Add appropriate _ A.Air Supply G=Grid L-Low suffix to catalog S.Static Ilay-in T bar) Iridescence no,is:(RF) F=Fllanged LAMP TYPE/ DEEPCEL PLUS FIXTURE overlap) NUMBER OF Semi-specular DUAL"V" MPTYFIXTURE BALLAST TYPE 3"PARABOLIC: WIDTH spline and CELLS: (standard) REFLECTORS LENGTH: 1 g 2 Lamp Map.T12 LE Pre-anodized piaster frame 18=3 rows P.Low 32=TB aluminum louver T=Slot Arid or of 6 Iridescence 34=T12 <20THD <H1* two-directional 24=3 rows Specular (Nominal 48) 1 8 2 Lamp Eiec.T8 SO' HI" concealed T of 8 W=Whhe Baked 1-3 Lamp Elec.TB 03' H3' (see options) Enamel LOL T8 Dimming PS G=Champagne 'Instant Start Standard - Gold (18 cell only) Other dimming options.consult factory. OPTIONS&ACCESSORIES ML PLASTER FRAME:Catalog Number:PF24. CONTINUOUS ROW INSTALLATION:For F type fixtures,half-width flanges SPECIFICATIONS(continued) are required between fixtures.Order Catalog Number:S2FCTRIM(each joint). MATERIALS:Chassis parts are die-formed code gauge cold rolled steel. SPLAY TRIM:For T ceiling type only.SUFFIX:CTZ24 S2 SPLAY TRIM. Housing is ribbed for rigidity with side rails hemmed over and housing ends RADIO INTERFERENCE FILTER:120 or 277 volt,50 or 60 Hz.One per fixture turned-in for safe handling.Louver is pre-anodized aluminum(Coilzak®or standard.SUFFIX:RF. equal). ELECTRICAL/VyIRING OPTIONS:Consult factory. FINISH:Chassis exterior-black baked polyester enamel.Cavity-white AIR CLOSURE STRIP:SUFFIX:ACS4(factory installed) baked polyester enamel minimum 86%reflectance.Phosphate undercoating. DRYWALL KIT Order Catalog Number:FK=4.Request Folio OA30-10. Louver-low iridescence semi-specular anodized vertical grain aluminum CHICAGO PLENUM:SUFFIX:CP. reflector sheet is standard. ELECTRICAL Thermally protected class"P"ballast C.B.M.approved,non PCB. - SPECIFICATIONS If K.O.is within 3"of ballast,use wire suitable for at least 90D. PERFORMANCE:In an installation of 3 lamp 32W luminaires in a room cavity LABELS:I.B.E.W.UL and ULc Listed. - ratio of 1,with reflectance of 80%ceiling,50%wall,20%floor, Tvpet A the C.U.shall not be less than.83.To prevent glare the VCP shall not be less ' than 73 either lengthwise or crosswise(at 100fc level)and the average bright- Li htolier a Genlyte Thomas Company www,lightolier.com ' ness at 65°shall not exceed 1869 candelas per square meter.To control veiling Technical Information:(978)657-7600•Fax(978)658-0595 reflections,luminaire output in the 30°-90°zone shall not be less than 68.B%. 631 Airport Road,Fall River,MA 02720•(508)679-8131 a Fax(508)674.4710 _ AIR HANDLING(DPA only)side air passages for air supply or air return. We reserve the right to change details of design,materials and finish. Supply air is discharged vertically.Optional side closure strips.Air return is also ©2002 Genlyte Thomas Group LLC(Lightolier Division) provided through the lamp compartment through fixture body ends. A0902 SECTION 2/Folio G51-44 Calculite' Compact Fluorescent Open Downlighting 8021 Page 1 of 2 6" Aperture Triple Tube Vertical Lamp 5 2 1 4 6 i 10" (254mm) 26W 93/8, (238 mm) 4 518" O (117mm) 32W 12 314" 51 m I 0 (324mm) f251 mm) T Q � (76 mm) O 0 o 0 L � �— 6"(152 mm)Dia.---� 1 118"(29 mm)max 1"(25 mm)min I� Flush Overlap_---I 3 Gaiting Thickness 21/8'(54 mm)max. 61/2"(165 mm) 7 1/4'(184 mm) Ceiling Cutout:6 9/16"(167 mm)Dia Reflector Trim Frame-In Kit Lam 8021 CCLW Comfort Clear'"',White Flange S6132BU Electronic 120V-277V 26 or 32W Triple Tube 8021 CCLP Comfort Clear'",Polished Flange S6132BCU Universal Dimming 120V-277V 4-Pin(Amalgam) 8021 CCL Comfort Cleaff,Molded Trim Ring 56132BJUM7 Advance Mar1k7 120V-277V 8021 Add suffix.See options for other finishes. RemOdeler Frame-In Kit Lam 6132BURM Electronic 120V-277V 26 or 32W Triple Tube 4-Pin(Amalgam) Features Options and Accessories(continued) 1. Reflector:16 ga.Alzak aluminum,50°visual cutoff to lamp and lamp Emergency Ltg.Kit FA EM3E' image,medium distribution.Comfort ClearT""low iridescence finish. FA EM4 Self-flanged or flangeless with molded white trim ring(field paintable). Fuse(Slow Blow) Add suffix F 2. Socket Cup: Effectively dissipates heat and positions lamp holder. Existing/Thk.Ceiling FA EC6- _ Snaps onto reflector neck to assure consistently correct optical alignment Emergency Add suffix EM* without tools. Chicago Plenum Use 6132BULC 3. Mounting Frame: Galvanized steel for dry or plaster ceilings.Accepts 'See Spec.Sheets:FAEM,FAEC other 6"Triple Tube reflectors(see S6132BU Spec Sheet). Mounting Bars&Accessories;see Specification Sheet MBA. 4. Retaining Springs: Precision-tooled steel friction springs secure reflector Sloped Ceiling Adapters;see Specification Sheet SCA. to mounting frame for quick,tool-less installation. IC Frame available;see C6CFL32 Specification Sheet. _ 5. Mounting Brackets: 16 ga.steel.Adjust from inside of fixture.Use 3/4"or 1 1/2"lathing channel,1/2"EMT,or optional mounting bars. Labels 6. Ballast/)-Box: Electronic 120V-277V.UL listed for through branch circuit UL Listed for damp locations. ML wiring with max of(8)No.12 AWG.90°c supply conductors.Outboard mounted to reduce heat transfer and maintain lamp efficacy and life.Service Alzak"is a registered trademark of ALCOA. ' from below without tools. US Patent Pending. ElectricalType; B Note:For ballast electrical data and latest lamp/ballast compatibility refer to . . nMOM "Ballast"specification sheet for complete electrical data. Job Name:ATLANTIC BEACH CITY HALL S6132BU,S6132BCU:UL listed for through branch circuit wiring with max of(8)No.12 AWG,90°C supply conductors. cat.No-: S6132BU/8021 CCLW 6132BURM:UL listed for No.12 AWG,90°C supply conductors. _ Options and Accessories Lamp(s): , Comfort Clear"Finishes' Other Finishes Notes: _ Diffuse CCD White WH Champagne Bronze CCZ - Pewter CPW 'Specify desired flange.W White,P Polished,Blank-Molded Ring Lightolier a Genlyte Thomas Company www.lightolier.com Other Dimming: _ S6132BJlMX Advance MarkX,120V S6132BJ1LD3 Lutron Hi-lume-,120V 631 Airport Road,Fall River,MA 02720-(508)679-8131 -Fax(508)674-4710 56132BJ2MX Advance MarkX,227V S6132BJ2LD3 Lutron Hi-lume" 227V We reserve the right to change details of design,materials and finish. 0 2002 Genlyte Thomas Group LLC(Lightolier Division)- D0204 Calculite° Compact Fluorescent Open Downlighting 8021 Page 2 of 2 6" Aperture Triple Tube Vertical Lamp 26W 32W Quick Calculator Quick Calculator ROOM SURFACE REFLECTANCES: 80 ROOM SURFACE REFLECTANCES: 60 80%Ceiling;50%Wall,20%Floor 80%Ceiling;50%Wall;20%Floor 1800 Lumens Per Lamp 70 2400 Lumens Per Lamp U) 50 RCR=1 IRm.width=10 z Mtg.Ht.above work plane) 0p RCR=1 (Rm.width=10 x Mtg.Ht.above RCR=5 IRm.width=2 x Mtg.Ht.above u o RCR=5 IRm.width=2 x Mtg.Ht.above work plane) c RCR a 10 IRm.width=Mtg.Ht.above work 2 40 RCR=101Rm.width=Mtg.Ht.above work plane) z 50 F- 40 c 30 LL S 30 � a 20 z 20 z t0 t0 40 60 BO 100 120 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 01 20 AREA PER FIXTURE IN SQUARE FEET AREA PER FIXTURE IN`SQUARE FEET 3 4 11 11 9 10 11 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 � L L 1 r . . T � CENTER TO CENTER DISTANCE OF FIXTURES IN FEET CENTER TO CENTER DISTANCE OF FIXTURES IN FEET This quick calculator chart determines the number and spacing of 1 It:26W TTT units This quick calculator chart determines the number and spacing of 1 It.-32W TTT un with Comfort Clearlm reflector,for any level of illumination. with Comfort Clearn'reflector,for any level of illumination Spacing Ratio =1.0 Spacing Ratio = 1.1 REPORT N0:LSI 14025 REPORT PREPARED FOR:LIGHTOUER 04-27-1999 LIGHTOUER RECESSED FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE, LAMPSREPORT N0: -32 499-9G ZONAL SUMMARY WITH COMFORT CLEAflT"REFLECTOR DESCRI 16'DIA RECESSED ZONE AVG" ZONAL ONE 26 WATT CPFL GE LAMP, ZONAL SUMMARY WITH CO 6"DIA x 10'HT RECESSED .VERTICAL DEG. C.P. LUMENS CAT#F26TBX/SPX35-835. ANGLE CP LUMENS WITH COMFORT CLEART"flEFLECTOR.VERTICAL 180 0 LUMEN HATING=1800 LMS. 0 775 LAMP 175 0 0 5 806 77 165 0 0 1 10 780 155 0 0 15 708 199 85° 145 0 0 20 646 135 0 0 25 566 258 75° 125 0 0 30 478 105 0 0 35 402 245 65° 95 0 0 40 285 400 90 0 0 45 78 81 85 1 1 50 13 55° 75 1 1 55 4 4 65 3 3 60 2 55 9 B 80 1 2 45° 45 99 77 - 75 1 1 800 35 563 354 ' 80 0 25 904 418 5 0 85 0 0 15 1063 301 - 5 1066 102 90 0 35° 0 1035 ZONAL LUMENS AND PERCENTAGES 1200 ZONAL LUMENS AND PERCENTAGES ZONE LUMENS %LAMP %LUMINAIRE ZONE LUMENS %LAMP %LUMINAIRE T 0 0-30 533 29.66 61.66 0'5' 15° 25° 0-30 821 34.2 64.9 0-40 778 43.25 89.92 «EFFICIENCY=527%`• 0-40 1175 49.0 92.9 0-60 863 47.98 99.75 0-80 1260 52.5 99.6 0-90 865 48.10 100.00 D-90 1265 52.7 100.0 40-90 87 4.85 10.08 DATE:4-27-99 O 40-90 90 3.8 7.1 _. 60-90 2 12 .25 CIETYPE DIRECT EFFICIENCY-48.1%- 90-180 0 ..00 .00 LUMINOUS DIAMETER:6.000 6D-90 5 0.2 0.4 DATE:4.23-99 0-180 865 48.10 100.00 THIS REPORT BASED ON LM-1 AND 90-120 0 0.0 0.0 CIE TYPE DIRECT OTHER PERTINENT IES PROCEDURES. 90-150 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 LUMINOUS DIAMETER:6.000 0-1800 1265 52.7 100.0 THIS REPORT BASED ON LM-1 AND Coefficients of Utilization OTHER PERTINENT IES PROCEDURES. ' EFFECTIVE FLOOR CAVITY REFLECTANCE=.20 _ Coefficients of Utilization EFFECTIVE FLOOR CAVITY REFLECTANCE=.20 80 70 50 1 30 10 WALL REFLECTANCE 80 70 1 50 1 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 1 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 WALL REFLECTANCE 1 .59 .58.57 .50.57.56 .56.55.54 .54.53 .53 .52.52.51 .50 50 30 10 50 30 10150 30 10 150 30 10 50 30 10 0 2 .56.54.53 .55.54.52 .54.52.51 .52.51 .50 .51 .50.49 .48 1 .54.53.52 53 .52.51 51.50 .49 49.48 .48 47.47 .46 .46 a 3 .53.51.50 .53.51.49 .51.50.49 .50.49 .48 .49.48.47 .46 2 .50.49.47 50 .48.47 48.47 .46.47.46 .45 45.45 .44 .43 °C 4 .51 .48.47 .50.48.46 .49.47.46 .48.46 .45 .47.46.45 .44 _ a 3 .47.45.44 47 .45.43 46.44 .43 44.43 .42 43.42 .41 .41 5 .48 .46.44 .48.45.44 .47.45.43 .46.44 .43 .45.44.43 .42 .40.42.41 .39 41 .40 .39.38 a 6 .46 .43.42 .46.43.41 .45.43.41 .44.42 .41 .44.42.41 .40 4 .45.42.40 44 .42.40 43.41 , 5 5 .42.39.37 42 .39.37 41.39 .37.40.38 .37 39.38 .36 .36 7 .44.41.39 .43.41.39 .43.41.39 .42.40 .39 .42.40.39 .38 6 .40.37.35 39 .37.35 39.36 .35.38.36 .34 37.36 .34.34 0 8 .41 .39.37 .41.39.37 .41.38.37 .40.38 .37 .40.38.36 .36 g 7 .37.34.33 37 .34.32 36.34 .32.36.34 .32 35.33 .32 .31 ¢ 9 .39 .36.35 .39.36.35 .38.36.35 .38.36 .34 .38.36.34 .34 _ g 8 .35.32.30 34 .32.30 34.32 .30.34.31 .30 33.31 .30 .29 10 .35.32.31 .35.32.311.35.32.30 .34.32 .30 .34.32.30 .30 - 9 .33.30.28 32 .30.28.32.30 .28.32.29 .28 31 .29 .28 .27 Type: B 10 .31 .'28.26 30 .28.26.30.28 .26.30.27 .26 29.27 .26 .25 Lightolier a Genlyte Thomas Company www.lightolier.com _ 631 Airport Road,Fall River,MA 02720•(508)679-8131 •Fax(508)674-4710 We reserve the right to change details of design,materials and finish. ©2004 Genlyte Thomas Group LLC(Lightolier Division)•D0204 Calculite®R Compact Fluorescent Open Downlighting 8021 Page 1 of 2 6" Aperture Triple Tube Vertical Lamp 5 2 1 4 6 i 10' (254mm) 26W 9 3/8' (238 mm) (117mm)12 314" 97/8, 0 (324mm) (251 mm) 3 (76 mm) � 4� jll— a � • Y� 6'(152 mm)Dia.----� 1'25 mm)min Overlap 3 1 1/8"(29 mm)max.] ( Ceiling Thickness 2118'(54 mm)max. I 61/2"1165 mm) 7114"(184 mm) Ceiling Cutout 6 9/16"(167 mm)Dia. Reflector Trim Frame-In Kit Lamp 8021 CCLW Comfort Clear"",White Flange S6132BU Electronic 120V-277V 26 or 32W Triple Tube 8021 CCLP Comfort Clear",Polished Flange S6132BCU Universal Dimming 120V-277V 4-Pin(Amalgam) 8021 CCL Comfort Clear'"",Molded Trim Ring S6132BJUM7 Advance Mark? 120V-277V 8021 Add suffix.See options for other finishes. Remodeler Frame-In Kit Lamp low "{ 6132BURM Electronic 120V-277V 26 or 32W Triple Tube 4-Pin(Amalgam) Features Options and Accessories(continued) 1. Reflector:16 ga.Alzak'aluminum,50'visual cutoff to lamp and lamp Emergency Ltg.Kit FA EM3E' _ image,medium distribution.Comfort Cleaff low iridescence finish. FA EM4' ' Self-flanged or flangeless with molded white trim ring(field paintable). Fuse(Slow Blow) Add suffix F 2. Socket Cup: Effectively dissipates heat and positions lamp holder. Existing/Thk.Ceiling FA EC6' _ Snaps onto reflector neck to assure consistently correct optical alignment Emergency Add suffix EM* without tools. Chicago Plenum Use 6132BULC 3. Mounting Frame: Galvanized steel for dry or plaster ceilings.Accepts 'See Spec.Sheets:FAEM,FAEC other 6"Triple Tube reflectors(see S6132BU Spec Sheet). Mounting Bars&Accessories;see Specification Sheet MBA. 4. Retaining Springs: Precision-tooled steel friction springs secure reflector Sloped Ceiling Adapters;see Specification Sheet SCA. to mounting frame for quick,tool-less installation. IC Frame available;see C6CFL32 Specification Sheet. 5. Mounting Brackets: 16 ga.steel.Adjust from inside of fixture.Use 3/4"or _ 1112"lathing channel,1/2"EMT,or optional mounting bars. Labels 6. Ballast/)-Box: Electronic 120V-277V.UL listed for through branch circuit UL Listed for damp locations. wiring with max of(8)No.12 AWG,90'c supply conductors.Outboard mounted to reduce heat transfer and maintain lamp efficacy and life.Service ' from below without tools. Alzak"is a registered trademark of ALCOA. _ US Patent Pending. Electrical Type: Note:For ballast electrical data and latest lamp/ballast compatibility refer to � BE "Ballast"specification sheet for complete electrical data. Job Name:ATLANTIC BEACH CITY HALL S6132BU,S6132BCU:UL listed for through branch circuit wiring with max of(8)No.12 AWG,90'C supply conductors. cat-No-: S6132BUEM/8021 CCLW 6132BURM:UL listed for No.12 AWG,90•C supply conductors. _ Options and Accessories Lamp(s): 1 Comfort Clear'Finishes' Other Finishes Notes: Diffuse CCD White WH — Champagne Bronze CCZ — Pewter CPW 'Specify desired flange.W White,P Polished,Blank-Molded Ring Other Dimming: Lightolier a Genlyte Thomas Company www.lightolier.com _ S6132BJlMX Advance MarkX,120V S6132BJ1LD3 Lutron Hi-fume',120V 631 Airport Road,Fall River,MA 02720•(508)679-8131 •Fax(508)674-4710 56132BJ2MX Advance MarkX,227V S6132B.12LD3 Lutron Hi-lume',227V We reserve the right to change details of design,materials and finish. ©2002 Genlyte Thomas Group LLC(Lightolier Division)• D0204 lite° Compact Fluorescent Open en Downlighting 8021 p p Page 2 of 2 6" Aperture Triple Tube Vertical Lamp 26W 32W Quick Calculator Quick Calculator ROOM SURFACE REFLECTANCES: 80 ROOM SURFACE REFLECTANCE& 60K 0%Wall;20%Floor 80%Ceiling;50%Wall;20%Floor Per Lamp 70 2400 Lumens Per Lamp w 50- RCR■1 IRm.width=10 x Mi g.Ht.above .width=10 x Mtg.Ht.above work plane) ■+ 60 RCR-5 IRm.width=2 x Mtg.Ht.above v o .width=2 x Mtg.Ht.above work plane) c RCR=10 IRm.width=Mtg.Ht.above work 40 .width=Mtg.Ht.above work plane) Z `50 30 40 30 E 20 i 20 z 10-- 10 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 20 40 60 80 100 120 AREA PER FIXTURE IN SQUARE FEET AREA PER FIXTURE IN'SOUARE FEET 3 4 56 7 B 9 10 11 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 I 1 I I I I I r 1 I I 1 1 I 1 I CENTER TO CENTER DISTANCE OF FIXTURES IN FEET CENTER TO CENTER DISTANCE OF FIXTURES IN FEET This quick calculator chart determines the number and spacing of 1 It,26W TTT units This q?ick calculator chart determines the number and spacing of 1 It:32W Mun with Comfort Clearrm reflector,for any level of illumination. with Camfort Clearlm reflector,for any level of illumination Spacing Ratio =1.0 Spacing Ratio = 1.1 REPORT NO:LS114025 REPORT PREPARED FOR:LIGHTOLIER 04-77-1999 LIGHTOLIER RECESSED FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE, REPORT N0:LRL 499.9G ZONAL SUMMARY WITH COMFORTCLEARTMREFLECTOR LAMPS:I PLT-32 LUMENS:2400 ZONE AVG ZONAL ONE 26 WATT CPFL GE LAMP, ZONAL SUMMARY oescRlP.:c DIA x Io"HT RECESSED OOWNLIGHT DEG, C.P. LUMENS CATI F26TBX/SPX35-835. ANGLE CP LUMENS WITH COMFORT CLEART"REFLECTOR.VERTICAL 180 0 LUMEN RATING=1800 LMS. 0 775 LAMP. 175 0 0 5 806 77 165 0 0 110 780 155 0 0 15 708 199 N65' 145 0 0 20 646 135 0 0 25 566 258 125 0 0 30 478105 0 0 35 402 245 95 0 0 40 285 40090 0 0 45 78 81 85 1 1 50 13 75 1 1 55 4 4 65 3 3 60 2 55 9 8 65 1 70 1 2 45 99 77 _ 75 1 1BOO 35 563 354 ' 80 0 25 904 418 5 0 85 0 0 15 1063 301 90 0 5 1066 102 _ 0 1035 ZONAL LUMENS AND PERCENTAGES 1400ZONAL LUMENS AND PERCENTAGES ZONE LUMENS %LAMP %LUMINAIRE 7 0 0-30 533 29.66 61.66 0°5° 15° 25° ZONE LUMENS %LAMP %LUMINAIRE D-40 778 43.25 89.92 0-30 821 34.2 64.9 0-60 863 47.98 99.75 ••EFFICIENCY4 a7%•• 0-40 1175 49.0 92.9 0-90 865 48.10 100.00 060 1260 52.5 99.6 40-90 87 4.85 10.08 DATE:4-27.99 0-90 1265 52.7 100.0 0 60-90 2 ,12 .25 CIE TYPE DIRECT 40 90 90 3.8 7.1 EFFICIENCY-48.1%•• 90-180 0 .00 .00 LUMINOUS DIAMETER:6.000 60-90 5 0.2 0.4 DATE:4-23-99 0-180 865 48.10 100.00 THIS REPORT BASED ON LM-1 AND 90-'120 0 0.0 0.0 CIE TYPE DIRECT OTHER PERTINENT IES PROCEDURES. 90-150 0 0.0 0.0 LUMINOUS DIAMETER:6.000 0-18001265 52.7 1000 ML THIS REPORT BASED ON LM-1 AND OTHER PERTINENT IES PROCEDURES. Coefficients of Utilization EFFECTIVE FLOOR CAVITY REFLECTANCE=.20 Coefficients of Utilization EFFECTIVE FLOOR CAVITY REFLECTANCE=.20 80 70 1 50 1 30 10 WALL REFLECTANCE 60 70 1 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 101 50 30 10 1 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 WALL REFLECTANCE 1 .59 .58.57 .58.57.56 .56.55.54 .54.53 .53 .52.52.51 .50 50 30 10 50 30 10150 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 2 .56 .54.53 .55.54.52 -54.52.51 .52.51 .50 .51 .50.49 .48 1 .54.53.52 53 .52.51 51.50 .49.49.48 .48 47.47 .46 .46 a 3 .53.51.50 .53.51.49 .51.50.49 .50.49 .48 .49.48.47 .46 2 .50.49.47 50 .48.47 48.47 .46.47.46 .45 45.45 .44 .43 4 .51 .48.47 .50.48.46 .49.47.46 .48.46 .45 .47.46.45 .44 _ a 3 .47.45.44 47 .45.43.46.44 .43.44.43 .42 43.42 .41 .41 5 .48 .46.44 .48.45.44 .47.45.43 .46.44 .43 .45.44.43 .42 4 .45.42.40 44 .42 40.43.41 .40.42.41 .39 41 .40 .39 .38 'a 6 .46 .43.42 .46.43.41 .45.43.41 .44.42 .41 .44.42.41 .40 , 5 .42.39.37 42 .39.37 41.39 .37.40.38 .37 39.38 .36 .36 2 7 .44.41.39 .43.41.39 .43.41.39 .42.40 .39 .42.40.39 .38 a 6 .40.37.35 39 .37.35 39.36 .35.38.36 .34 37.36 .34 .34 0 8 .41 .39.37 .41.39.37 .41.38.37 .40.38 .37 .40.38.36 .36 7 .37.34.33 37 .34.32 36.34 .32:.36.34 .32 35.33 .32 .31 9 .39.36.35 .39.36.35 .38.36.35 .38.36 .34 .38.36.34 .34 - g 8 .35.32.30 34 .32.30.34.32 .30.34.31 .30 33.31 .30 .29 10 .35.32.31 .35.32.31 .35.32.30..34.32 .30 .34.32.30 .30 °C 9 .33.30.28 32 .30.28 32.30 .281.32.29 .28 31 .29 .28 .27 10 1.31 .28.26 130 .28.26 30.28 .261.30.27 .26 29.27 .26 .25 • • Type: Lightolier a Genlyte Thomas Company www.lightolier.com - 631 Airport Road,Fall River,MA 02720•(508)679-8131 •Fax(508)674-4710 We reserve the right to change details of design,materials and finish. ©2004 Genlyte Thomas Group LLC(Lightolier Division)•D0204 LL Series LED Exit Sign LL Page 1 of 1 AC Only or Emergency Operation Thermoplastic Housing The LL Series Thermoplastic LED Exit is a compact exit sign that blends with modern interiors with its softly rounded corners and universal mounting configuration. The LL Series is extremely easy to install,and provides years of low cost,efficient service. 12.25' Dimensions with Self-Diagnostics Option r-131.1 cmJ --1 1 70c (19.0 cm) � � 4.63m) JI L7 8.62' 1.75" (21.9 cm) j— 04.0 cm)— (4.5 cm) 0.8 m) 05.0 cm) .25" 1.75" [HT4 0.8 cm) �-7 (4.5 cm) .75" (1.9 cm) Complete Fixture consists of base exit sign. How to Specify: LL 0 0 SERIES BATTERY FACES LETTER COLOR HOUSING COLOR LL=LL Series LED Exit A=AC Only U=Universal G=Bed W een B=Back=White N=Nickel Cadmium Features Code Compliance , 1. Illumination: Illumination of the exit stencil face is accomplished with long UL 924 listed for damp locations _ lasting,high output Light Emitting Diodes(LEDs).Hot spots and striations are eliminated by the internal"light chamber"especially designed around the Warranty high performance LED array.LEDs and support electronics have an expected Three year full electronics warranty service life of 25 years. Five year full plus five year pro-rated nickel cadmium battery warranty 2. Housing: Constructed of impact resistant,LIL 94 V-0,5 VA white or black thermoplastic.NFPA-type field selectable chevrons can be installed/removed Options from outside the exit housing.Housing design simplifies installation,and does not require hard wire terminations inside of the exit housing.Product SO=Self-Diagnostics can also be ceiling mounted to a standard junction box by using the mounting canopy supplied. 3. Electronics: 120/277 VAC dual voltage input with surge-protected,solid- state circuitry.Charging system is complete with low voltage disconnect,AC lockout,brownout protection,AC indicator lamp and test switch. 4. Battery: Maintenance free,sealed nickel cadmium battery has an estimated Type: E service life of 10 years,and an operating temperature range of 20°F(-7°C)to 95°F(35°C). Job Name:ATLANTIC BEACH CITY HALL 5. Input Power Requirements: AC Only-Red:.93 W;Green:.72 W 0 Emergency Operation-Red:1.55 W;Green:1.85 W Cat.No.: LLNUGW Lamp(s): , Notes: _ M Lightolier a Genlyte Thomas Company www.lightolier.com 631 Airport Road,Fall River,MA 02720•1508)679-8131 •Fax(508)674-4710 We reserve the right to change details of design,materials and finish. ©2004 Genlyte Thomas Group LLC(Lightolier Division)•D0304 ;q rME YEAR LDMED WAX PANTY A.Lightolier warrants that its products(otber than ballasts)are ftee of defeats in wozlananship and materials. SUCH WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF OTHER WARRANTIBS INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,ANY DOLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FrINESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Lightolier, at its sole option, will repair or replace, F.O.l3. our factory, freight prepaid, any Lightolier product (other than ballasts) defective in workmanship or materials. Such repair or replacement is the sole and exclusive remedy against Lightolier and is limited to three years from date of shipment. Lightolier reserves,the right°to determine wbethcr to repair>or replace. No charge-baric, or clarge:.for labor or material, that does not have Lightolier's prior written approval fxom its Corporate Offices ire Massachusetts will be honored,accepted or paid by LightDher. Lightolier will not be responsible for any consequential or incidental damages in connection with any breach of its aforementioned warranty. B.Ballasts and emergency battery packs are covered by separate ballast manufacturers warranties. Lightolier does not make any warranties whatsoever as to ballasts and will accept no responsibility or liability whatsoever therefore. C.Lightolier will not be responsible for any products subjected to inappropriate application or installed or modified in any way that is not in accordance with Lightolier's instructions. D.No agent,employee or representobve of Lightoher has any authority to bind Ligbtolier to any affnnation,representation or warranty concerning goods sold by Lightolier and unless an affirmation, representation or warranty made by an agent, employee or gnsentahve is spec in sty included materials provided by Lightolier,t doesnot tform.Buyers or art of asis of any bargain between Lightolier and Buyer and shall not in any way be eof'orceable by Buyer. 01/10/02 To N Electrimcal Atlantic Beach City Hall Operation & Maintenance Manual General Order SJV82994 Volume 1 of 1 Equipment: Distribution Panelboards Safety Switches REXEL/CONSOL EVL SY JACKSONVLE FL PO#D28-099966-01 MEADOWS ELECTRIC INC ©2003 Eaton Corporation,All Rights Reserved Eaton Electrical: Page 1 of 112 FT•N Electrical Atlantic Beach City Hall GO # SJV82994 Operation & Maintenance Manual Table of Contents VOLUME DESCRIPTION I Contact Sheet 1 TAB I Distribution Panelboards 1 TAB 2 Safety Switches © 2003 Eaton Corporation,All Rights Reserved Eaton Electrical: Page 3 of 112 UmkT*N Electruical Contact Information Visit our Web Site www.eatonelectrical.com view the on-line catalog, pricing, document support, distributor directory, news and events. For warranty support ..............................(800) 356-1243 For a general directory of Eaton Electrical products .......................(800) 525-2000 For on-site field service, commissioning & maintenance.....................(800) 498-2678 Eaton Electrical: Page 5 of 112 FAaT*N Electrical Atlantic Beach City Hall GO # SJV82994 Distribution Panelboards Table of Contents TAB DESCRIPTION Instruction Data NEMA Standards Publication,PB 1.1,Panelboards Spare Parts RENEWAL PARTS CURRENT CUTLER-HAMMER PANELBOARDS Shop Drawings COMMON DOCUMENTS © 2003 Eaton Corporation,All Rights Reserved Eaton Electrical: Page 9 of 112 NEMA Standards Publication PB 1.1-2002 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less Published by National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1300 North 17th Street Rosslyn,Virginia 22209 www.nema.org ©Copyright 2002 by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association.All rights including translation into other languages,reserved under the Universal Copyright Convention,the Berne Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works,and the International and Pan American Copyright Conventions. Eaton I Electrical: Page 13 of 112 NOTICE AND DISCLAIMER The information in this publication was considered technically sound by the consensus of persons engaged in the development and approval of the document at the time it was developed. Consensus does not necessarily mean that there is unanimous agreement among every person participating in the development of this document. The National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA)standards and guideline publications, of which the document contained herein is one, are developed through a voluntary consensus standards development process. This process brings together volunteers and/or seeks out the views of persons who have an interest in the topic covered by this publication. While NEMA administers the process and establishes rules to promote fairness in the development of consensus, it does not write the document and it does not independently test, evaluate, or verify the accuracy or completeness of any information or the soundness of any judgments contained in its standards and guideline publications. NEMA disclaims liability for any personal injury, property, or other damages of any nature whatsoever, whether special, indirect, consequential, or compensatory, directly or indirectly resulting from the publication, use of, application, or reliance on this document. NEMA disclaims and makes no guaranty or warranty, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of any information published herein, and disclaims and makes no warranty that the information in this document will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. NEMA does not undertake to guarantee the performance of any individual manufacturer or seller's products or services by virtue of this standard or guide. In publishing and making this document available, NEMA is not undertaking to render professional or other services for or on behalf of any person or entity, nor is NEMA undertaking to perform any duty owed by any person or entity to someone else. Anyone using this document should rely on his or her own independent judgment or, as appropriate, seek the advice of a competent professional in determining the exercise of reasonable care in any given circumstances. Information and other standards on the topic covered by this publication may be available from other sources, which the user may wish to consult for additional views or information not covered by this publication. NEMA has no power, nor does it undertake to police or enforce compliance with the contents of this document. NEMA does not certify, test, or inspect products, designs, or installations for safety or health purposes. Any certification or other statement of compliance with any health or safety- related information in this document shall not be attributable to NEMA and is solely the responsibility of the certifier or maker of the statement. Eaton I Electrical: Page 14 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page CONTENTS Page Foreword................. ............................................iv Section1 SCOPE.................... ............................................... Section 2 REFERENCES...... His ...............................................2 Section 3 GENERAL..............: ..t,.,,,., .............................................. 3 3.1 Successful Operation of Panelboards........................................................................................3 3.2 Qualified Personnel....................................................................................................................3 3.3 Definition of Qualified Personnel................................................................................................3 3.3.1 Requirements................................................................................................................3 3.3.2 Established Safety Practices.........................................................................................3 3.3.3 Protective Equipment....................................................................................................3 3.3.4 First Aid.........................................................................................................................3 3.4 Suitable Ratings.........................................................................................................................3 Section 4 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARD CABINETS(BOXES).....................................................4 4.1 Installation Instructions...............................................................................................................4 4.2 Location in Building....................................................................................................................4 4.3 Flammable Material ...................................................................................................................4 4.4 Unusual Service Con s 4 4.5 Indoor Damp Locati -"�^ .' 4.6 Wet Locations....... ...........................................4 4.7 Clearance from .. .............................................4 4.8 Space Around the Cabinet.........................................................................................................4 4.9 Mounting of Cabinet...................................................................................................................4 4.10 Flush Mounting in Wall........................................................•-------...............................................5 4.11 Unused Openings in Cabinet.....................................................................................................5 4.12 Grounding of Panelboard Cabinets............................................................................................5 Section 5 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS..............................................................6 5.1 Conduits Installation...................................................................................................................6 5.2 Knockouts Removal...................................................................................................................6 5.2.1 First Step—Remove Center Knockout..........................................................................6 5.2.2 Next Step—Remove Rings...........................................................................................6 5.3 National Electrical Code,Article 300..........................................................................................6 5.4 Conductor Length.......................................................................................................................6 5.5 Exercise Care......... '. ° ..............................................7 ..w1 5.6 National Electrical 7 Section 6 INSTALLATION O ANEW ... ..... ............................. .....11 :sel.ti<nt f-S ndai- is i-01- } .'lIc>1':<:t` 6.1 Proper Storage...................::....................................................................................................11 6.2 Unpacking................................................................................................................................11 6.3 Inspection.................................................................................................................................11 6.4 Care..................................................................................................... .....11 ............................... 6.4.1 Cleaning......................................................................................................................11 ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 15 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page ii 6.5 Manufacturer's Instructions......................................................................................................11 6.6 Installation...................................................................................................:............................11 6.6.1 Alignment Devices......................................................................................................11 6.6.2 Panelboard. OW6.6.3 Flange of D k� � 11 6.7 Line and Branch C '� 12 6.7.1 Conductor ... '( r 11 •�•t ...........................................12 ,1[ it��.l5 C�1t l4 tlA ..{;. ).. •t.•'.�.�•Ltt... ... .......................................... 6.8 Panelboard Groundm ..`}` 6.8.1 Equipment Grounding Conductors..............................................................................12 6.9 Proper Type or Class and Rating................................................ ..................12 ........................... 6.10 Debris.......................................................................................................................................12 6.11 Steps in Section 7....................................................................................................................12 Section 7 STEPS TO BE TAKEN BEFORE ENERGIZING....................................................................13 7.1 Accessible Electrical Connections...........................................................................................13 7.2 Blocks and Packing Materials..................................................................................................13 7.3 Switches,Circuit Breakers,and Other Operating Mechanisms...............................................13 7.4 Short Circuits and Ground Faults.............................................................................................13 7.5 Ground Fault Protection System..............................................................................................13 7.6 Adjustable Time Current Trip Device Settings.........................................................................13 7.7 Grounding Connection A r- ;; . ' �. 13 NMI 7.8 Foreign Material ,� `" °°' ` r .........................................13 Section 8 INSTALLATION O A , . ................••••_„.,..,.-_-.„ 14 8.1 Cabinet Front or Trim adkige..................... ..............`.`.: 8.2 Unpacking................................................................................................................................14 8.3 Covers and Doors....................................................................................................................14 8.4 Touch-up..................................................................................................................................14 8.5 Front Alignment........................................................................................................................14 Section 9 ENERGIZING EQUIPMENT....................................................................................................15 9.1 Qualified Personnel..................................................................................................................15 9.2 Load on the Panelboard...........................................................................................................15 9.3 Energized in Sequence............................................................................................................15 9.4 Loads such as Lighting Circuits, Contactors, Heaters,and Motors.........................................15 Section10 MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................................16 10.1 Maintenance Program .. . ............................ ...........................................................................16 a : , M. A 10.2 Panelboard Which tf east 3 Hours........................16 10.3 Inspect Panelboard r r. �” „••••„_•„ „•,,, , .... 16 10.4 Accumulation of D st and* ......................................... ......................................... ........ �..- t! _ �.'.:tn.?<? 3. .:.Iy 16 PzT 2' �”:-,ti L'c` t�c::�C'E, 10.4.1 Visible Electrical Joints and Terminals........................................................................16 10.4.2 Conductors and Connections........................................................................•---..........16 10.4.3 Fuse Clip Contact Pressure and Contact Means........................................................17 10.4.4 Plug Fuses..................................................................................................................17 10.4.5 Conditions Which Caused Overheating......................................................................17 ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 16 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page iii � 17 10.5 Proper Ampere,Vo8ogm.and |ntmnupdngRatings---------------.--.----.. 10.5.1 Mechanisms Free and|nProper Working Ond* --------.----'----.-17 10.6 Operation of all Mechanical Components ---------'----...17 10.6.1AN17 10.6.2 17 10.6.3 --'--'--'''-.---17 ' 10'6'4Manufacturer's' lh§tfmctions....'-'---.'-.----.--.-..---------------..17 10.6.5 Accessible Copper Electrical Contacts, Blades,and Jaws.........................................18 10.7 Damaged Insulating Material and Assemblies.........................................................................18 10.8 Moisture orSigns mfPrevious Wetness orDripping................................................................18 10.8'1 Conduits Which Have Dripped Condensate...............................................................18 10.8.2 Cracks mrOpenings....................................................................................................18 10.8.3 Insulating Material Which isDamp orWet..................................................................18 10.84 Component Devices Which Show Evidence of Moisture Damage.............................18 10.9 Before Cleanup and Corrective Action isAttempted................................................................1A 10.10 Severe Electrical Short Circuit.................................................................................................19 1011 Ground Fault Protection System..............................................................................................1Q 10.12 Insulation -_.----.---.---1Q 10.12.1 Severe Sho AWN -_''—'-'--''1S _ -0- 10.12.2 Pmdn ..............................................19 ...................................................1S r^ -'-- ' -----�� ' Section I I PERMISSIBLE LOADING OF ------.----_------.--_---2D 11j National Electrical Code...........................................................................................................2U 11.2 Harmonics inElectrical System ...............................................................................................2D Figures Figure 5-1 KNOCKOUT EP 1 --.-.-.-.-..-----_-'_----__-------8 Figure 5-2 KNOCKOUT 2.....................................................................................Q Figure 5-3 KNOCKOUT 3...................................................................................1O ` ' 8�oiu� ��am�urds FnrBsc�|(�oo� ' @National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It isillegal toresell mmodify this publication. PB 1.1-2002 Page iv Foreword This publication is a guide of ra P 9 P c� �r the proper installation, operation,and maintenance of These instructions do not purpo,,#;tvtgauer!a(Idetai.(ryor',vpfjation:^xi0lgpiRrent,nor to provide for every possible contingency regarding installation,operation,or maintenance. It is recommended that work described in this set of instructions be performed only by qualified personnel familiar with the construction and operation of panelboards and that such work be performed only after reading this complete set of instructions. For specific information not covered by these instructions,you are urged to contact the manufacturer of the panelboard directly. In the preparation of this Standards Publication input of users and other interested parties has been sought and evaluated. Inquiries,comments,and proposed or recommended revisions should be submitted to the concerned NEMA product section by contacting the following: These recommendations will be reviewed periodically and updated as necessary. Vice President, Engineering National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1300 North 17th Street,Suite 1847 Rosslyn,Virginia 22209 MP an O-A -'s-0 No. PB 1.1-2002 reviY° u e This Standards Publication was d IQ efi icy th �p. rtgl oaW nd i ,Ib tion Board Product Group of the ' . Pq' LVDE Section. Product Group approval bf the standard does not necessanly'imply that all Product Group members voted for its approval or participated in its development. At the time it was approved,the Product Group was composed of the following members: Cooper B-Line—Highland,IL The Durham Company—Lebanon,MO Eaton Corporation--Cleveland,OH GE—Plainville,CT Hubbell,Inc.—Orange,CT Industrial Electric Manufacturing,Inc.—Fremont,CA Milbank Manufacturing Company—Kansas City,MO Penn Panel&Box Company—Collingdale,PA Post Glover Resistors,Inc.—Erlanger,KY The Pringle Electrical Mfg.Co.—Montgomeryville,PA Reliance Controls Corporation—Racine,WI Siemens Energy&Autom I — arettaA Square D Company—foal II ANNE Thomas&Betts Corpora _ S�<<i1"dal€:.1S for ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton l Electrical: Page 18 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 1 Section 1 This publication covers single p for assembly in the form of single panelboards,including bu tic overload protective devices (fuses or circuit breakers),or b6iM:lThese bhits4rwu9edlinAh4 distril•1tAlon(of electricity at 600 volts and less with: 1600—ampere mains or less 1200—ampere branch circuits or less Specifically excluded are live-front panelboards, panelboards employing cast enclosures for special service conditions,and panelboards designed primarily for residential and light commercial service equipment. ��Y a F ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 19 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 2 Section 2 r�R i• �.ni! R($�F �x5 N 4 ) S C i I i 31;`-} S NFPA 70 2002 National Electrical Code NFPA 70E 2000 Safety Related Work Practices National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) 1300 North 17th Street,Suite 1847 Rosslyn,Virginia 22209 AB 4-2000 Guidelines for Inspection and Preventative Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications PB 2.2-1999 Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment Guidelines for Handling Water Damaged Electrical Products r%1Uwi=9 ii aj FIl3`-cf �E .'.I!t <i-:(.�S ®National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 20 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 3 Section 3 WA1 �N Y.q"d�d S'.biR&fi WARNING: Hazardous voltag �in` se personal injury or death. Unless otherwise specified,inspection and MiiIh r ai td ghidifld ofiIYb&l36ifb6"d panelboards and equipment to which power has been turned off,disconnected and electrically isolated so that no accidental contact can be made with energized parts.Follow all manufacturer's warnings and instructions. Safety related work practices,as described in NFPA 70E,Part II should be followed at all times. CAUTION: Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause degradation of certain plastics. Contact the panelboard manufacturer before using these products to clean, dry,or lubricate components during installation or maintenance. 3.1 SUCCESSFUL OPERATION OF PANELBOARDS The successful operation of panelboards is dependent upon proper installation,operation,and maintenance. Neglecting fundamental installation and maintenance requirements may lead to personal injury, death, or damage to electrical equipment or other property. 3.2 QUALIFIED PERSONNE 0 Ar Installation,operation,and mai nt r bei u only by qualified personnel 3.3 DEFINITION OF C PERtONNtLrk15 r ` c c(. For purposes of these guidelines, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation,construction, and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. In addition,the person is: 3.3.1 Requirements Knowledgeable of the requirements of the National Electrical Code and of all other applicable codes, laws, and standards. 3.3.2 Established Safety Practices Trained and authorized to test, energize, clear, ground, tag, and lockout circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices. 3.3.3 Protective Equipment Trained in the proper care and ue�- ,_ t ct1: ui gloves, hard hat,safety glasses or face shields,and flash resistao X�. y r , r fety practices. 1, • . . . , . 3.3.4 First Aid _ ...i: `;ta..±tc' :itsi for Trained in rendering first aid. 3.4 SUITABLE RATINGS Verify that all equipment being installed has ratings suitable for the installation. ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 21 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 4 Section 4 INSTALLAT x- �► B�SITS (BOXES) 4.1 INSTALLATION INSTR el �,, n >ct.tino 4t, >>ttards for Exccllcztcc Installation of the cabinet in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. 4.2 LOCATION IN BUILDING Locate the cabinet so that it is readily accessible and not exposed to physical damage. 4.3 FLAMMABLE MATERIAL Locate the cabinet well away from flammable material. 4.4 UNUSUAL SERVICE CONDITIONS Do not locate the cabinet where it will be exposed to ambient temperatures above 40°C(104°F),corrosive or explosive fumes, dust, vapors, dripping or standing water, abnormal vibration, mechanical shock, high humidity, tilting, or unusual operating conditions, unless the cabinet/panelboard combination has been designed and so identified by the ,.a: a . t - dt� 4.5 INDOOR DAMP LOCA Locate or shield the cabinet so'-a$, e� t m Is a an wa err - en nng and accumulating therein. Mount the cabinet so that there is at feast YA InA 0 'air space 'e en t'e cabinet and the wall or other supporting surface. 4.6 WET LOCATIONS Cabinets should be specifically approved for wet locations.Mount the cabinet so that there is at least 1/4 inch of air space between the cabinet and the wall or other supporting surface. 4.7 CLEARANCE FROM CEILING Do not locate the cabinet against a non-fireproof ceiling; allow a space of 3 feet between the ceiling and cabinet unless an adequate fireproof shield is provided. 4.8 SPACE AROUND THE CABINET When selecting a location, provide sufficient access and working space around the cabinet (See Section 110.26 of the Nations!Electrics!C. T . rklr gspace ont of the panelboard should be at least 30 inches and this space SIS, ra- ng space should have adequate lighting and a minimum head rooWIN 4.9 MOUNTING OF CABINET, , <, ,a; .a FM. The cabinet should be reliably secured to the mounting surface.Do not depend on wooden plugs driven into holes in masonry, concrete, plaster, or similar materials. (See Section 110.13 of the National Electrical Code.) C National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 22 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 5 4.10 FLUSH MOUNTING IN WALL In walls of concrete,tile,or other noncombustible material,install the cabinet so that its front edge will not set back more than 1/4 inch from the finished surface. In walls of wood or other combustible material, cabinets should be flush with or project 312.3 of the National Electrical Code. ' 4.11 UNUSED OPENINGS I 1 s t:t.t1!:!? ` t£�?1Ci.ilt'C1;: f(7X 1:?�c:w.(141;cc Effectively close unused openings in the cabinet to provide protection which is substantially equivalent to that afforded by the wall of the cabinet. 4.12 GROUNDING OF PANELBOARD CABINETS Ground the cabinet as specified in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code. When the cabinet contains service equipment,it is necessary to bond the cabinet to the grounded(neutral)service conductor. r 1 i a 1 t .d S .. , t'' I•.� i�.�..�v�!4 i A t\}C y `4' %kny :.`sO.fi7'1e. 4:'a'ld.2 rdi ' For c.eII "nce ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton Electrical: Page 23 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 6 Section 5 INSTAL £M J4QNQUT I UCTORS i. 5.1 CONDUITSINSTALLTiQ(d, Conduits should be installed so as to prevent moisture or water from entering and accumulating within the enclosure. Provision should be made to protect conductors from abrasion in accordance with Article 312 of the National Electrical Code. 5.2 KNOCKOUTS REMOVAL Knockouts should be removed as follows: IMPORTANT: Remove knockouts,ONE AT A TIME,alternating INWARD and OUTWARD. 5.2.1 First Step—Remove Center Knockout Remove center knockout INWARD. 5.2.1.1 Screwdriver Blade Place screwdriver blade against - c► t�r "�s (Figure 1).Bend back and forth to break tie. 5.2.2 Next Step—Remove Rings i s. S l-a n =a i..l cz for f l x e j l c c Remove rings ONE AT A TIME without straining remaining rings. 5.2.2.1 Pry First Ring Pry first ring OUTWARD with screwdriver midway between ties, using pliers flat against box under screwdriver (Figure 2). Bend ring sections OUTWARD with pliers, then back and forth to break ties (Figure 5-3). 5.2.2.2 Second Ring Remove second ring INWARD by striking screwdriver(with blade against point midway between ties)then breaking ring sections inward and back and forth to break ties. 5.3 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE,ARTICLE 300 Refer to the National Electricali, t ds. See 6.7 for making proper connections. u. 5.4 CONDUCTOR LENGTH eyi.tsForz;�Ctli ;r;,c. Keep conductor length to a minimum within the wiring gutter. Excessive conductor length will result in additional heating and may result in overheating. However, conductors should be long enough to reach the terminal location in a manner that avoids strain on the terminal. ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton l Electrical: Page 24 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 7 5.5 EXERCISE CARE Exercise care to maintain the lar r fa iu, nd ctQrs; otherwise the insulation may be damaged and terminal conne bf of conductors shall comply with aw NEC Section 312.6. g 5.6 NATIONAL ELECTRICA kC� T72 S�. i R k..1 1 L T��✓t d J.-t Refer to the National Electrical Code, Article 725.54 for the separation requirements for conductors of Class 2 and Class 3 remote-control,signaling and power-limited circuits: FO r ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 25 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 8 r* v ZCelICi,CC r t S E`.'i. 1 1`S-.I .!s i; tr.'s. dj:i; in Sv.; ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton Electrical: Page 26 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 9 Mw wMawn i x'C 1 Figure r2 KNOCKOUT REMOVAL—STEP 2 ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 27 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 10 Hell - i All S iliY:tg `" lt.'.zii)il.'Cl5 for j.,xc-cjjovcc Figure 5-3 KNOCKOUT REMOVAL-STEP 3 ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 28 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 11 Section 6 6.1 PROPER STORAGE Store the panelboard in a clearf5dN pl'aide%datedlsd,th;iV d6hanic1dW m—age from work personnel in the area is not likely to happen. 6.2 UNPACKING Care should be exercised in unpacking the panelboard to prevent damage and loss of instruction materials and loose parts. 6.3 INSPECTION Check for shipping damage and check to make sure that the panelboard is the correct one for installation in the cabinet. 6.4 CARE Care should be taken to protect the panelboard internal parts from contamination during the installation process. h ..._ ,��f 6.4.1 Cleaning Clean the cabinet of all foreign*aterials.1ftpartiiati:bonfiectibn',poibb;arWspattered with cement, plaster, paint, or other foreign material, remove the foreign materials with great care to avoid damage to the plating. CAUTION: Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause degradation of certain plastics. Contact the panelboard manufacturer before using these products to clean, dry,or lubricate panelboard components during installation or maintenance. 6.6 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS Carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions and labels. 6.6 INSTALLATION 6.6.1 Alignment Devices Adjust the alignment devices wh " "bv' 6.6.2 Panelboard Install the panelboard,finalize its alighmlerft,iandAightbn li=secc rely'ih!thecabinet. 6.6.3 Flange of Deadfront Shield Unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer,adjust the panelboard so that the flange of the deadfront shield is no more than 3/16 inch from (1) the front of the cabinet for surface mounting or (2) the surrounding wall surfaces for flush mounting. ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton 1 Electrical: Page 29 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 12 6.7 LINE AND BRANCH CONDUCTORS Connect Line and Branch Condu 6.7.1 Conductors AFI— r ff ` Use care in stripping insulation Gq�; pnt{gtArs r°.[ s"Ino� jjo� �ntcl o�icing the conductor. For aluminum, clean all oxide from the stripped portion end apply an antloxlde compounZI. 6.7.1.1 Wiring Gutters Distribute and arrange conductors neatly in the wiring gutters.(See Section 5.) 6.7.1.2 Types and Temperature Ratings Care should be exercised to ensure that the types and temperature ratings of conductors being installed in the panelboard are suitable for use with the terminals,which have been provided. 6.7.1.3 Tighten All Terminals ' Use the manufacturer's torque values. (See 7.1). 6.8 PANELBOARD GROUN N Ground the panelboard cabinet`i w 8.20 of the National Electrical Code.) Sc1.ttP.v Sta-nd's rds li:)r f c.1 o1,.ce 6.8.1 Equipment Grounding Conductors Where separate equipment grounding conductors are used, prepare equipment grounding conductors in accordance with 6.7.1 and connect them to the equipment grounding terminal bar.Check to be sure that the terminal bar is securely bonded to the cabinet or panelboard frame and that it is not connected to the neutral bar except at service equipment (as permitted in Section 250.28 of the National Electrical Code) or at separately derived systems(as permitted in Section 250.30 of the National Electrical Code). NOTE—An equipment grounding terminal bar is not always required.For example,when a properly installed metallic raceway is used as the equipment grounding path or when the grounded conductor terminals (neutral bar) complies with the conditions of the last sentence of Section 408.20 of the National Electrical Code. 6.9 PROPER TYPE OR CLASS AND RATING When installing circuit breakers or fuses,ensure that they are of the proper type or class and rating. 6.10 DEBRISs Clean the cabinet of all debris,wf U installation(see 6.4.1). 6.11 STEPS INSECTION 7 tandar(ls For V'\cellonce If the job is complete,perform the steps in Section 7 and then install the cabinet front(see Section 8). ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. n is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 30 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 13 Section 7 STEP100 EFGIZING 7.1 ACCESSIBLE ELECT ] Will M s c i l i E_ c.,!.i;;;i C<11'i. i';)Y !. x c:'�" l o;l i'(`. r � tc Tighten all accessible electrical connections to the manufacturer's torque specifications. If such information is not provided with the equipment,consult the manufacturer. 7.2 BLOCKS AND PACKING MATERIALS Make certain that all blocks and packing materials used for shipment have been removed from all component devices and the panelboard. 7.3 SWITCHES,CIRCUIT BREAKERS,AND OTHER OPERATING MECHANISMS Manually exercise all switches, circuit breakers, and other operating mechanisms to make certain they operate freely. 7.4 SHORT CIRCUITS AND GROUND FAULTS To make sure that the system is " " %a . end " frwjtsaconduct an insulation resistance test phase to ground and phase 1rt " ers in both the open and closed positions. If the resistance reads_ ranch circuit devices in the open position,the system may be unsa avesta r►r stigation and possible correction, low readings are still observed,c th6j ir,taiigifactdrerttshbuld "tie:.(cohtaeted- Some electronic equipment (metering,TVSS,etc.)may be damaged by this testing. Refer to the manufacturers equipment markings for guidelines. 7.5 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM Test the ground fault protection system(if furnished)in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.See Section 230.95 of the National Electrical Code and NEMA Standards Publication PB 2.2,Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment. 7.6 ADJUSTABLE TIME CURRENT TRIP DEVICE SETTINGS Set any adjustable time current trip device settings to the proper values. NOTE—Experience has indicated that damage from overcurrent can be reduced if the devices used for overload and short-circuit protection are set to operate instantaneously(that is,without intentional time delay)at 115 percent of the highest value of phase current which is likely to occur as the result of any and 11 ated motoror yldin curr nts. .. 7.7 GROUNDING CONNEC. wARM WMAs . Check to determine that all gro In i pig Itttfe panelboard is used as service equipment,make certain that the* N4 P49 p��s'e�it;R.p`ro}� (y"bc�r�Cie to the cabinet. 7.8 FOREIGN MATERIAL Remove all foreign material from the panelboard and cabinet before installing the cabinet front. Make certain that all deadfront shields are properly aligned and tightened. Install the cabinet front in accordance with Section 8. ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 31 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 14 Section 8 8.1 CABINET FRONT OR 1 The cabinet front or trim package is designed to prevent damage to the front during shipment and handling. 8.2 UNPACKING Care should be used when unpacking and handling the cabinet front. 8.3 COVERS AND DOORS Install covers,close doors,and make certain that no conductors are pinched and that all enclosure parts are properly aligned and tightened. 8.4 TOUCH-UP A suitable paint or other corrosion-resistant finish should be applied to those places where the finish is damaged. 8.5 FRONT ALIGNMENTAN —' �- am The cabinet front may be provid i I n 'Rely with the building even though the cabinet may be slightly out of,:piudriV.wftSth6b6iidi6g. For f- %c ;.1 i cr c e t' .(1n tK Si<..11d.ak'(JS +'0r f ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 32 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 15 Section 9 WARNING: Hazardous Volta s i s vere personal injury or death. Energizing a panelboard for the tir9tLtlrrt ft�i ►rtitletlliisitall tlOntoi�r eih`tehahce is potentially dangerous. 9.1 QUALIFIED PERSONNEL Qualified personnel should be present when the equipment is energized for the first time. If short circuit conditions caused by damage or poor installation practices have not been detected in the procedures specified in Section 7,serious personal injury and damage can occur when the power is turned on. 9.2 LOAD ON THE PANELBOARD There should be no load on the panelboard when it is energized. Tum off all of the downstream loads. 9.3 ENERGIZED IN SEQUENCE The equipment should be energized in sequence by starting at the source end of the system and working towards the load end. In other words, energize the main devices, then the feeder devices, and then the ` branch-circuit devices. Turn theJIMIM 9.4 LOADS SUCH AS LIG S,AND MOTORS After all main, feeder, and br6ndhicircilittdeuiaesdhaW.rb&bncclo'sed,ctoads such as lighting circuits, contactors,heaters,and motors may be turned on. Odom ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 33 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 16 Section 10 = �` 10.1 MAINTENANCE PROG }s for Exce'llence A maintenance program for panelboards should be conducted on a regularly scheduled basis in accordance with the following: 10.2 PANELBOARD WHICH HAS BEEN CARRYING ITS REGULAR LOAD FOR AT LEAST 3 HOURS A panelboard which has been carrying its regular bad for at least 3 hours just prior to inspection should be field tested by feeling the deadfront surfaces of circuit breakers,switches, interior trims,doors,and enclosure sides with the palm of the hand. If the temperature of these surfaces does not permit you to maintain contact for at least 3 seconds, this may be an indication of trouble and investigation is necessary. Thermographic (infrared)scanning has become a useful method of investigating thermal performance. WARNING: Hazardous voltages in electrical equipment can cause severe personal injury or death. Unless otherwise specified, inspection and maintenance should only be performed on panelboards to which power has been turned off, disconnected and electrically isolated so that no accidental contact can be made with energized parts. Follow all manufacturer's warnings and instructions. 110% AMID Safety related work practices,as (lowed at all times. CAUTION: Hydrocarbon sp, p r se rays or compounds will cause degradation of certain plastics. :Gontaeti#hb panelboaM rhanufactucdd before using these products to clean, dry,or lubricate panelboard components during installation or maintenance. 10.3 INSPECT PANELBOARD ONCE EACH YEAR Inspect the panelboard once each year or after any severe short circuit. 10.4 ACCUMULATION OF DUST AND DIRT If there is an accumulation of dust and dirt, clean out the panelboard by using a brush,vacuum cleaner, or clean lint-free rags. Avoid blowing dust into circuit breakers or other components. Do not use a blower or compressed air. 10.4.1 Visible Electrical Joints and Terminals Carefully inspect all visible electrical joints and terminals in the bus and wiring system. 10.4.2 Conductors and Conne,*_ �� Visually check all conductors arCi conte e t i3y a. . lean and secure. Loose and/or contaminated connections increasee,electricalaesistance which"bantcause=erheating. Such overheating is indicated by discoloration or flaking of insulation and/or metal parts. Pitting or melting of connecting surfaces is a sign of arcing due to a loose,or otherwise poor connection. Parts which show evidence of overheating or looseness should be cleaned and re-torqued or replaced if damaged. Tighten bolts and nuts at bus joints to manufacturer's torque specifications. ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 34 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 17 CAUTION: Do not remove plating from aluminum parts in joints or terminations. Damage to plating can result in overheating.Replace damaged aluminum parts. 10.4.3 Fuse Clip Contact Pr n - � , Examine fuse clip contact pres coritt;s �lfs# iii 3n of overheating or looseness, follow the manufacturer's maintLoose fuse clips can result in overheating. S c t i t_= S t a n rd a,- 1 s fo r 1. c;c i I c;z,o c 10.4.4 Plug Fuses Re-tighten plug fuses. 10.4.5 Conditions Which Caused Overheating Be sure that all conditions which caused the overheating have been corrected. 10.5 PROPER AMPERE,VOLTAGE,AND INTERRUPTING RATINGS Check circuit breakers,switches,and fuses to ensure they have the proper ampere,voltage,and interrupting ratings. Ensure that non-current-limiting devices are not used as replacements for current-limiting devices. Never attempt to defeat rejection mechanisms which are provided to prevent the installation of the incorrect class of fuse. 10.5.1 Mechanisms Free a fm�- Operate each switch or circuit b e4 F r1W3 hanisms are free and in proper working order.Replace as requires.ISe�;. ^#< , or rrno4ntr>ance lof'mo ded case circuit breakers. 10.6 OPERATION OF ALL MECHANICAL COMPONENTS Check the operation of all mechanical components. Replace as required. 10.6.1 Switch Operating Mechanisms Exercise switch operating mechanisms and external operators for circuit breakers to determine that they operate freely to their full on and off positions. 10.6.2 Integrity of Electrical and Mechanical Interlocks Check the integrity of all electrical and mechanical interlocks and padlocking mechanisms. 10.6.3 Missing or Broken Parts Whenever practical, check all dei fpr x ��,} p spring tension, free movement, corrosion,dirt,and excessive we d NES = 0 n 13 { 10.6.4 Manufacturer's Inszrpct;tons < s c.` i t c'1 s for L a c 4:l l e n c;e Adjust,clean,and lubricate or replace parts according to the manufacturer's instructions. 10.6.4.1 Clean Nonmetallic Light Grease or Oil Use clean nonmetallic light grease or oil as instructed. ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 35 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 18 AIN 10.6.4.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Do not oil or grease parts of molded case circuit breakers. 10.6.4.3 Clean,Light Greas" q ,„ If no instructions are given on tl ! ng mechanisms, and interlocks may be lubricated with clean, Iighf,graSer ,�t Ifor i , 10.6.4.4 Excess Lubrication Wipe off excess lubrication to avoid contamination. CAUTION: Hydrocarbon spray propellants and hydrocarbon based sprays or compounds will cause degradation of certain plastics. Contact the panelboard manufacturer before using these products to clean, dry,or lubricate panelboard components during installation or maintenance. 10.6.5 Accessible Copper Electrical Contacts,Blades,and Jaws Clean and dress readily accessible copper electrical contacts, blades, and jaws according to the manufacturer's instructions when inspection indicates the need. 10.7 DAMAGED INSULATING MATERIAL AND ASSEMBLIES Look for and replace damaged _ here sealing compounds have deteriorated. + 99M MAO was 10.8 MOISTURE OR SIG Look for any moisture or signs of previous wetness or dripping inside the cabinet. NOTE--Condensation in conduits or dripping from outside sources is one known cause of panelboard malfunction. 10.8.1 Conduits Which Have Dripped Condensate Seal off any conduits which have dripped condensate, and provide means for further condensate to drain away from the panelboard. 10.8.2 Cracks or Openings Seal off any cracks or openings which have allowed moisture to enter the enclosure. Eliminate the source of any dripping on the enclosure and any other source of moisture. 10.8.3 Insulating Material Which is Damp or Wet Replace or thoroughly dry and cl u wet or shows an accumulation of deposited material from previo 10.8.4 Component Devicey`seAIA SFibW 6i6646f 6'vf4tirei5i nage Inspect all component devices. Replace any component device which shows evidence of moisture damage or has been subjected to water damage or flooding. Additional information may be found in the NEMA document"Guidelines for Handling Water Damaged Electrical Products." ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 36 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 19 10.9 BEFORE CLEANUP AND CORRECTIVE ACTION IS ATTEMPTED In the event of water damage, e. c� r ,p, t , nufacturer should be consulted before cleanup and corrective a • 10.10 SEVERE ELECTRIC 1-f If a severe electrical short circuit ihas-o cur'ref�,`ire excessive`currents may have resulted in structural component and/or bus and conductor damage due to mechanical distortion, thermal damage, metal deposits,or smoke. Examine all devices and bus supports for cracks or breakage.The manufacturer should be consulted before cleanup and correction is attempted. 10.11 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM Test the ground fault protection system(If furnished)in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.See Section 230.95 of the National Electrical Code and NEMA Standards Publication PB 2.2,Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment. 10.12 INSULATION RESISTANCE Check insulation resistance(see 7.4)under any of the following conditions: 10.12.1 Severe Short Circuit rr� If a severe short circuit has occu .� } ,' we 10.12.2 Parts Replaced }` r r( Si)Y If it has been necessary to replace parts or clean insulating surfaces; 10.12.3 Panelboard Exposed to High Humidity If the panelboard has been exposed to high humidity,condensation,or dripping moisture. t:s"'i.`aig-;r. Ji<x�3�`t:lti:.i.` ta)?' t',\S';C lt :;"i;t• ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 37 of 112 PB 1.1-2002 Page 20 Section 11 PER _ AARDS 11.1 NATIONAL ELECTRI C., scuir ->_ ` t, xtc�.Ztcl 3'x) l;Zc Ilc)tc'r In compliance with the National Electrical Code, the normal continuous loads (3 hours or more) of panelboard circuits should be not more than 80 percent of the rating of the overcurrent protective device, unless the marking of the device indicates that it is suitable for continuous duty at 100 percent of its rating. 11.2 HARMONICS IN ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Some types of electrical equipment cause harmonics in the electrical system, which may result in overheating.This condition should be considered when determining panelboard loading. vr;,E—j ,r-7m,' -,,rwo F . 3:'o?' 8 'i-f Pr-E- ©National Electrical Manufacturers Association. It is illegal to resell or modify this publication. Eaton I Electrical: Page 38 of 112 Renewal Parts Cutler-Hammer ® Effective: February 2000 Page 1 New Information Current Cutler-Hammer Panelboards PRL1a PRL2a PRL3a PRL4B/F PRL5P " PRL1 a-LX H K Y ray PRL2a-LX Pow-R-Command" A" E Trim Locks a:F a/ v� PRL1a PRL1a-LX PRL2a PRL2a-LX �? / - .•----ate'« ^'^ ✓i :G� I a r r All PRL3a PRL4B PRL4F PRLSP Pow-R-Command RP.38F.O1.T.E U.,T*N Eaton I Electrical: Page 41 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Paget Effective: February 2000 Panelboards Table of Contents Page Product History Timeline Procedure for Identifying Product 1986 1990 1995 Present Panelboard Type. . . .. .. . . . ... . . 3 Cutler-Hammer PRL1a,2a 10 Oct.1996 Procedure for Identifying Renewal Parts ... .. .. .. . . . . . . . . 3 Cutler-Hammer PRL3a Mar.1994 Distributor Ordering Instructions . . . 3 Cutler-Hammer PRL4B/F rE Oct.1987 Cutler-Hammer Satellite Plants. . . . . 4 Cutler-Hammer PRLSP --Aug.1995 PRL1a,2a Parts Section.. . . . . .. . . 5 Cutler-Hammer PRL1a,2a-LX hF— Dec.1997 Connector Kits,Vertical Breakers . . . 6 Cutler-Hammer Pow-R-Command �-- Mar.1996 . Connector Kits,Main Lug . . .. . 7,8,9 Connector Kits, Horizontally Mounted,PRL1a. 10, 11 Connector Kits, Horizontally Mounted,PRL2a.. . . 12 Neutral Assemblies .. .. 13, 14, 15, 16 Ground Assemblies .. . . .. . . . . .. . 17 Service Entrance Kits. . .. . . . . .. . . 17 Deadfront Covers ... . . . . . .. . . 18, 19 Trim Locks. . .. .. . . . . . ... . . . .... 20 Trim Clamps,and Hardware Bags . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . 21 PRL3a Parts Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Connector Kits, Branch Breakers Quicklags. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 23 GB,GHB,GHBS .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Twin Mounted F-Frame 150 Ampere Maximum . . . . . . . 24 Single Mounted F-Frame 151-225 Ampere Maximum . , . 24 Ground Assemblies .. . ... . . . .. . . 25 Service Entrance Kits... . . . .. . . . . 25 Deadfront Covers . . . .. . . .. 26, 27,28 PRL4B/F Parts Section. . . . . . . . . . . 29 Vented Cover Assemblies and Side Gutter Covers . .. . . . . . 30 Blank Covers. .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. 31 Breaker Connector Kits . . .. . . .. . . 32 Fusible FDPW Switch Connector Kit .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . . 33 Breaker Retrofit Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Fusible Retrofit Kits . . . . . .. . . .. . . 34 Energy Sentinel . . .. . ... . . . . .. .. 35 PRL1a,2a, 3a and PRL4 Special Trims and Enclosures ...... 36,37 PRLSP Parts Section.. . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Ordering Procedure ... . . .. .. ... . 38 Chassis Layout .. . . .. . .. ... . .... 39 Breaker Adapter Unit Catalog Numbers. ... .. ... . .. . 40 Branch Breaker Information . . . 41,42 Main or Feed-Through Lugs. . .. . . 43 Neutrals and Grounds . . . .. . . .. . . 44 Boxes,Trims and Filler Plates. . . . . 45 PRL1a,2a-LX Column Panelboards. . 46 Pow-R-Command. . .. .. . . ... . ... . 47 Additional Services . . . . . . . . ... .. . 48 Li:Y*N RP.38F.0131 Eaton I Electrical: Page 42 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page Procedure for Identifying Procedure for Identifying Panelboard Type Renewal Parts The current line of Pow-R-line C panel- N 1.Identify the type of panelboard, i.e. boards was introduced in 1993. a PRL1a,PRL2a,PRL3a,PRL4,PRL5P u by reading the nameplate.Follow A panelboard is identified by data t the procedure listed to the left, found on the nameplate.Pow-R-Line C r panelboard nameplates are different a 2.Refer to the listing below and turn to in appearance,but all have the same I N the proper section in this brochure critical information: Main EE to identify standard parts. Ampere rating of the main Gutter Gutter Gutter Page Ampere rating of the neutral Pow-R-Line Pow-R-Line Pow-R-Line PRL1a and PRL2a. . . . .. .. .. .. 5-20 Type of service(phase/wire) 1a,2a 3a 4e/171) PRL3a . . ... .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. 22-28 PRL4B/F. . .... . ... .... . ... . 29-34 Manufacturing location PRL5P . .. . . .... .. . .... . . .. 38-45 Type of panel Box width may also help identify the PRL1a-LX(Column Width) .. . ...46 General order number panelboard type.Standard width for PRL2a-LX(Column Width) . .. . ..46 In the event the nameplate is missing, PRL1a,PRL2a,and PRL3a is 20 inches. Pow-R-Command.. ... ........ .47 it may still be possible to identify the PRL4 standard widths are 24,36,and Trim Locks . . .. . ... . . . .. .. ... .20 panel type by location of the neutral 44 inches. Trim Clamps.. . .. .. . . ... . . . .. .21 bar.The illustrations to the right showsWARNING Energy Sentinel .. . . .. .. . . . . . ..35 the position of the neutral in the panel- Special Trims and Enclosures. .36,37 board. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WILL CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.TURN 3.This book identifies those replace- OFF POWER SUPPLY TO EQUIPMENT ment parts most frequently ordered BEFORE WORKING ON IT. and which are readily available from stock.These parts can be ordered by style or catalog number to speed up processing and delivery. Distributor Ordering Instructions 1.Specify part by style/part number. IR 2. Refer to PL.38F.01.P.E for pricing information. Discount Symbol CE-9 applies. 3.Turn to Page 4 to locate nearest Satellite Plant. 4.Enter the order on the satellite plant via mail,fax,or phone. 5.Selling policy 25-000 applies. T PRL4F panels with vertical mounted main switch will have the neutral mounted at the opposite end the main. RP.38F.01.T.E F.T*N Eaton Electrical: Page 43 of 112 it Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page Effective: February2000 Panelboards Cutler-Hammer Satellite Plants Seato Detroit • Chicago r Hartford ---..� n Francis Cleveland y Baltimore .�_�. • SL Louis Denver • .� Raleigh Los Angeles •Phoenix Atlanta Dallas• •Orlando Houston Atlanta Denver Orlando 7990-A 2nd Flag Drive 14101 East 33rd Place, Suite F 3827 St.Valentine Way Austell,GA 30001 Aurora,CO 80011 Orlando, FL 32811 Phone 770-944-1022 Phone:303-371-7844 Phone 407-843-3863 FAX 770-944-2033 FAX 303-371-4175 FAX 407-841-9135 Baltimore Detroit Phoenix 6671 Santa Barbara Court,Suite A 22670 Heslip Drive 7160 South Hari Avenue Elkridge,MD 21227 Novi,MI 48375-4141 Tempe,AZ 85283 Phone 410-796-7777 Phone 248-735-2911 Phone 480-777-3957 FAX 410-796-7755 FAX 248-735-2917 FAX 480-777-3958 Chicago Hartford Raleigh 959 AEC Drive 625 Day Hill Road 2933 S.Miami Blvd.,Suite 111 Wood Dale, IL 60191 Windsor,CT 06095 Durham, NC 27703 Phone 630-860-3500 Phone 860-688-7330 Phone 919-544-7074 FAX 630-860-3569 FAX 860-688-4982 FAX 919-572-9751 Cleveland Houston San Francisco 4711 Hinkley Industrial Parkway 10810 West Little York,Suite 100 20919 Cabot Boulevard Cleveland,OH 44109 Houston,TX 77041 Hayward,CA 94545 Phone 216-485-1940 Phone 713-688-8430 Phone 510-784-8981 FAX 216-485-1943 FAX 713-688-3764 FAX 510-784-8980 Dallas Los Angeles Seattle 1100 Avenue T 2021 Locust Court 18657 72nd Avenue South Grand Praire,TX 75050 Ontario,CA 91761 Kent,WA 98032 Phone 972-988-3339 Phone 909-923-2040 Phone 425-251-9081 FAX 972-641-6435 FAX 909-923-2344 FAX 425-251-0079 St.Louis 12947 Gravois Road St. Louis, MO 63127 Phone:314-842-7797 FAX 314-842-2552 F=T•N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 44 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 5 PRL1a,2a Parts Section Page Connector Kits,Vertical Breakers . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 6 Connector Kits,Main Lug. . .. . . . . . .. .. .. . . . .. . . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . . . . . . . 7,8,9 Connector Kits,Horizontally Mounted,PRL1a.. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . . .. .. . ... . 10, 11 Connector Kits,Horizontally Mounted, PRL2a . . . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. ... .. .. . . .. . 12 Neutral Assemblies. . . . . . . .. . . . . . ... . . .. ... .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 13, 14,15, 16 Ground Assemblies .. . . . . ... . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. ... . . . ... .. .. . . .. 17 Service Entrance Kits . . . . . .. . .. .. . .. . . ... . . ... . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . ... .. .. .. 17 Deadfront Covers .. . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . ... . . . . .. ... . . . . .. .. .. .. . . ... .. . 18, 19 TrimLocks. . . . . ... ... . . . . . . . . .. .. ..... . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . .... . .. . .. . .. .. 20 Trim Clamps,and Hardware Bags. .. .. . .. . . ... . . .. . . . .. .. ..... . . . . .. . . .. 21 RP.38F.01.T.E E:T*N Eaton I Electrical: Page 45 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 6 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRL1a,2a Connector Kits Vertical Breaker Assemblies Device Type i0 Device Mounting 3-Phase 1-Phase Tin Plated Silver Plated Tin Plated Silver Plated Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Catalog Numbers F-Frame® Top Fed KB13AFT KB13SFT KB11AFT KB11SFT (100 Ampere Maximum) Bottom Fed KB13AFB KB13SFB KB11AFB KB11SFB F-Framem Top Fed KB23AFT KB23SFT KB21AFT KB21SFT (225 Ampere Maximum) Bottom Fed KB23AFB KB23SFB KB21AFB KB21SFB J-Frame Top Fed KB43AJT KB43SJT KB41AJT KB41SJT Bottom Fed KB43AJB KB43SJB KB41AJB KB41SJB K-Frame Top Fed KB43AKT KB43SKT KB41AKT KB41SKT Bottom Fed KB43AKB KB43SKB KB41AKB KB41SKB s 1 i t ; .SWAM VAIN h KB 11AFT KB 13AFT OO Order main or sub-feed breaker separately when ordering above connector kits. T EHD,FD,HFD,FDC (I FD,HFD,FDC,ED,EDH,EDC E.l*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 46 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Pagel PRL1a,2a Connector Kits 100 Ampere Lug Assemblies Lug Type Panel Lug Wire Size Quantity 3-Phase 1-Phase Options(I) RangePer Phase Tin Plated Silver Plated Tin Plated Silver Plated Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Catalog Numbers Aluminum/ STD #14-1/0 1 KL13AMS KL13SMS KL11AMS KL11SMS Copper SFL #14-1/0 2 KL13AMF KL13SMF KL11AMF KL11SMF Mechanical OVS #6-300kcmil 1 KL13AMO KL13SMO KL11AMO KL11SMO Crimp STD #8-1/0 1 KL13AVS KL13SVS KL11AVS KL11SVS SFL #8-1/0 2 KL13AVF KL13SVF KL11AVF KLIISVF OVS #4-300 kcmil 1 KL13AVO KL13SVO KL11AVO KL11SVO Copper STD #14-1/0 1 N/A KL13SCS N/A KL11SCS Mechanical SFL #14-1/0 2 N/A KL13SCF N/A KL11SCF OVS #6-250kcmil 1 N/A KL13SCO N/A KL11SCO s U!, 9 , 9 e � b W00 KL 13AMS KL 11AVS Cts STD=Standard Lugs.Use for Main or Thru-Feed. SFL=Sub-Feed Lugs. OVS=Oversize Lugs.Use for Main or Thru-Feed. RP.38F.01.T.E „=T*N Eaton Electrical: Page 47 of 112 Current Page 8 Renewal PansEffective: February 2000 Panelb ards Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer PRL1a,2a Connector Kits 225 Ampere Lug Assemblies Lug Type Panel Lug Wire Size Quantity.*3-Phase 1-Phase Options(' Range Per Phase Silver Plated Tin Plated Silver Plated ConnecCopper Connector Aluminum Connector Coer Connectormbers Aluminum/ STD #6-300 kcmil 1 KL23AMS KL23SMS KL21AMS KL21SMS Copper SFL #6-300 kcmil 2 KL23AMF KL23SMF KL21AMF KL21SMF Mechanical OVS 4/0-500 kcmil 1 KL23AMO KL23SMO KL21AMO KL21SMO Crimp STD #4-300kcmi1 1 KL23AVS KL23SVS KL21AVS KL21SVS SFL #4-300 kcmil 2 KL23AVF KL23SVF KL21AVF KL21SVF OVS 2/0-500 kcmil 1 KL23AVO KL23SVO KL21AVO KL21SVO Copper STD #6-250 kcmil 1 N/A KL23SCS N/A KL21 SCS Mechanical SFL #6-250 kcmil 2 N/A KL23SCF N/A KL21SCF OVS 1/0-600 kcmil 1 N/A KL23SCO N/A KL21SCO A i yrs ll l =� "� ' KL23AMS KL21AVS O STD=Standard Lugs.Use for Main or Thru-Feed. SFL=Sub-Feed Lugs. OVS=Oversize Lugs.Use for Main or Thru-Feed. E.lT*N RP.38F.0131 Eaton I Electrical: Page 48 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page PRL1a,2a Connector Kits 400 Ampere Lug Assemblies Lug Type Panel Lug Wire Size Quantity 3-Phase 1-Phase Options0 Range Per Phase Tin Plated Silver Plated Tin Plated Silver Plated Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Catalog Numbers Aluminum/ STD 4/0-500 kcmil 2 KL43AMS KL43SMS KL4IAMS KL41SMS Copper SFL N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Mechanical OVS 3/0-750 kcmil 2 KL43AMO KL43SMO KL41AMO KL41SMO Crimp STD 2/0-500 kcmil 2 KL43AVS KL43SVS KL41AVS KL41SVS SFL N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OVS 500-750 kcmil 2 KL43AVO KL43SVO KL41AVO KL41SVO Copper STD 1/0-600 kcmil 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A Mechanical SFL N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A OVS 1/0-600 kcmil 1 N/A KL43SCO NIA KL41SC0 z ti v 8 Z �5 S y/� r $ r V W � ,a n KL43AMS KL43AVS CD STD=Standard Lugs.Use for Main or Thru-Feed. SFL=Sub-Feed Lugs. OVS=Oversize Lugs.Use for Main or Thru-Feed. RP.38VOI T.E F=T*N Eaton I Electrical: Page 49 of 112 l Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 10 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRL1a Horizontally Mounted Connector Kit Assemblies Bolt-on Quicklag Breaker Assemblies Breaker Drawing Branch Circuit 3-phase 1-phase Frame Number© Quantity Tin Plated Silver Plated Tin Plated Silver Plated Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Item Number BA,BAB, 1C96608 12 CKT G01 G03 G05 G07 QBH,QBGF, 18 CKT G09 G11 G13 G15 QBHGF, 30 CKT G17 G19 G21 G23 QBGFEP, 42 CKT G25 G27 G29 G31 QBHGFEP 48 CKT G33 G35 G37 G39 54 CKT G41 G43 G45 G47 72 CKT G49 G51 G53 G55 96 CKT G57 G59 G61 G63 Note:When determining branch circuit quantity,remember: 1. Quicklag breakers with shunt trips require one additional circuit. 2. UL listed lighting and appliance(CTL)panelboards cannot exceed 42 electrically connected circuits in a single enclosure. 3. When bare copper is specified,use the silver plated groups. 4. Order breakers separately with connector kit. E IIf,YIBR Y�,' IY�il'li� �ib'{��I��i11i��t7�'1i',+ gi,plltdn iW�''Y t Ygtl1�,,��q�I Flys+l�i�p 'p PSP I°�6II i41�ti9'i4l iPl'il�' i�IiIIYIf 91,Y I'9e '�I9 41I�i'��111,VIII i��l�l��llliifit�l��'��Iililil l�ilj�+iII�iISlll�il�l�lri41i�l�llV I�4�VIpV 17f1i41�i I'�I i�l lil ri�ly I�yI9IJ1l it+ii'I�"� I� Pi 11 Ili�1l'��'{'I IIh � � II �I�1 i I'll ii� I I,ihlyiill ,,III�II ut II�;YV I YIIII �II I I IIIY�II�I � S3 � � es 1C96608G01 1C96608G05 (U Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent G-number that's needed. F=T*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 50 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 11 PRL1a Horizontally Mounted Connector Kit Assemblies Plug-in Quicklag Breaker Assemblies Breaker Drawing Branch Circuit 3-phase 1-phase Frame Number0 Quantity Tin Plated Silver Plated Tin Plated Silver Plated Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Item Number HQP,QPHW, 2C11642 12 CKT N/A G03 N/A G07 QHPX,QPGF, 18 CKT N/A G11 N/A G15 QPHGF, 30 CKT N/A G19 N/A G23 QPGFEP, 42 CKT N/A G27 N/A G31 QPHGFEP 48 CKT N/A G35 N/A G39 54 CKT N/A G43 N/A G47 72 CKT N/A G51 N/A G55 96 CKT N/A G59 N/A G63 Note:When determining branch circuit quantity,remember: 1. Quicklag breakers with shunt trips require one additional circuit. 2. UL listed lighting and appliance(CTL)panelboards cannot exceed 42 electrically connected circuits in a single enclosure. 3. When aluminum is specified,use the silver plated groups. 4. The sum of the horizontally twin mounted breakers shall not exceed 140 amperes. 5. Order breakers separately with connector kit. � r MEMNON 2C11642G03 2C11642G07 O Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent G-number that's needed. RP.38F.01.T.E F.' l*N Eaton I Electrical: Page 51 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 12 Effective: February2000 Panelboards "tel+ PRL2a Horizontally Mounted Connector Kit Assemblies GB,GHB,GHBS Breaker Assemblies Breaker Drawing Branch Circuit 3-phase 1•phase Frame Number0 quantity Tin Plated Silver Plated Tin Plated Silver Plated Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Item Number GB,GHB, 1C96609 12 CKT G01 G03 G05 G07 GHBS 18 CKT G09 G11 G13 G15 30 CKT G17 G19 G21 G23 42 CKT G25 G27 G29 G31 48 CKT G33 G35 G37 G39 54 CKT G41 G43 G45 G47 72 CKT G49 G51 G53 G55 96 CKT G57 G59 G61 G63 Note:When determining branch circuit quantity,remember: 1. Quicklag breakers with shunt trips require one additional circuit. 2. UL listed lighting and appliance(CTL)panelboards cannot exceed 42 electrically connected circuits in a single enclosure. 3. When bare copper is specified,use the silver plated groups. 4. Order breakers separately with connector kit. 4�'it I I�Y�w�i;�l II'ffi'd�iC��I;i� We�lglf p,lelfi�l�l�ll�i� � M f za 4� 1� g wi , 1C96609G01 O0 Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent G-number that's needed. F.T*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 52 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 13 PRL1a,2a Neutral Assemblies 100 Ampere Neutral Assemblies 10 Panel Main Neutral Lug Type Drawing Panel Lug Wire Size Quantity Tin Plated Silver Plated Bus Ampere Rating Number® Options(I Range Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Rating Item Number 100 100% Mechanical 1C96646 STD #14-1/0 1 G01 G03 SFUTFL #14-1/0 2 G05 G07 OVS #6-300 kcmil 1 G09 G11 Crimp 1C96647 STD #8-1/0 1 G01 G03 SFUTFL #8-1/0 2 G05 G07 OVS #4-300 kcmil 1 G09 G11 Copper 1C96648 STD #14-1/0 1 N/A G03 SFUTFL #14-1/0 2 N/A G07 OVS #6-250 kcmil 1 N/A G11 200% Mechanical 1C96649 STD #6-300 kcmil 1 G01 G03 SFUTFL #6-300 kcmil 2 G05 G07 OVS 4/0-500 kcmil 1 G09 G11 Crimp 1C96650 STD #4-300 kcmil 1 G01 G03 SFUTFL #4-300 kcmil 2 G05 G07 OVS 2/0-500 kcmil 1 G09 G11 Copper 1C96651 STD #6-250 kcmil 1 N/A G03 SFUTFL #6-250 kcmil 2 N/A G07 OVS 1/0-600 kcmil 1 N/A G11 1C96646G0f O The assemblies shown on this page are for panelboards that mount in 30 thru 90-inch high enclosures only.Reference Page 16 for assemblies for panel boards that mount in 21 thru 27-inch high enclosures. ® Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent G-number that's needed. ® STD=Standard Lugs. SFL/TFL=Sub-Feed and Thru-Feed Lugs. OVS=Oversize Lugs. RP.38F.01.T.E F=T*N Eaton Electrical: Page 53 of 112 l Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 14 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRL1a,2a Neutral Assemblies 225 Ampere Neutral Assemblies 10 Panel Main Neutral Lug Type Drawing Panel Lug Wire Size Quantity Tin Plated Silver Plated Bus Ampere Rating Number® Options% Range Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Rating Item Number 225 100% Mechanical 1C96649 STD #6-300 kcmil 1 G01 G03 SFUTFL #6-300 kcmil 2 G05 G07 OVS 4/0-500 kcmil 1 G09 G11 Crimp 1C96650 STD #4-300 kcmil 1 G01 G03 SFUTFL #4-300 kcmil 2 G05 G07 OVS 2/0-500 kcmil 1 G09 G11 Copper 1096651 STD #6-250 kcmil 1 N/A G03 SFUTFL #6-250 kcmil 2 N/A G07 OVS 1/0-600 kcmil 1 N/A G11 200% Mechanical 1C96652 STD 4/0-500 kcmil 2 G01 G03 SFUTFL N/A N/A G05 G07 OVS 3/0-750 kcmil 2 G09 G11 Crimp 1C96653 STD 2/0-500 kcmil 2 G01 G03 SFL/TFL N/A N/A G05 G07 OVS 500-750 kcmil 2 G09 G11 Copper 1096654 STD 1/0-600 kcmil 1 N/A G03 SFUTFL N/A N/A N/A G07 OVS 1/0-600 kcmil 1 N/A G11 1C96649G01 O The assemblies shown on this page are for panelboards that mount in 30 thru 90-inch high enclosures. (2) Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent G-number that's needed. (3) STD=Standard Lugs. SFL/TFL=Sub-Feed and Thru-Feed Lugs. OVS=Oversize Lugs. I!.l*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 54 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 15 PRL1a,2a Neutral Assemblies 400 Ampere Neutral Assemblies 10 Panel Main Neutral Lug Type Drawing Panel Lug Wire Size Quantity Tin Plated Silver Plated Bus Ampere Rating Number® Options® Range Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Rating Item Number 400 100% Mechanical 1C96652 STD 4/0-500 kcmil 2 G01 G03 SFUTFL N/A N/A G05 G07 OVS 3/0-750 kcmil 2 G09 G11 Crimp 1C96653 STD 2/0-500 kcmil 2 G01 G03 SFUTFL N/A N/A G05 G07 OVS 500-750 kcmil 2 G09 G11 Copper 1C96654 STD 1/0-600 kcmil 1 N/A G03 SFUTFL NIA N/A N/A G07 OVS 1/0-600 kcmil 1 N/A G11 1' ;H 1C96652G01 TO The assemblies shown on this page are for panelboards that mount in 30 thru 90-inch high enclosures. ® Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent G-number that's needed. m STD=Standard Lugs. SFUTFL=Sub-Feed and Thru-Feed Lugs. OVS=Oversize Lugs. RP.38F.01TE U=T*N Eaton Electrical: Page 55 of 112 l Renewal Partsffective: February 2000 CurrenPanelbCutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 16 EPRL1a,2a Neutral Assemblies 100 Ampere Neutral Assemblies for 21-through 27-Inch High Enclosures OnlyO Panel Main Neutral Lug Type Drawing Panel Lug Wire Size QuantityTin Plated Silver Plated Bus Ampere Rating Number® Options® Range Aluminum Connector Copper Connector Rating Item Number 100 100% Mechanical 1C96645 STD #14-1/0 1 G01 G03 SFUTFL #14-1/0 2 G05 G07 OVS N/A N/A N/A N/A Crimp N/A STD N/A N/A N/A N/A SFUTFL N/A N/A N/A N/A OVS N/A N/A N/A N/A Copper N/A STD NIA N/A N/A N/A SFUTFL N/A N/A N/A N/A OVS N/A N/A N/A N/A 200% Mechanical 1C97022 STD #6-300 kcmi1 1 G01 G03 SFUTFL #6-300 kcmil 2 G05 G07 OVS N/A N/A N/A N/A Crimp N/A STD N/A N/A N/A N/A SFUTFL N/A N/A N/A N/A OVS N/A N/A N/A N/A Copper N/A STD N/A N/A N/A N/A SFL/TFL N/A N/A N/A N/A OVS N/A N/A N/A N/A 1C96645G01 O The assemblies shown on this page are for panelboards that mount in 21-through 27-inch high enclosures only.Reference Page 13 for assemblies for panels that mount in 36,48,60,72,and 90-inch high enclosures. T Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent G-number that's needed. T STD=Standard Lugs. SFL/TFL=Sub-Feed and Thru-Feed Lugs. , OVS=Oversize Lugs. E,To N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 56 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 200 17 PRI-1a,2a Ground Assemblies Standard Ground Isolated Ground Drawing Enclosure Height Bar Item Drawing Enclosure Height Bar Item Number© in Inches Material Number NumberO in Inches Material Number 5158C05 24 Aluminum/Copper G01 2C11296 24 Aluminum/Copper G01 Copper G03 Copper G03 36,48,60, Aluminum/Copper G02 36,48,60, Aluminum/Copper G02 72,90 Copper G04 72,90 Copper G04 5158COSG01 5158C05G02 PRI-1a,2a Service Entrance Kits Drawing PanelTin Plated Bare Silver Plated Tin Plated Number0 Ampere Aluminum Copper Copper Copper Rating Item Number Mechanical Main Lugs or Main Breakers 4180662 100-225 G01 G02 G03 G04 4180662 400 G05 GO6 G07 GOS Compression(Crimp)Main Lugs 4180662 100-225 G09 G10 G11 G12 4180662 400 G13 G14 G15 G16 Copper Main Lugs 4180662 100-225 N/A G18 G19 G20 4180662 400 N/A G22 G23 G24 a18OB62Go1 t0 Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent G-number that's needed. (Example 5158C05G01). RP.38F.01.T.E ETON Eaton Electrical: Page 57 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 18 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRL1a,2a Deadfront Covers 10 Assembly Drawing standard Enclosure Height in Inches Number® 24 36 48 60 72 90 1C96638 I G01 I G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 Vertically Mounted Devices Mounting Device/Frame Drawing Mounting Item Arrangement Numberm Position Number Vertical 100A MLO,SFL,TFL or F-Frame 418OB03 Top H01 (100A Maximum) Bottom H01 225A MLO,SFL,TFL or F-Frame 418OB61 Top H01 (225A Maximum) Bottom H01 400A MLO,SFL,TFL or J-Frame 418OB04 Top H01 Bottom H02 400A MLO,TFL or K-Frame 418OB05 Top H01 Bottom H02 Blank Covers 1-Inch 4180808 N/A H01 2-Inch N/A H02 3-Inch N/A H03 4-Inch N/A H04 5-Inch N/A H05 6-Inch N/A H06 7-Inch N/A H07 8-Inch N/A H08 9-Inch N/A H09 10-Inch N/A H10 11-Inch N/A H11 12-Inch N/A H12 13-Inch N/A H13 14-Inch N/A H14 15-Inch N/A H15 16-Inch N/A H16 S 0 9 0 4180808H03 4180803H01 IC96638G01 O Does not apply to PRL4 sub-chassis. ® Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent G-number that's needed. (Example 1C96638G01). * Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent H-number that's needed. (Example 4180B031-101). E:T*N RP.38F.0131 Eaton I Electrical: Page 58 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 19 PRL1a,2a Deadfront Covers 10 Horizontally Mounted Devices Filler Covers Mounting Device/ Drawing Branch CKT Item Quantity Device/Frame Drawing Item Arrangement Frame Number® Quantity Number Required Number Number Horizontal BA,BAB,QBH, 1C96619 12 H01 1 F,J,K® 4180B52 H01 QBGF,QBHGF, 18 H02 1 Quicklag, 5155C62 H01 QBGFEP, 30 H04 1 GB,GHBO QBHGFEP 42 H06 1 48 H03 2 54 H03 and H04 1 Each 72 H05 2 96 H07 2 GB,GHB 1C96620 12 H01 1 18 H02 1 30 H04 1 42 H06 1 48 H03 2 54 H03 and H04 1 Each 72 H05 2 96 H07 2 i s %`. 515SC62H01 Wb r 00 All ff 1C96619H01 1C96620H01 418OB52H01 D0 Does not apply to PRL4 sub-chassis. I Order the basic drawing number,along with the equivalent H-number that's needed. (Example 1C966191-101). * Filler covers are required,in addition to deadfront cover,whenever MLO,SFL or TFL are specified. * Filler covers are required,in addition to deadfront cover,whenever a branch provision is specified. RP.38F.01.T.E E,:'[•N Eaton Electrical: Page 59 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 20 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards Panelboard Trim Locks Panelboard trims use different trim Satellite for availability on the styles locks,see picture below for styles and listed below,See Page 4 for Satellite part numbers.Contact your nearest listings. Description Catalog Number For use on left handed door.(Hinged on left side) K80522 For use on right handed door.(Hinged on right side) K80133 T-Handle lock,at one time used on all trims over 48 inches in height. K80429 Also used on outdoor NEMA 12/3r trims. Used on PRL4 lighting and power panels as standard. 1A32258H03 Used on PRL1,2,3 and PRL1a,2a,3a lighting panels as standard. 5155C81G01 WEM 2 key. Afi Y Y� K80522 K80133 K80429 „ az 1A32258H03 5155C81G01 E:'[*N RP.38F.O1.T.E Eaton(Electrical: Page 60 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 21 Panelboard Fastrim Clamps and Screw-on Hardware Kits Panelboard trims clamps.Contact your nearest Satellite for availability on the styles listed below,See Page 4 for Satellite listings. Description Style Number Trim clamps,used on PRL1a,2a,3a fastrims.(6 per bag) 2C11641G02 Trim screws,used on PRL1a,2a,3a,4B standard trim.(10 per bag) 5157C83G06 Chassis mounting hardware bag,PRL1a,2a,3a panels. 7499A48G04 L � p � 4 ' Si NIN IT '� '` \� .yF YXiIOR+Al6'l�r rd!kt4 Y §q A q u; W `..: n r 2C11641G02 5157C83G06 7499A48G04 RP.38F.01.T.E ETN Eaton I Electrical: Page 61 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 22 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRL3a Parts Section Page Connector Kits,Branch Breakers Quicklag. . .. .. . . .. ..... .. .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . . ... . .. . . . . . 23 GB,GHB,GHBS. ... . . . . . . . .... .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . ... . . .... . .. . . . .. . . . 23 Twin Mounted F-Frame 150 Ampere Maximum . ... . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . ... . . . 24 Single Mounted F-Frame 151-225 Ampere Maximum .. .. ... . .. .. . . . .. . .. 24 Ground Assemblies . . .. ... . .. .. ... .. . . . . .. . . . .. .. .... . .. .. .. . . ... . . . . 25 Service Entrance Kits .. ... . . ... . .. . .. .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . . . .. 25 Deadfront Covers . .... .... . . ...... .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. ... . .. . .. . . .. . 26,27,28 TrimLocks. . . . . . .. .. ... ... . . .. ... ... . . . . .. . . . ... . .. .. .. .. ... . ... .. . . 20 Trim Clamps and Hardware Bags. .. . . . . . . . .... . ... .. .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . 21 Ii:T*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 62 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 23 F . PRL3a Horizontally Mounted Connector Kit Assemblies Connector Kit Assemblies Devices CKTs or 3-phase 1-phaseNotes Pole Catalog Number Phase Catalog Number Phase BA,BAB,QBGF, 6 CKT KPRL3ABAO6 A/B/C KPRL3ABAO6-1 A/C (2)1O0A Devices Maximum QBH,QBHGF, 12 CKT KPRL3ABA12 A/B/C KPRL3ABA12-1 A/C (2)1O0A Devices Maximum QBGFEP, 18 CKT KPRL3ABA18 A/B/C KPRL3ABA18-1 A/C (2)1O0A Devices Maximum QBHGFEP 24 CKT KPRL3ABA24 A/B/C KPRL3ABA24-1 A/C (2)1O0A Devices Maximum GB,GHB, 6 CKT KPRL3AGBO6 A/B/C KPRL3AGBO6-1 A/C (2)1O0A Devices Maximum GHBS 12 CKT KPRL3AGB12 A/B/C KPRL3AGB12-1 A/C (2)1O0A Devices Maximum 18 CKT KPRL3AGB18 A/B/C KPRL3AGB18-1 A/C (2)1O0A Devices Maximum 24 CKT KPRL3AGB24 A/B/C KPRL3AGB24-1 A/C (2)1O0A Devices Maximum Three-phase kits contains A, B,and C tions to twin mount breakers across phase connectors.Single-phase kits from each other.Maximum amperes contains A and C phase connectors, connected to any one connector deadfront cover,hardware and instruc- cannot exceed 200 amperes. w. *si l#s KPRL3ABAO6 KPRL3AGBO6 RP.38F.O1.T.E ETN Eaton I Electrical: Page 63 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 24 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards IOWA, PRL3a F-Frame Horizontally Mounted Connector Kit Assemblies Connector Kit Assemblies Devices CKTs or 3-phase 1•phase Notes Pole Catalog Number Phase Catalog Number Phase EHD,FD,FDB, 3P BKR KPRL3AFD3 A/B/C N/A N/A (2)150A Devices Maximum HFD,FDC 2P BKR KPRL3AFD2 A/C KPRL3AFD2 A/C (2)150A Devices Maximum (150 Ampere Maximum Twin Mount) 1 P BKR KPRL3AFD1 A/C I KPRL3AFD1 A/C (2)150A Devices Maximum FD,HFD,FDC, 3P BKR KPRL3AED3 A/B/C N/A N/A (1)225A Maximum Single Mounted ED,EDH,EDC 2P BKR KPRL3AED2 A/C KPRL3AED2 A/C (1)225A Maximum Single Mounted (175-225 AmpereSingle Mount)O Connector kits contain phase connec- tors,deadfront cover,hardware,and « instructions to mount breakers.Order breakers separately when ordering connector kit. ) +�► -+ �+ KPRL3AFD3 C9 F-Frame devices rated above 150 amperes must be single mounted,no twin mounting acceptable. E:T*N RP.38F.013.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 64 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutter-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 25 PRL3a Ground Assemblies Material Standard Isolated Catalog Numbers Aluminum/Copper 5158C05G02 2C11296G02 Copper Only 5158C05G( 2C11296G04 5158C05G02 PRL3a Service Entrance Kits Style Panel Ampere Tin Plated Bare Silver Plated Tin Plated Number0 Rating Aluminum Copper Copper Copper Item Number Mechanical Main Lugs or Main Breakers 5078A98 100 G01 G02 G03 G04 250-600 G13 G14 G15 G16 Crimp Main Lugs [5078A98 100 G05 G06 G07 G08 250-600 G17 G18 G19 G20 Copper Main Lugs 5078A98 100 G09 G10 G11 G12 250-600 G21 G22 G23 G24 5078A98G01 Cid When ordering,use complete style number. (Example 100 Ampere Tin Plated Aluminum 5078A98G01). RP.38F.01.T.E Cir:T*N Eaton Electrical: Page 65 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 26 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRL3a Deadfront Covers Assembly D 7.. _ e Number® Chassis Height 14X 123X 31X 40X 53X 6559C59 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 6559C59G01 (1) Assembly groups include the frame only (two rails and two end covers).Reference Pages 27 and 28 for specific device covers. All connector kits ship with a deadfront cover for that device. T When ordering,use complete style number. (Example 14X High Assembly 6559C59G01). E:'[*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 66 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 27 PRL3a Vertical Devices Deadfront Covers Vertical Mounting Position Device/Frame Trip Unit Style "X"Space Item Number Type Number® Required Without Lock-offset With Lock-offs® EHD,FD,FDB,HFD, N/A 4176668 7X H01 H03 FDC,ED,EDH,EDC(Top)O EHD,FD,FDB,HFD, N/A 7X H04 H05 FDC,ED,EDH,EDC(Bottom)(D FD,HFD,FDC,ED,EDH(Top)® N/A 4180893 10X H01 H03 FD,HFD,FDC,ED,EDH(Bottom)® H04 H05 J-Frame(Bottom) N/A 4176B60 14X H01 H02 J-Frame(Top) 14X H03 H04 K-Frame(Bottom) Thermal-Mag. 4176B61 15X H01 H02 K-Frame(Bottom) Electronic 15X H03 H04 K-Frame(Top) Thermal-Mag. 15X H05 H06 K-Frame(Top) Electronic 15X H07 H08 L-Frame(Bottom) Thermal-Mag. 4176851 17X H01 H02 L-Frame(Bottom) Electronic 17X H03 H04 L-Frame(Top) Thermal-Mag. 17X H05 H06 L-Frame(Top) Electronic 17X H07 H08 FB-P(Top Only) N/A 4176870 9X H02 H02 LA-P(Top Only) N/A 4176B57 21 X H01 H01 FCL N/A 4176870 9X H01 H01 LCL(Top) N/A 4176B56 21X H01 H02 LCL(Bottom) N/A 21X H03 H04 Neutral/Blank Cover N/A 4176872 1 X H01 N/A 2X H02 3X H03 IAOW 4X H04 5X H05 6X H06 7X H07 8X H08 9X H09 10X H10 11X H11 12X H12 J-Frame Sub-Feed Twin Bottom N/A 4176879 20X H01 H02(2 L/O) H03(1 UO RT) H04(1 UO LT) J-Frame Sub-Feed Twin Top N/A 4176B79 20X H05 H05(2 UO) H07(1 UO RT) H08(1 UO LT) PT363(Top) N/A 4180879 7X H01 N/A PT363(Bottom) N/A 7X H02 PT364(Top) N/A 9X H03 PT364(Bottom) N/A 9X H04 T 410 Maximum acceptable terminal size. T 300 MCM maximum acceptable terminal size. ®When ordering covers,order complete style and item numbers,(Example 41766681-101). J Main 4176B60H04 Neutral Blank Cover4176B72H044 RP.38F.O1.T.E E' oN Eaton Electrical: Page 67 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 28 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRL3a Horizontal Devices Deadfront Covers Horizontal Mounting Position Device/Frame Device Style Total CKT "X"Space Item Poles NumberCn Quantity Required Number EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC 1,2 or 3 4178608 6 3X H01 (Twin Mounted) 12 6X H02 18 9X H03 24 12X H04 30 15X H05 36 18X H06 42 21X H07 48 24X H08 EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC 1 or 2 4179839 4 2X H01 (Twin Mounted) 8 4X H02 12 6X H03 16 8X H04 20 10X H05 24 12X H06 28 14X H07 32 16X H08 EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC 1 4179840 2 1X H01 (Twin Mounted) FD,HFD,FDC,ED,EDH, EDC 3 4179841 3 3X H01 (Single Mounted) FD,HFD,FDC,ED, EDH,EDC 2 4179842 2 2X H01 (Single Mounted) CA,CAH,HCA 3 4176866 3 3X H01 CA,CAH,HCA 2 4176880 2 2X H01 BA,BAB, 1,2 or 3 41761367 6 3X H01 QBH,QBGH, 12 5X H02 QBGFEP, 18 8X H03 QBHGFEP 24 10X H04 GB,GHB,GHBS 1,2 or 3 4176669 6 3X H01 12 5X H02 18 8X H03 24 10X H04 Pow-R-Command Controller N/A 4180891 N/A 5X H01 Pow-R-Command Expansion N/A 4180891 N/A 7X H02 16X H03 PRL3a Deadfront Cover Blank Fillers Device/Frame Poles Style Number F-Frame 1,2 or 3 4178B061-101 C-Frame 2 6555C40H01 C-Frame 3 6555C41 H01 Quicklag,GB,GHB,GHBS 1,2 or 3 5155C62H01 BAB Cover4176B67H01 W0 When ordering covers,order complete style and item number,(Example 4178B08H01). Ei.kT*N RP.38F.O1.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 68 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 29 PRL4B/F Parts Section Page Vented Cover Assemblies and Side Gutter Covers . .. . .. . . . . ....... .. . . . . . . 30 PRL4 Blank Covers . . .. . .. . . ... . ... .. .. ... . ... . . . . .. . . .. . . . ... . . . . ... . 31 PRL4 Breaker Connector Kits. ... . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . ... 32 PRL4 Fusible FDPW Switch Connector Kit ... .. . . . ... . . . . . .. . .... .. . .. .. . . 33 PRL4 Breaker Retrofit Kits ... . . . ... ... .. . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . ..... .. . . ... . . . . 34 PRL4 Fusible Retrofit Kits.... . . . . .. ... . .. . . . .. . . ... . . . . .. .. . . . .. . ... . . . 34 PRL4 Energy Sentinel. ... . . . . . . . . . .. ... ... . .. . . . . . .. . .. ...... . . .. .. . . . 35 PRL1a,2a, 3a and PRL4 Special Trims and Enclosures. .. . ... . .. .. . . . .... 36,37 RP.38F.O1.T.E E.' *N Eaton Electrical: Page 69 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Page 30 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards Cutler-Hammer PRL4 Vented Cover Assemblies Nameplate Top Vented Cover 71 �� , .4 � yin �K.a �p '�•. r � Blank Cover X� � k Side Gutter Covers i a y k� Extension Wings s Q s z- Device Cover Bottom Vented Cover PRL4B PRL4F Vented Cover Assemblies and Side Gutter Covers NEMA 1 Box Vented Cover Side Gutter Covers Dimensions(inches) Catalog Assembly®Style Number Left Right Height Width De thT Number 9 P Size Style Size Style (inches) Number (inches) Number 57 24 10.4 BX2457 6574C74G02 5 X 57 6555C20H01 5 X 57 6555C201-101 73 24 10.4 BX2473 6574C74G03 5 X 73 655513211-101 5 X 73 6555C211-101 90 24 10.4 BX2490 6574C74G04 5 X 90 655513251-101 5 X 90 6555C25H01 73 36 10.4 BX3673 6574C74G05 6 X 73 655513221-101 8 X 73 6555C23H01 90 36 10.4 BX3690 6574C74G06 6 X 90 655513261-101 8 X 90 6555C271-101 73 44 10.4 BX4473 6574C74G05 8 X 73 6555C23H01 14 X 73 6555C24H01 90 44 10.4 BX4490 6574C74G06 8 X 90 6555C27H01 14 X 90 6555C28H01 [O Covers add.90 inches to box depth for overall enclosure depth of 11.30 inches. T Cover Assembly consists of 2 side rails, top and bottom vented covers. Important:Order individual device covers and blanks separately. E:T*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 70 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 31 PRL4 Blank Covers Used to cover blank space on chassis. ;I Neutral All PRL4 cover heights are measured in "X"units. 1X equals 1.375 inches. Cover Size Style Number 24-inch Width Box 36,44-inch Width Box 1200A MLO 1X 6554C0lH0l 6554CO21-101 2X 6554C011-102 6554CO21-102 3X 6554C01H03 6554CO21-103 4X 6554C011113 6554CO21-113 5X 6554C011-114 6554CO21-114 6X 6554C011-104 6554CO21-104 7X 6554C01H05 6554CO21-105 9X 6554C01H06 6554CO21-106 w " Twin Mounted lox 6554C011,1077 65546554CO21-107 «'* Breakers 11X 6554C01H08 656554CO21,108 �Mllf "ir tr"• �•> 12X 6554C011-109 6554CO21-109 13X 6554C0lH10 6554CO21-110 ' 15X 6554C0lHll 6554CO2H11 _ , Single Mounted 20X 6554C011-112 6554CO21-112 Breakers x q ti i r+ k "sa I� Breaker Provision Space Only PRL4B Interior RP.38F.01.T.E E:t*N Eaton I Electrical: Page 71 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 32 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRL4 Breaker Connector Kits Breaker Space Re uired Poles P q Type Connector kit Breaker Connector Kits Frames Inches "X,• Mounting Catalog Number Each kit includes copper connectors, EHD,FD,HFD 2.75 2X 11 Twin KPRL4FD1 mounting brackets,covers,hardware EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC 2 Twin KPRL4FD2 and instructions for mounting breaker(s) ED,EDH,EDC 2 Twin KPRL4ED2 in a PRL4.Breakers are not included. Contact your local Satellite plant for EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC 4.125 3X 3 Twin KPRL4FD availability and application information. FCL,FB-P,FD/LFD 3 Twin KPRL4FBP ED,EDH,EDC 3 Twin KPRL4ED JD,JDB,HJD,JDC 2,3 Single KPRL4JDS JD,JDB,HJD,JDC 2,3 Twin KPRL4JDTM DK,KD,KDB,HKD,KDC 5.50 4X 2,3 Single KPRL4KDS DK,KD,KDB,HKD,KDC 2,3 Twin KPRL4KDTm CKD,CHKD 2,3 Single KPRL4CKD0 LCL 8.25 6X 2,3 Single KPRL4LCL® LA-P 2,3 Single KPRL4LAP® LD,LDB,HLD,LDC,CLD,LC 2,3 Single KPRL4LD® MDL,HMDL 2,3 Single KPRL4MC® NB-P 2,3 Single KPRL4NBPM CND,CHND 3 Single KPRL4CNDT* ND,HND 2,3 Single KPRL4ND® Connector Kit Hardware Kit Standard Ground Bus Each kit includes copper connectors Each kit includes mounting bracket(s) Copper bus with(3)6-300 MCM lugs mounting brackets,cover,hardware and mounting hardware only.Use the plus an 24 circuit terminal bar with# and instructions. appropriate Connector Kit catalog 14-1/0 wire range. number and add an"H"to designate hardware only.(Example:KPRL4FD-H). z r ` i(I =v Q,,n�liil d`ri eka r` 6572C74G01 r� fit, a .a O Two sets of twin mounted 1-pole breakers. ® 36-inch minimum box width required. m 44-inch box width required. ® Requires density rated bus in existing panel chassis. 6:'[o N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 72 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 33 PRL4 Fusible Connector Kits Switch Height Switch 3P FDPW Connector Kit Fusible FDPW Connector Kits Inches "X"S ace Am ere Rating 240V Requird st10V P Space Each kit includes copper connectors, Catalog Numbers extension wings(when required), hardware and instructions to mount an 5.50 4X 30-30 FDPWT3211 R FDPWT3611 R - FDPW switch.Switches are not 60-60 FDPWT3222R FDPWT3622R KPRL44XT included.Contact your local Satellite 100-100 FDPWT3233R N/A - plant for availability and application 6.875 5X 100 FDPWS323R FDPWS363R KPRL45XST information. 100-100 N/A FDPWT3633R KPRL45XT 8.25 6X 200 FDPWS324R FDPWS364R KPRL46XT 200-200 FDPWT3244R FDPWT3644J KPRL4W6XT© 12.38 9X 400 FDPW 325R FDPW365R KPRL4W9X 15.13 11X 600 FDPW326R FDPW366R KPRL4W11X 800 FDPW327 FDPW367 KPRL4W11X© 20.63 15X 1200 FDPW328 FDPW368 KPRL4W15X© P 44-inch box width required for both R and J fuse applications. T These connector kits will fit the FDP and FDPW switches. R13.3817.01.T.E FART*N Eaton Electrical: Page 73 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 34 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRL4 Breaker and Fusible Switch How to order a Breaker Retrofit Kit by indicates that one set of connectors is Retrofit Kits Catalog Number required to mount two breakers(of Use"KPRL4"prefix and add catalog similar frames)opposite one another. Breaker Retrofit Kits number of breaker as shown below. RETROFIT KIT INCLUDES ONE Each kit includes ONE breaker,copper Use suffix of"T"or"S"to denote twin BREAKER ONLY,FOR EITHER SINGLE connectors,covers,hardware and or single mounting.Twin mounting OR TWIN MOUNTED APPLICATIONS. instructions to mount in a PRL4. Example:The Retrofit Kit catalog Breaker Frame Trip TyA�olnumber for a 3-pole,400A,KD breaker, Frame Ampere Range Mnsingle mounted is: Rating EDD 100 15-100 Twin KPRL43 400 S FDB 15-100 Twin IT HF 15-100 Twin Designates Breaker 2=2-Pole Amperage T=Twin HFC 15-100 Twin FDC 15-100 Twin KPRL4 Frame 3=3-Pole S=Single FCL 15-100 Twin Connector Kit FB-P 15-100 Twin FDB 150 110-150 Twin FD 225 110-225 Twin HFD 110-225 Twin . FDC 110-225 Twin ED 100-225 Twin EDH 100-225 Twin xr t EDC 100-225 Twin JD 250 70-250 Twin/Single "" r HUD 70-250 Twin/Single x.. JDC 70-250 Twin/Single DK 400 100-400 Twin/Single KD 100-400 Twin/Single HKD 100-400 Twin/Single w..- KDC 100-400 Twin/Single 1 CKD 100-400 Single LCL 125-400 Single LA-P 70-400 Single ,. .G. LD 600 300-600 Single Breaker Retrofit Kit CLD 300-600 Single HLD 300-600 Single Fusible Retrofit Kits g Switch Ampere Switch Type of CHILD 300-600 Single Each kit includes a 3 pole switch, Rating Type Mounting LDC 300-600 Single copper connectors,extension wings CLDC 300-600 Single (if required),hardware and instructions 30-30 FDPW Twin MDL 800 300-800 Single to horizontally mount in a PRL4. 60-60 FDPW Twin 100-100 FDPW Twin CMDL 300-800 Single How to order a Fusible Retrofit Kit b 100 FDPW Single CHMDL 300-800 Single g CMDL 300-800 Single y Catalog Number 200 FDPW Single Use "KPRL4" prefix and add catalog 200-200 FDPW Twin ND 1200 600-1200 Single 400 FDPW Single CND 600-1200 Single number of appropriate switch(refer 600 FDPW Single HND 600-1200 Single to Page 33 for 3-pole switch catalog 800 FDPW Single CHND 600-1200 Single number). 1200 FDPW Single NDC 600-1200 Single Example:The Retrofit Kit catalog CNDC 600-1200 Single number for a 600V, 100A twin FDPW switch is: KPRL4 FDPW IT 3 6 33 R Designates FDPW T=Twin 3=3-Pole 2=240V 11 =30-30 R=R fuse PRL4 S=Single 6=600V 22=60-60 J=J Fuse Connector 33= 100-100 T=T Fuse 44=200-200 4 =200 5=400 6=600 7=800 8=1200 6:'t*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 74 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 35 PRL4 Energy Sentinel All that is necessary to complete an IQ Energy Sentinel installation is to insert it into the load side of a breaker,feed the load conductors through it,and run the shielded twisted pair wire for communications.The IQ Energy Senti- nel has a nonvolatile memory, is pow- « _ ered by the circuit breaker,and can be applied on three-phase,four-wire or zx single-phase,three-wire systems. . The space savings design characteris- tics of the IQ Energy Sentinel means they can be quickly and easily retrofit- , ted onto Series C circuit breakers in existing equipment...with no addi- Energy Sentinel tional space required.Additionally, The IQ Energy Sentinel is a submeter- IQ Energy Sentinel can be installed VIII U M • s ing device that mounts directly on a when upgrading to Series C from older y' circuit breaker and monitors both breakers that are physically inter- power and energy with an overall changeable...with no additional space accuracy of 99%. required. This high system accuracy is achieved Power and energy information from IQ by use of the Cutler-Hammer SURE Energy Sentinels can be communi- Plus Chip,which is a sophisticated cated to a PC,a panel mounted Central micro-processor. Energy Display(CED),or even existing building management or distribution control systems. Series C Voltage AC Maximum Energy Sentinel BreakerFrame Amperes Catalog Number F 120/208,120/240 150 IQESF208 F 277/480 150 IQESF480 J 120/208,120/240 250 IQESJ208 J 277/480 250 IQESJ480 K 120/208,120/240 350 IQESK208 K 277/480 350 IQESK480 IQ Central Energy Display The IQ Central Energy Display may be panel mounted or located remotely(up to 7500 feet away). It displays power, peak demand,and energy readings of up to fifty IQ Energy Sentinels and eight IQ Data Plus meters. Additional capabilities include:peak demand alarming,demand and energy totals for groups of IQ Energy Senti- nels and IQ Data Plus 11 digital meters. Refer to your local Satellite for retrofit and upgrade options available for existing equipment. Refer to publication PG.17.01.TE for product data. RP.38F.01.T.E E:t*N Eaton j Electrical: Page 75 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 36 Effective: February2000 Panelboards PRL1a,2a, 3a Special Trims and Fastrim Door-In-Door Enclosures Used when concealed trim mounting Piano hinge on the right side of the Ventilated Trim hardware is required for PRL1a,2a and trim provides access to the wiring gut- PRL3a.Trim clamps are included and ters without requiring removal of the Required on PRL1a,2a,3a,600A and shipped with the trim.Order by adding trim.Order by adding the letters"DD" above panels only.Order by adding the letter"F"to the standard trim cata- to the standard trim catalog number. the letter"V"to the standard trim cata- log number.ADD 20%TO STANDARD ADD 20%TO STANDARD TRIM LIST log number.ADD 10%TO STANDARD TRIM LIST PRICE. PRICE. TRIM LIST PRICE. Example:LT2072S becomes LTV2072S. Example:LT2072S becomes LTF2072S. Example:LT2072S becomes LTDD2072S. For trim clamps only refer to Page 21. p Type 12/311 Enclosures The complete enclosure consists of a hinges and a T-handle lock.Gasketing box and trim.The enclosure meets is provided around the trim door.The g% code requirements for both Type12 box is gasketed and made from code I (dust-tight)and Type 3R(rainproof) gauge steel with dripshield and is standards.Features include a laser cut painted ANSI-61. trim with rounded corners,concealed Type 12/311 Enclosures for PRL1a,2a,3a Box Dimensions(Inches) Catalog Numbers Height Width Depth Box Trim 24 20 6 VWPB2024 LWPT2024 36 20 6 VWPB2036 LWPT2036 48 20 6 VWPB2048 LWPT2048 60 20 6 VWPB2060 LWPT2060 72 20 6 VWPB2072 LWPT2072 90 20 6 VWPB2090 LWPT2090 F:T*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 76 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 37 PRL4 Special Trims and Enclosures A piano hinge on the right side of the An extra depth box,not requiring a trim provides access to the wiring gut- mounting channel,is another available Door-In-Door Trim ter without requiring the removal of option.Contact your local Satellite for the trim.When used with a standard ordering information. m)Y PRL4 box,a special mounting channel must be used to add extra depth to the enclosure. Standard Box Mounting Channel Door-In-Door Trim Catalog Number Catalog Number Style Number Surface I Flush fyq'' BX2457 6571C19G09 LDD2457STW LDD2457FTW BX2473 6571C19G10 LDD2473STW LDD2473FTW BX2490 6571C19G11 LDD2490STW LDD249OFTW BX3673 6571C19G12 LDD3673STW LDD3673FTW BX3690 6571C19G13 LDD3690STW LDD3690FTW BX4473 6571C19G14 LDD4473STW LDD4473FTW BX4490 6571C19G15 LDD4490STW LDD4490FTW Type 12/3R Enclosures i, f, i,lllil Type 12 enclosure,24-inch wide Type 3R enclosure,36-inch wide PRL4 enclosures are available in both "nclemension(Inches) Catalog Number Type 12(dust-tight)and Type 3R(rain- width Depth Type 3R Type 12 proof)designs.The 24-inch wide enclosure includes a single hinged door 57 24 13.90 RPC2457 DPC2457 while the 36-inch wide is provided with 73 24 13.90 RPC2473 DPC2473 double hinged doors.The side gutter covers are an integral part of the box in 90 24 13.90 RPC2490 DPC2490 all styles.Sizes and catalog numbers 73 36 13.90 RPC3673 DPC3673 are shown in the table at the right. 90 36 13.90 RPC3690 DPC3690 RP.38F.013 E F.,T*N Eaton I Electrical: Page 77 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 38 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRLSP Parts Section Page PRLSP Chassis Layout . .. . . . .. . . .... . ... .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. .. ... ... .. .. . .. 39 PRLSP Breaker Adapter Unit Catalog Numbers.. .. .. . . ... . . ... . . . .. .. .. . .. 40 PRLSP Branch Breaker Information. ...... . . . .... ... ... .. . ... .. ... . ... 41,42 PRLSP Main or Feed-Through Lugs .... ... . .... ... . . ... . . .. .. ... . .. ... .. 43 PRLSP Neutrals and Grounds ... . . .. . . .. . . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. .... .. 44 PRLSP Boxes,Trims and Filler Plates .. . . .. . .. . . ... .. . .. .. ..... ... . .. .. . . 45 Ordering Procedure Step 1 Select the correct part or Branch Device. When selecting,you need to know the following: • Panelboard type • Amperage • System voltage • Available short circuit rating • Number of poles available Size and number of wires per phase "X"space required Step 2 Refer to the 5P panelboard layout on Page 39 to verify the amount of"X" space available. Step 3 Create a 5P breaker unit catalog number,by following the instructions on Page 40,or order the catalog number for parts on Pages 43 through 45. Step 4 Determine if extra filler covers are required.Additional filler covers may be necessary to fill the unused space. Refer to Page 45 for filler plate information. E.l*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 78 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 39 PRLSP Chassis Layout Dimensions in Inches(mm) Double-Bus Interior Mounted in Single-Bus Interior in 48-inch(1219.2 mm)Wide Enclosure 30-inch(762.0 mm)Wide Enclosure 48 30 (1219.2) 10 (762.0) 10 (254.0) (254.0) Neutral—No"X"Space Required Neutral—No"X"Space Required Top or Bottom Top or Bottom 2X 2-Pole 2-Pole 2X 2-Pole 2X _ EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC,ED,EDH,EDC EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC,ED,EDH,EDC EHD,ED,EDH,EDC,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC 3-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 2-Pole EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC.EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC, 2X 3X EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC, EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,FDC, 3X ED,EDC,EDH ED,EDC,EDH _ ED,EDH,EDC ED,EDH,EDC 3-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole '-Pole FDB.ED.HFD,FDC, FDB,ED,HFD.FDC, 3X 2X EHD,FD,FDB,HFD.EHD,FD,FDB,HFD, Blank W Ireway® 2X EHD.EDC,FD EHD,EDC,FD FDC,ED,EDH,EDC FDC ED EDH.EDC - - 2-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2X Blank Wireway® EHD,FD,FDB,HFD,EHD,FD,FDB,HFD, 2X _ FDC,ED EDH EDC FDC ED.EDH EDC EHD,ED,FDB,HFD,FDC, 3X 3-Pole 3-Pole ED,EDH,EDC 3X FDB.EDH,HFD,FDC,IFDO,EDH,HFD,FDC. Blank Wireway® 3X ED,END,EDC,FD ED,EHD.EDC,FD 2 or 3-Pole JD,HJD,JDC 3X 4X Filler Plate 2-or 3-Pole 4X Bus Cover® 1 X-6X DK,KD,HKD,KDB 2-or 3-Pole(l) 2-or 3-Pole DK,KD,HKD,KDB 4X 3X JD,HJD,JDC 2-or 3-Pole Main or Branch HLD,LDC,LD 6X — 3X Filler Plate 2-or 3-Pole0 — LD,HLD,LDC 6X Main or Branch 800A MDL,HMDLM 6X Main or Branch 6X 800A MDL,HMDL t0 Main Only 6X 6X 800A ND,HND,NDC 10 6X — Main or Branch 400A,600A and 800A Main Lug or Branch LugOO 400A,(1)750 kcmil or(2)300 kcmil 8X 600A,(2)750 kcmil 1200A ND,HND,NDC(l) 800(3)600 kcmil 6X Main or Branch 6X 7 10 — (177.8) 254.0) (254.0) Main Lug or Branch Lug Unit 600A,(2)600 kcmil 7X 800A,(3)800 kcmil 7X 1200A,(4)750 kcmil 10 10 (254.0) 10 (254.0) (254.0) 0 If used as a main device,must be mounted at the neutral end of panel. DJ Fixed bus covers are required for unused spaces if NEC six circuit disconnect rule is to be met. Q Blank wireway fillers are required opposite any dual breaker unit. One"X"=1.375 inches. RP.38F.01 TE Er:T*N Eaton Electrical: Page 79 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 40 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRLSP Breaker Assemblies Catalog Numbers 51P Single or Twin Breakers with Adapters 513 FD 3 0060 M S B Panelboard Breaker Phasing Ampere Trip Unit Mounting Connection 2=AC Rating E=Electronic S=Single B=Branch 3=ABC G=Ground Fault T=Twin C=Combination 4 =ABL or BCR M=Thermal Magnetic M=Main 5=BCL or ABR A plug-on unit is a complete assembly Single indicates units that may be with a circuit breaker and mounting mounted in a single or double bus adapter to mount on a 5P panelboard. panel,and twin indicates double bus panels only.See Table 1. 5P Dual Breakers with Adapters 5P 3 EDH 200 FDB 060 –1—i I L---� 11 Panelboard Phasing Breaker Amperes Breaker Amperes 2=AC Frame Frame 3=ABC 4=ABL or BCR 5=BCL or ABR Any two F-Frame breakers listed may Dual breaker adapters may be used be mounted on the same 2X or 3X dual in single or double bus panels. Dual breaker adapter. breaker adapters can NOT be mounted across from another adapter in a double bus panel.See Table 2 and Page 39. "? Cir:T*N RP.38F.0131 Eaton I Electrical: Page 80 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Effective: February 2000 Renewal Parts Panelboards Page 41 Table 1-Branch Devices Single-pole breakers in single adapter units. Include two or three single-pole 15 through 60 ampere assembled on one unit. (One X=1.375 inches) Single-Pole Breakers in Single Adapter Units Breaker Ampere Interrupting Rating(kA Sym.) "X"Space Type Rating 120 Vac 240 Vac 277 Vac 125 Vdc Required EHD 15-60 - - 14 10 2X FD 15-60 - - 25 10 2X HFD 15-60 - - 65 10 2X EHD 15-60 - - 14 10 3X FD 15-60 - - 25 10 3X HFD 15-60 - - 65 10 3X Two-and Three-Pole Breakers in Single Adapter Units Breaker Ampere Interrupting Rating(kA Sym.) "X"Space Type Rating 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc Required ED 100-225 65 - - - 3X EDH 100-225 100 - - - 3X EDC 100-225 200 - - - 3X EHD 15-60 18 14 - 10 3X EHD 70-100 18 14 - 10 3X FD 15-60 65 25 18 10 3X FD 70-100 65 25 18 10 3X FD 110-225 65 25 18 10 3X HFD 15-60 100 65 25 22 3X HFD 70-100 100 65 25 22 3X HFD 110-225 100 65 25 22 3X FDC 15-60 200 100 35 22 3X FDC 70-100 200 100 35 22 3X FDC 110-225 200 100 35 22 3X JD,JDB 70-225 65 35 18 10 3X JD,JDB 250 65 35 18 10 3X HJD 70-225 100 65 25 22 3X HJD 250 100 65 25 22 3X JDC 70-225 200 100 35 22 3X JDC 250 200 100 35 22 3X DK 100-400 65 - - - 4X KD,KDB 250-400 65 35 25 10 4X HKD 250-400 100 65 35 22 4X KDC 250-400 200 100 50 22 4X LD,LDB 300-600 65 35 25 22 6X HLDW 300-600 100 65 35 25 6X LDC 300-600 200 100 50 25 6X MDLO® 400-800 65 50 25 22 6X HMDL t0® 400-800 100 65 35 25 6X ND 400-1200 65 50 25 - 6X HND10® 400-1200 100 65 35 - 6X NDC 400-1200 200 100 50 - 6X F0 For use only in double bus chassis panel- boards. ® 100%rated breakers are NOT available in 5P panelboards. RP.38F.O1.T.E E.IlT ON Eaton I Electrical: Page 81 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 42 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards 10"Ilk, Table 2-Branch Devices Dual breaker adapters maybe used in Dual Breaker Adapters-Any two single or double bus chassis. Dual breakers listed below may be mounted breaker adapters can NOT be mounted on the same 2X or 3X dual breaker across from another in a double bus adapter. chassis.(One X=1.375 inches) Dual Breaker Adapters Breaker Ampere Interrupting Rating(kA Sym.) 'W'Space Type Rating 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 250 Vdc Required ED 100-225 65 - - - 3X EDH 100-225 100 - - - 3X EDC 100-225 200 - - - 3X EHD 15-60 18 14 - 10 3X EHD 70-100 18 14 - 10 3X FD 15-60 65 25 18 10 3X FD 70-100 65 25 18 10 3X FD 110-225 65 25 18 10 3X HFD 15-60 100 65 25 22 3X HFD 70-100 100 65 25 22 3X HFD 110-225 100 65 25 22 3X FDC 15-60 200 100 35 22 3X FDC 70-100 200 100 35 22 3X FDC 110-225 200 100 35 22 3X +e 'job ._.. : t. = SPFD3006OMSB 5P3EDH2O0FDB060 E.l*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 82 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 43 PRLSP Main or Feed-through Lugs Description Ampere Wire Size "X"Space Catalog Rating Range Required Number Single Bus Chassis Mounting 1400 Ampere Lug Unit 400 (1)1/0-500 or(2)1/0-250 kcmil 8X 5PLUG3400SC 600 Ampere Lug Unit 600 (2)1/0-500 kcmil 8X 5PLUG3600SC 800 Ampere Lug Unit 800 (2)#2-500 or(3)#2-400 kcmil 8X 5PLUG3800SC Double Bus Chassis Mounting 1200 Ampere Lug Unit 600-1200 (4)#4-750 kcmil 7X 5PLUG31200TC i �•^ =a 5PLUG3800SC SPLUG31200TC RP.38F.01.T.E F:t*N Eaton I Electrical: Page 83 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 44 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards " PRL5P Neutrals and Grounds Neutral Assemblies Incoming Number of Cables Catalog Neutral Assembly and Wire Size Number Neutral Assemblies with Lugs (4)250-500 kcmil 800 Amperes Aluminum/Copper 5PN800A (4)250-500 kcmil 800 Amperes Copper 5PN800C (4)250-500 kcmil 1200 Amperes Aluminum/Copper 5PN1200A (4)250-500 kcmil 1200 Amperes Copper 5PN1200C Additional Lugs for Neutral Assemblies tea' ' 4 Description Catalog Number _[ (1)1/0-750 kcmil or(2)1/0-300 kcmil Aluminum/Copper 5PNL400 (2)250-500 kcmil Aluminum/Copper 5PNL600 (3)3/0-750 kcmil Aluminum/Copper 5PNL800 SPN800A (4)3/0-750 kcmil Aluminum/Copper 5PNL1200 Ground Bar Type 1200 Amperes Aluminum/Copper 5PG1200A 1200 Amperes Copper 5PG1200C Ground Bar Assemblies Grounded"B"Phase Adapter Kits Ampere Main Catalog Rating Device Number Single Bus Chassis 400 Main Lugs 5PCGBLUG400S w~ 600 Main Lugs 5PCGBLUG600S 800 LD Breaker 5PCGBLD600S Main Lugs 5PCGBLUG800S Double Bus Chassis 800 MD Breaker 5PCGBMD800T 1200 Main Lugs 5PCGBLUG1200T ND Breaker 5PCGBND1200T r i SPG 1200A E:T*N RP.38F.01.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 84 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 45 PROP Box,Trim and Deadfront Filler Plates Chassis Catalog Numbers "X"Factor Back Box Trim Trim Door Kit Single Bus Chassis-30-Inch Wide Box 24X 5PB2430G 5PT2430S 5PD24S 32X 5PB323OG 5PT3230S 5PD32S 40X 5PB403OG 5PT4030S 5PD40S Double Bus Chassis-48-Inch Wide Box 24X 5PB2448G 5PT2448S 5PD24T 32X 5PB324BG 5PT3248S 5PD32T 40X 5PB4048G 5PT4048S 5PD40T Deadfront Filler Plates Vertical"X" Catalog Number Increment Single bus Chassis© Double Bus Chassis 1X 5PFP1S 5PFP1T 2X 5PFP2S 5PFP2T 3X 5PFP3S 5PFP3T 4X 5PFP4S 5PFP4T 5X 5PFP5S 5PFP5T 6X 5PFP6S 5PFP6T r F i 4 e � 5PT2430S 5PD24S 5PFP3S 5PFP3T O These fillers are also used across from a breaker unit in a double bus chassis. RP.38F.O1.T.E F:T*N Eaton Electrical: Page 85 of 112 Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 46 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards PRL1a,2a-LX Type 1 Box and Trims , Box Height Catalog Numbers (Inches) Box Box Trim Surface Trim Surface Trim ' s Standard Door-In-Door w. - a Incoming Location Top Fed 69 YSC969 LTC969S LTCD969S 78 YSC978 LTC978S LTCD978S 81 YSC981 LTC981S LTCD981S ' 90 YSC990 LTC990S LTCD990S Incoming Location Bottom Fed 69 YSC969 LTC969SB LTCD969SB 78 YSC978 LTC978SB LTCD978SB 81 YSC981 LTC981SB LTCD981SB 90 YSC990 LTC990SB LTCD990SB x ri:T*N RP.38F.O1.T.E Eaton I Electrical: Page 86 of 112 Cutler-Hammer Current Cutler-Hammer Renewal Parts Panelboards Effective: February 2000 Page 47 Pow-R-Command N , Pow-R-Command Parts ' For replacement parts,see PRL3a f, - Section,Page 22.Parts available are the following: t s Connector Kits ' *mss x ' Ground Assemblies . Service Entrance Kits ;x Deadfront Covers Trim Locks c n a.>dr at RP.38F.O1.T.E U=T*N Eaton Electrical: Page 87 of 112 l Renewal Parts Current Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Page 48 Effective: February 2000 Panelboards a Additional Services Since virtually all panelboards are supplied to meet specific customers requirements,other parts not listed in this publication might occasionally be needed.Price and availability for parts not shown here may be obtained by contacting your local Satellite Plant and providing a complete description of the part along with the data on the panelboard nameplate. Should you experience difficulty in determining what replacement parts are needed,contact your local Satellite Uj Plant Manager who can provide help to: 5 LL Identify and recommend CO replacement parts. o Remove damaged parts and instruct you in how to install replacement parts. Verify the correct connector kits which should be ordered for each circuit breaker or fusible switch. Retrofit existing panelboard boxes with new Pow-R-Line interiors. Provide a recommended spare parts list. Cutler-Hammer Prime.in U.S.A. F=T*N Printed in U. /Z00109 l Eaton(Electrical: Page 88 of 112 General Information Service Voltage: 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W Enclosure: Type 1 Bus Rating&Type: 225A Copper Neutral Rating: 225A Ground Bar: Std.Bolted Copper,Cu cable only S.C.Rating: 10k A.I.C.Fully Rated Blank Cover Main Device Type: Main Breaker-Bottom Cable Entry 3 inches Main Terminals: Mechanical-(1)#14-4/0(Cu/AI) Neutral Terminals: Mechanical-(1)#6-300 kcmil(Cu/AI) Box Catalog No.: YS2042 Trim: Standard Trim(LT2042S) 1 3AB3060H BAB2060 2 Surface Mounted 3 4 Box Dimensions: 42"[1066.8mm]H x 20"[508.Omm]W x 5.75"[146.Omm]D Min.Gutter Size: Top=5.5"[139.7mm]Bottom=5.5"[139.7mm] 5 BAB2050 6 Left=6.0"[152.4mm]Right=6.0"[152.4mm] 7 3AB3030H 8 Panel ID Nameplate: (1)LG 9 BAB3025H 1 Type: Plastic,adhesive-backed (2)208Y/120V 3Ph 4W Color: Black with White Letters (3) 1 1 NEC Lighting&Appliance,UL CTL —Non-Interchangeable Main Device- 3 BAB2030 1 5 BAB2020 1 Copper Neutral 7 BAB2020 1 Trim Lock:Standard Latch&Lock Circuit Directory:Plastic Sleeve with Card s BAB1020 2 1 BAB1020 BAB1020 2 3 BAB1020 BAB1020 2 5 PROV PROV z 7 PROV PROV 2 s 1 PROV PROV 3 Main Breaker 225A ED3225, Vert Mtd. Device Modifications: Branch Devices Ref# Description Qty Poles Trip Frame Amps KAIC 5 1 20 BAB 100 10 1 2 50 BAB 100 10 1 2 60 BAB 100 10 1 2 30 BAB 100 10 2 2 20 BAB 100 10 1 3 60 BAB 100 10 1 3 30 BAB 100 10 1 3 25 BAB 100 10 6 1 PROV Notes The information on this PREPARED BY DATE document is created by Eaton James,Curtis 08/29/05 Eaton Corporation Corporation.It is disclosed _ in confidence and it is only APPROVED BY DATE JOB NAME Atlantic Beach City Hall to be used for the purpose in 08/29/05 DESIGNATION LG Which it is supplied. VERSION TYPE DRAWING TYPE 5.1 PRL1a Final NEG-ALT NUMBER REVISION DWG SIZE G.O. ITEM SHEET JV7001203503-0000 A SJV82994 0041 1 OF 1 Eaton Electrical: Page 91 of 112 General Information Service Voltage: 208Y/120V 3Ph 4W Enclosure: Type 1 Bus Rating&Type: 100A Copper Neutral Rating: 100A Ground Bar: Std.Bolted Copper,Cu cable only S.C.Rating: 10k A.I.C.Fully Rated Blank Cover Main Device Type: Main Lugs Only-Bottom Cable Entry 4 inches Main Terminals: Mechanical-(1)#14-1/0(Cu/AI) Neutral Terminals: Mechanical-(1)#14-1/0(Cu/AI) Box Catalog No.: YS2036 Trim: Standard Trim(LT2036S) 1 BAB1020 BAB1020 2 Surface Mounted 3 BAB1020 BAB1020 4 Box Dimensions: 36"[914.4mm]H x 20"[508.Omm]W x 5.75"[146.Omm]D Min.Gutter Size: Top=5.5"[139.7mm]Bottom=5.5"[139.7mm] 5 BAB1020 BAB1020 6 Left=6.0"[152.4mm]Right=6.0"[152.4mm] 7 BAB1020 BAB1020 8 Panel ID Nameplate: (1)LH 9 BAB1020 BAB1020 1 Type: Plastic,adhesive-backed (2)208Y/120V 3Ph 4W Color: Black with White Letters (3) 1 BAB1020 BAB1020 1 3 BAB1020 BAB1020 NEC Lighting&Appliance,UL CTL —Non-Interchangeable Main Device- 5 BAB1020 BAB1020 1 Copper Neutral 7 PROV PROV 1 Trim Lock:Standard Latch&Lock s PROV PROV 2 Circuit Directory:Plastic Sleeve with Card 1 PROV PROV 2 3 PROV PROV 2 5 PROV PROV z 7 PROV PROV 2 s PROV PROV 3 Main Lugs Only 100A Device Modifications: Branch Devices Ref# Description Qty Poles Trip Frame Amps KAIC 16 1 20 BAB 100 10 14 1 PROV Notes The information on this PREPARED BY DATE document is created by Eaton James,Curtis 08@9/05 Eaton Corporation Corporation.It is disclosed in confidence and it is only APPROVED BY DATE JOB NAME Atlantic Beach City Hall to be used for the purpose in 08/29/05 DESIGNATION LH Which it is supplied. VERSION TYPE DRAWING TYPE 5.1 PRL1a Final NEG-ALT NUMBER REVISION DWG SIZE Go. ITEM SHEET JV7001203503-0000 A SJV82994 0051 1 OF 1 Eaton I Electrical: Page 93 of 112 Fm,,T*N Electrical Atlantic Beach City Hall GO # SJV82994 Safety Switches Table of Contents TAB DESCRIPTION Spare Parts SAFETY SWITCH RENEWAL PARTS DATA Shop Drawings COMMON DOCUMENTS © 2003 Eaton Corporation,All Rights Reserved Eaton I Electrical: Page 97 of 112 U.,T•N I Cutler-Hammer Safety Switches Renewal Parts Effective: July 2002 Page 5 Catalog Base or Assembly Fuse Base and Lower Assembly Line Operating Operating Number Type Part Number Type Part Number Shields Mechanism Handle DH325FRK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-7833-5 70-7833-2 DH325FWK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-7833-5 70-7833-3 DH325FWKX Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-8305-2 70-7833-3 DH325NDK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-7833-5 70-7833-2 DH325NDKLW Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-7833-5 70-7833-2 DH325NGK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-7833-5 70-7833-2 DH325NPK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-7833-5 70-7833-2 DH325NPKLW Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-7833-5 70-7833-2 DH325NRK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-7833-5 70-7833-2 DH325NWK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-7833-5 70-7833-3 DH325NWKLW Switch Interior Assembly 70-8063-4 Fuse Base 70-8063-7 70-8063-8 70-7833-5 70-7833-3 DH326FDK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326FGK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326FPK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326FRK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326FWK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-3 DH326NDK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326NDKLW Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326NGK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326NPK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326NPKLW Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326NRK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326NWK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH326NWKLW Switch Interior Assembly 70-8064-4 Fuse Base 70-8064-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH327FDK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8065-4 Fuse Base 70-8065-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH327FGK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8065-4 Fuse Base 70-8065-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH327FPK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8065-4 Fuse Base 70-8065-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH327FRK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8065-4 Fuse Base 70-8065-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH327FWK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8065-4 Fuse Base 70-8065-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-3 DH327NGK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8065-4 Fuse Base 70-8065-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 DH327NRK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8065-4 Fuse Base 70-8065-7 70-8064-8 70-7833-6 70-7833-2 Opol DH328FGK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8453-2 Fuse Base 70-8453-3 70-8453-4 — — DH328FRK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8453-2 Fuse Base 70-8453-3 70-8453-4 — — DH328NGK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8453-2 Fuse Base 70-8453-3 70-8453-4 — — DH328NRK Switch Interior Assembly 70-8453-2 Fuse Base 70-8453-3 70-8453-4 — — DH361FCK Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 — — DH361FDK Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FDK2 Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FDK2WR Switching Base 70-7758 Fuse Base 70-7758-19 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FDK2WRK Switching Base 70-7758 Fuse Base 70-7758-19 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FDK2WRW Switching Base 70-7758 Fuse Base 70-7758-19 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FDK26 Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FDK46 Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FDK6 Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FDK6JK Switching Base 70-7831-2 Fuse Base 70-7831-3 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FD3WRK Switching Base 70-7758 Fuse Base 70-7758-19 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FD4WRK Switching Base 70-7758 Fuse Base 70-7758-19 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FD5WRK Switching Base 70-7758-14 Fuse Base 70-7758-26 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FGK Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FGK6 Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FGK6JK Switching Base 70-7831-2 Fuse Base 70-7831-3 707758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FG6WRK Switching Base 70-7758-2 Fuse Base 70-7758-19 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FRK Switching Base 70-7758-15 Fuse Base 70-7758-28 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FRK6 Switching Base 70-7758-15 Fuse Base 70-7758-28 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FRK6JK Switching Base 70-7831-2 Fuse Base 70-7831-3 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361FWK Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361FWK-316 Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361FWKX Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-8304 70-7813-3 DH361FWK2 Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361FWK2WR Switching Base 70-7758 Fuse Base 70-7758-19 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361FWK26 Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361FWK6 Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361FWK6JK Switching Base 70-7831-2 Fuse Base 70-7831-3 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361NCK Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 — — DH361NDK Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361NDK-10 Switching Base 70-7758-12 1 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 — 70-7813 70-7813-2 RP00801001 E For more information visit:www.cutier-hammer.eaton.com Eaton Electrical: Page 101 of 112 Renewal Parts Safety Switches E:T*N � Cutler-Hammer Page 6 Effective: July 2002 Catalog Base or Assembly Fuse Base and Lower Assembly Line Operating Operating Number Type Part Number Type Part Number Shields Mechanism Handle DH361NDKLW Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361NDKW Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361NDK6JK Switching Base 70-7831-2 Fuse Base 70-7831-3 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361NGK Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361NRK Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-28 707758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361NWK Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361NWKLW Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361NWKW Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361NWKW2 Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361NWKX Switching Base 70-7758-12 Fuse Base 70-7758-27 70-7758-34 70-8304 70-7813-3 DH361UCK Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 — DH361UDK-CPG Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361UDK-LS Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361UDK2-LS Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361UD5WRK Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361UGK Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 707813 70-7813-2 DH361UGK-CSA Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 707813 70-7813-2 DH361UGK2 Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 707813 70-7813-2 DH361UGK3 Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 707813 70-7813-2 DH361URK Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361URK-CSA Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361URK-NP-FP Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361URK2 Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361URK3 Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH361UWK Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361UWK-CPG Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361UWK-LS Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361UWKW Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH361UWKW2 Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362FCK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 — — DH362FDK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FDK2 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 707758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FDK2WR Switching Base 70-7758-2 Fuse Base 70-7758-20 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FDK2WR-SP Switching Base 70-7758-2 Fuse Base 70-7758-20 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FDK2WRW Switching Base 70-7758-2 Fuse Base 70-7758-20 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FDK26 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 707758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FDK3 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 707758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FDK6 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FD3WRK Switching Base 70-7758-2 Fuse Base 70-7758-20 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FD4WRK Switching Base 70-7758-2 Fuse Base 70-7758-20 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FD5WRK Switching Base 70-7758-2 Fuse Base 70-7758-20 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FGK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FGK6 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FGK6JK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FG6WRK Switching Base 70-7758-2 Fuse Base 70-7758-20 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FRK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FRK6 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362FWK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362FWKX Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-8304 70-7813-3 DH362FWK2WR Switching Base 70-7758-2 Fuse Base 70-7758-20 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362FWK26 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362FW5WRK Switching Base 70-7758-2 Fuse Base 70-7758-20 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362NCK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 — — DH362NDK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362NDKLW Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362NDKW Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362NDK36 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362NDK6 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362NGK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362NGK6 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362NRK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362NWK Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362NWKLW Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362NWKW Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 j 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362NWKW2 Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362NWKX Switching Base 70-7997-2 Fuse Base 70-7997-7 70-7758-34 170-8304 70-7813-3 For more information visit:vwvw.cutler-hammer.eaton.com RP00801001E Eaton I Electrical: Page 102 of 112 E=T*N I Cutler-Hammer Safety Switches Renewal Parts Effective: July 2002 Page 7 Catalog Base or Assembly Fuse Base and Lower Assembly Line Operating Operating Number Type Part Number IType Part Number Shields Mechanism Handle DH362UCK Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 — DH362UDK-CPG Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UDK-LS Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UDK2-LS Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UDK2WR Switching Base 70-7758-4 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UDK2WRCP70 Switching Base 70-7758-4 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UD5WRK Switching Base 70-7758-4 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UGK Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UGK-CSA Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UGK2 Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UGK3 Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362URK Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362URK-CSA Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362URK-NP-FP Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362URK2 Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362URK3 Switching Base 70-7758-13 — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UWK Switching Base 70-7758-13 — — 70-7758-34 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362UWK-CPG Switching Base 70-7758-4 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362UWK-LS Switching Base 70-7758-4 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362UWKW Switching Base 70-7758-4 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 6H362UWKW2 Switching Base 70-7758-4 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH362UWK2WR Switching Base 70-7758-4 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH362UW5WRK Switching Base 70-7758-4 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH363FCK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 — — DH363FDK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FDK2 Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FDK2WR Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FDK26 Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FDK6 Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FD3WRK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FD3WRK-EXC Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FD4WRK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FGK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FGK6 Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FRK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FRK-HRC Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FRK6 Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363FWK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH363FWKX Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-8304 70-7813-3 DH363FWK26 Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH363FW5WRK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH363NCK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 — DH363NDK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363NDKLW Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363NDKW Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363NDK6 Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363NGK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363NGK6 Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363NRK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363NWK Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH363NWKLW Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH363NWKW Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 DH363NWKW2 Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-3 6H363NWKX Switching Base 70-7758-3 Fuse Base 70-7758-21 70-7758-35 70-8304 70-7813-3 DH363UCK Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — 70-7758-35 — DH363UDK Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 6H363UDK-CP Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363UDK-NP-FP Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363UDK-10 Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — — 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363UDKW Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363UDKW2 Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363UDK2 Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363UDK3 Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363UGK Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 DH363UGK2 Switching Base 70-7758-5 — — 70-7758-35 70-7813 70-7813-2 RP00801001E For more information visit:www.cutler-hammer.eaton.com Eaton I Electrical: Page 103 of 112 REFERENCE NOTES DWG NO 95-955-10 1. 30-60 AMPERES, 600 VOLTS HEAVY DUTY K-SERIES DESIGN. 2. 2 AND 3 POLE FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES. 3. NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE: 0.048" COLD ROLLED STEEL. 4 8 [124] 4. MEETS FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS WS865C. 5. MEETS UL 98 FOR SWITCHES, UL 50 FOR ENCLOSURES. 6. MEETS NEC WIRE BENDING SPACE REQUIREMENTS. 7. MEETS NEMA STANDARDS KSI. CA 8. UL LISTED, FILE NO. 5239. 9. ANSI 61 LIGHT GRAY BAKED ENAMEL FINISH. CA N� aim KNOCKOUTS TOP AND BOTTOM 8 $ [206] 4 [1 9] 10 [254] MAX. 7 [22] ZIT CA CA O eo 3 MTG. SCREWS 1/4" MAX. DIA. C. N O M \D O 1 f 100 V Ln CA CA 0-1 T4 3 8 [92] N u 5 4 [133] 6 2 [165] --loo Mico CONDUIT KNOCKOUT SIZES in [mm] CA CB 3/4 [17], 1 [25], 1 1/4 [32] 1 1/2 [13], 3/4 [17], 1 [25], 1 1/4 [32] DIMENSIONS IN in(mm) ALL KNOCKOUTS ARE CONCENTRIC UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 4/98 The infbffnafion on this PREPARED BY DATE - - - - document is created by Eaton James,Curtis 08/29!05 Eaton Corporation Pittsburgh,Corporation.it is disclosed PA in confidence and it is only APPROVED BY DATE JOB NAME Atlantic Beach City Hall to be used for the purpose in DESIGNATION Which it is supplied. VERSION TYPE DRAWING TYPE 5.1 DH361 UGK Final NEG-ALT NUMBER REVISION DWG SIZE G.O. ITEM SHEET JV7001203503 C000 A SJV82994 001 1 OF 1 Eaton(Electrical: Page 107 of 112 REFERENCE NOTES: DWG NO 95-955-10 1. 30-60 AMPERES, 600 VOLTS HEAVY DUTY K-SERIES DESIGN. 2. 2 AND 3 POLE FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES. 3. NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE: 0.048" COLD ROLLED STEEL. 4 8 [124] 4. MEETS FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS WS865C. 5. MEETS UL 98 FOR SWITCHES, UL 50 FOR ENCLOSURES. 6. MEETS NEC WIRE BENDING SPACE REOUIREMENTS. 7. MEETS NEMA STANDARDS KSI. CA 8. UL LISTED, FILE NO. 5239. —_ 9. ANSI 61 LIGHT GRAY BAKED ENAMEL FINISH. \JA .77 7 KNOCKOUTS TOP AND BOTTOM 8 [206] 4[ 19] 10 [254] MAX. 7 [22] CA CA 0 ro � u 3 MTG. SCREWS _ 1/4" MAX. DIA. r O N O M p � p tD SIV Q n100 u CA CA SIN 3 8 [92] rn ui 5 4 [133] 6 2 [165] -IW Mloo CONDUIT KNOCKOUT SIZES in [mm] CA CB 3/4 [17], 1 [25], 1 1/4 [32} 1/2 [13], 3/4 [17], 1 [25], 1 1/4 [32] DIMENSIONS IN in(mm) ALL KNOCKOUTS ARE CONCENTRIC UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 4/98 The information on this PREPARED BY DATE -- - -_- - - document is created by Eaton James,Curtis 08/29/05 Eaton Corporation Corporation.It is disclosed Pittsburgh,PA in confidence and it is only APPROVED BY DATE JOB NAME Atlantic Beach City Hall to be used for the purpose in DESIGNATION which it is supplied. VERSION TYPE DRAWING TYPE 5.1 DH362UGK Final FEG-OA'-T NUMBER REVISION DWG SIZE GO.V701203503-0000 A SJV82994 002 1 OF 1 Eaton Electrical: Page 109 of 112 REFERENCE NOTES DWG NO 95-955-11 1. 30-60 AMPERES, 600 VOLTS HEAVY DUTY K-SERIES DESIGN. 2. 2 AND 3 POLE FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES. 3. NEMA 3R ENCLOSURE: D.052" ZINC COATED STEEL. 4 8 [124] 4. MEETS FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS WS865C. CA 5. MEETS UL 98 FOR SWITCHES, UL 50 FOR ENCLOSURES. 6. MEETS NEC WIRE BENDING SPACE REQUIREMENTS. (BOTTOM ONLY) 7. MEETS NEMA STANDARDS KSI. CA 8. UL LISTED, FILE NO. 5239. 9. ANSI 61 LIGHT GRAY BAKED ENAMEL FINISH. 10. SIDE HINGED WITH DRIP SHIELD. ` 11. USE TYPE DS/CS GROUP 1 HUB. 0 0 N N I�IW TOP ENDWALL SUPPLIED WITH BLANK PLATE FOR INTERCHANGEABLE HUBS 88 [206) 4 [19] 10 [254] o0 MAX. F3"MT'G. SCREWS 0 1/4" MAX. DIA. N O M a b O �I V W u CB CA _ IN 3 8 [92] M u 7 1 8 L [22] 1 �iN Mro 5 4 [133] 6 2 [165] CONDUIT KNOCKOUT SIZES in [mm] CA CB 3/4 [19], 1 [25], 1 1/4 [32] 1 1/2 [13], 3/4 [19], 1 [25], 1 1/4 [32} DIMENSIONS IN in(mm) ALL KNOCKOUTS ARE CONCENTRIC UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 4/98 -_ -- - - The information on this PREPARED BY DATE document is created by Eaton James,Curtis 08/29/05 Eaton Corporation Corporation.It is disclosed Pittsburgh,PA in confidence and it is only APPROVED BY DATE JOB NAME Atlantic Beach City Hall to be used for the purpose in DESIGNATION Which it is supplied. VERSION TYPE DRAWING TYPE 5.1 DH361URK Final NEG-ALT NUMBER REVISION DWG SIZE G.O. ITEM SHEET JV7001203503-0000 A SJV82994 003 1 OF 1 Eaton Electrical: Page 111 of 112 SOUTHERN PLATE GLASS,INC. 3372 PHILIPS HIGHWAY • JACKSONVILLE,FLORIDA 32207 SOUTBERN PLATE GLASS, INC. JULY 6,2005 STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF Duval (Date of Substantial Completion July 6,2005) Project: AtlanticBeach,CityJHall AdditionR,Atlantic Beach,fla. SUBCONTRACTOR'S ONE YEAR WARRANTY The undersigned warrants all its work performed in connection with the above project to be in conformance with the drawings and specifications and free from all defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the above date, and agrees to remedy all defects arising within that period at is own expense,including the cost of repair or replacements of items damaged by such defects, or damaged in the course of repairing such defects. The term"defects"shall not be construed as embracing damage arising from misuse,negligence, acts of God,normal wear and tear or failure to follow maintenance or operating instructions. SOUTHERN PLATE GLASS,INC. Chuck Houghton Vice Pre,�Cde of Sales Sworn and sub ribs before me Thi . da 200 " JOANNEHUDSON �-' Notary Public, State of Florida My comm.exp. Dec. 28, 2007 i;omm. No. DD 277518 1 € µ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION&MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR ATLANTIC BEACH CITY HALL ADDITIONS & ALTERATIONS ATLANTIC BEACH, FLORIDA GENERAL CONTRACTOR' C.C. BORDEN CONSTRUCTION COMPANY 1019 ROSSELLE STREET JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR CERTIFIED AIR CONTRACTORS, INC. 4505 MARQUETTE AVENUE JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA ECEIVED R AUG 2 2 2005 c.C.BORDEN CT'ION,�C- CONST'RU INDEX 1. HVAC EQUIPMENT...... .............................................................................................TAB 1 2. TESTS AND BALANCE..............................................................................................TAB 2 3. WARRANTY...............................................................................................................TAB d r 38BYC, 38BYG _ 12 SEER Split System HEATING&COOLING © Heat /Du m p Visit www.carrier.com Installation and Mart-Up Instructions NOTE: Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation. (tl';ill o o I'I�li I V This symbol —� indicates a change since the last issue. `I SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Improper installation,adjustment,alteration,service,maintenance, 0 or use can cause explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury, or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency, or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product.Refer to the individual instructions packaged with the kits or accessories when installing. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses,protective clothing, and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for brazing operations. Have fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thor- oughly and follow all warnings or cautions included in literature o and attached to the unit.Consult local building codes and National A98525 Electrical Code(NEC) for special requirements. Fig. 1—Model 38BYG Recognize safety information.This is the safety-alert symbol® . When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions or 4. Leave some slack between structure and unit to absorb manuals,be alert to the potential for personal injury. vibration. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAU- 5. When passing refrigerant tubes through the wall,seal opening TION.These words are used with the safety-alert symbol.DAN- with RTV or other pliable silicon based caulk. (See Fig. 2.) GER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe G. Avoid direct tubing contact with water pipes,duct work,floor personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards which joists,wall studs, floors, and walls. could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to 7. Do not suspend refrigerant tubing from joists and studs with a identify unsafe practices which would result in minor personal rigid wire'or strap that comes in direct contact with tubing. injury or product and property damage.NOTE is used to highlight (See Fig. 2.) suggestions which will result in enhanced installation,reliability, or operation. 8. Ensure that tubing insulation is pliable and completely sur- rounds vapor tube. ! WARNING 9. When necessary, use hanger straps which are 1 in, wide and Before installing,modifying,or servicing system,main elec- conform to shape of tubing insulation. (See Fig. 2.) trical disconnect switch must be in the OFF position. There 10. Isolate hanger straps from insulation by using metal sleeves may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Lock out and tag bent to conform to shape of insulation. switch with a suitable warning label. Electrical shock can When outdoor unit is connected to factory-approved indoor unit, cause personal injury or death. outdoor unit contains system refrigerant charge for operation with indoor trait of the same size when connected by 15 ft of INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS field-supplied or factory-accessory tubing.For proper unit opera- NOTE: In some cases noise in the living area has been traced to tion, check refCigerant charge using charging information located gas pulsations from unproper installation of equipment. on control box cover. 1. Locate unit away from windows, patios, decks, and so forth IMPORTANT: Maximum liquid line size is 3/8-in. O.D. for all where unit operation sounds may disturb customer. residential applications including long line. 2. Ensure that vapor-and liquid-tube diameters are appropriate to IMPORTANT'Always install a liquid line filter drier on any capacity of unit. system using existing field service line sets and or existing indoor 3. Run refrigerant tubes as directly as possible by avoiding coil or fan coil units. Always use a filter direr on burnout unit unnecessary turns and bends. replacements. Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue,or change at any time,specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Bookl 11 4 PC 101 Catalog No. 533-80078 Printed in U.S.A. Form 38BYC-3SI Pg 1 11-02 Replaces: 38BYC-2S[ Ta—b—T 5a 5a M NOTE:Avoid contact between tubing and structure OUTDOOR WALL INDOOR WALL f "Ilk CAULK ` °�,ni LIQUID TUBE i i II C VAPOR TUBE INSULATION — \ — THROUGH THE WALL JOIST / HANGER STRAP (AROUND VAPOR INSULATION �\ TUBE ONLY) VAPOR TUBE 38"D.(9.53)TIEDOWN O O A KNOCKOUTS(2)PLACES O B �I 1"MIN. --►I G+— A94199 LIQUID TUBE Dimensions (In.) SUSPENSION MINIMUM TIEDOWN KNOCKOUT LOCATIONS UNIT MOUNTING-PAD SIZE A94028 DIMENSIONS A B C 018-024 22-1/2 X 22-1/2 3-11/16 18-1/8 14-3/8 Fig. 2—Connecting Tubing Installation 030-060 30 X 30 6-1/2 23-1/2 20 INSTALLATION Fig. 3—Mounting Unit to Pad Step 1—Check Equipment and Job Site UNPACK UNIT surface.rooftop applications, locate unit at least 6 in. above roof surface. Move to final location.Remove carton,taking care not to damage unit. Step 4—Operating Ambient INSPECT EQUIPMENT The minimum outdoor operating ambient in cooling mode is 55°F, File claim with shipping company prior to installation if shipment and the maximum outdoor operating ambient in cooling mode is is damaged or incomplete.Locate unit rating plate on unit service 125°F.The maximum outdoor operating ambient in heating mode panel. It contains information needed to properly install unit. is 66°F. Check rating plate to be sure unit matches job specifications. Step 2—Install On A Solid, Level Mounting Pad Step 5—Elevate Unit If conditions or local codes require the unit be attached to pad, tiedown bolts should be used and fastened through knockouts i CAUTION provided in unit base pan.Refer to trait mounting pattern in Fig.3 Accumulation of water and ice in base pan may cause to determine base pan size and knockout hole location. equipment damage. On rooftop applications,mount on level platform or frame.Place unit above a load bearing wall.and isolate unit and tubing set from In areas where prolonged freezing temperatures are encountered, structure.Arrange supporting members to adequately support unit elevate unit per local climate and code requirements to provide and minimize transmission of vibration to building. Consult local clearance above estimated snowfall level and ensure adequate codes governing rooftop applications. drainage of unit. Roof mounted units exposed to winds above 5 mph may require Step 6—Remove Indoor AccuRater® Piston and Install wind baffles to achieve adequate defrost. Consult Low Ambient TXV Guideline for wind baffle construction. NOTE: Unit must be level to within f 2' (f 3/8 in./ft) per MA CAUTION compressor manufacturer specifications. Step 3—Clearance Requirements For proper unit operation and reliability, units must be installed with field supplied hard shutoff TXV.Do not install When installing, allow sufficient space for airflow clearance, with evaporator coils having capillary tube metering devices wiring, refrigerant piping, and service. Allow 30-in. clearance to or pistons. service end of unit and 48 in.above unit.For proper airflow,a 6-in. clearance on 1 side of unit and 12 in. on all remaining sides must For TXV kit part number and charging instructions,refer to TXV be maintained. Maintain a distance of 24 in. between units. label in outdoor unit. If indoor unit (fan coil) comes factory Position so water, snow, or ice from roof or eaves cannot fall equipped with a bi-flow hard shutoff TXV, no TXV change is directly on unit. required. 2 If TXV installation is required,remove existing AccuRatCC(Y-)from feeder tubes,there is a 3/8-in. O.D. stub tube approximately 2 in. indoor coil.Refer to Figs.4 and 5 and install TXV kit as follows: long.(See Fig.6.)The defrost thermostat should be located on stub 1. Install suction tube adapter. tube. Note that there is only 1 stub tube used with liquid header, and on most units it is the bottom circuit. 2. Install liquid flare-to-sweat adapter. 3. Connect external equalizer tube to fitting on suction tube FEEDER TUBE adapter. STUB TUBE 4. Position sensing bulb on horizontal portion of suction tube adapter. Secure using supplied hardware. 5. Insulate bulb after installation. (See Fig. 5.) 6. Leak check all connections. DEFROST THERMOSTAT COIL SENSING BULB A97517 EQUALIZER Fig. 6—Defrost Thermostat Location TUBE Step 9—Make Piping Connections A WARNING Relieve pressure and recover all refrigerant before system THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION repair or final unit disposal to avoid personal injury or death. VALVE Use all service ports and open all flow control devices, including solenoid valves. A88382 Fig. 4—Typical TXV Installation CAUTION If ANY refrigerant tubing is buried,provide a 6 in. vertical 10 O'CLOCK rise at service valve. Refrigerant tubing lengths up to 36 in. 2 O'CLOCK may be buried without further special consideration. For _ , SENSING BULB lengths longer than 36 in.,refer to Application Guideline and Service Manual—Residential Split System Air Conditioners .�STRAP y, and Ileat Pumps.- \ ' CAUTION SUCTION TUBE To prevent damage to unit or service valves observe the/�/ 8 O'CLOCK 4 O'CLOCK following: 7/8 IN.OD& SMALLER LARGER THAN 7/8 IN.OD -Use a brazing shield. -Wrap service valves with wet cloth or use a heat-sink material. A81032 Outdoor units may be connected to indoor section using accessory- Fig. 5—Positioning of Sensing Bulb tubing package or field-supplied refrigerant grade tubing of correct size and condition.For tubing requirements beyond 50 ft,substan- tial capacity and performance losses can occur. Following the Step 7—Check Outdoor AccuRater® Piston recommendations in the Residential Split System Long-Line Application Guideline will reduce these losses. Refer to Table 1 Check outdoor unit piston.Remove retainer on liquid service valve for field tubing equivalent line length. Refer to Table 2 for and check piston size with matching number listed on outdoor unit accessory requirements. rating plate. For buried line applications greater than 36 in.,refer to Table 2 and Residential Split System Buried Line Application Guideline. Step 8—Check Defrost Thermostat Buried line applications may not exceed 100 ft. Check defrost thermostat to ensure it is properly located and If refrigerant tubes or indoor coil are exposed to atmosphere,they securely attached.There is a liquid header with a brass distributor must be evacuated to 500 microns to eliminate contamination and and feeder tube going into outdoor coil. At the end of 1 of the moisture in the system. 3 Table 1—Refrigerant Connections And Recommended Liquid-And Vapor-Tube Diameters (In.) UNIT LIQUID VAPOR VAPOR(LONG LINE) SIZE Connection Diameter Tube Diameter Connection Diameter Tube Diameter Connection Diameter Tube Diameter 018 3/8 3/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 024 3/8 3/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 030,036 3/8 3/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 7/8 042 3/8 3/8 7/8 7/8 1 /8 1-1/8 048,060 3/8 3/8 7/8 1 1-1/8 7/8 1 1-1/8 NOTES: 1.Tube diameters are for lengths up to 50 ft.For tubing lengths greater than 50 ft horizontal,or greater than 20 ft vertical differential,consult the Application Guideline and Service Manual—Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps. 2.Do not apply capillary tube indoor coils to these units. OUTDOOR UNIT CONNECTED TO FACTORY APPROVED attention to feeder tubes,making sure wire ties on feeder tubes are INDOOR UNIT secure and tight. Outdoor unit contains correct system refrigerant charge for opera- Step 10—Make Electrical Connections tion with indoor unit of same size when connected by 15 ft of field-supplied or factory accessory tubing. Check refrigerant r WARNING charge for maximum efficiency. To avoid personal injury or death,do not supply power to unit REFRIGERANT TUBING with compressor terminal box cover removed. Connect tubing to fittings on outdoor unit vapor- and liquid- Be sure field wiring complies with local and national fire,safety, service valves. (See Table 1.)Use refrigerant grade tubing. and electrical codes,and voltage to system is within limits shown SWEAT CONNECTION on unit rating plate.Contact local power company for correction of improper voltage. See unit rating plate for recommended circuit- CAUTION y protection device. To avoid valve damage while brazing,service valves must be NOTE: Operation of unit on improper line voltage constitutes wrapped in a heat sink material such as a wet cloth. abuse and could affect unit reliability.See unit rating plate.Do not install unit in system where voltage may fluctuate above or below Remove plastic retainer holding outdoor piston in liquid service permissible limits. valve and connect sweat/flare adapter provided to valve.(See Fig. NOTE: Use copper wire only between disconnect switch and 7.) Connect refrigerant tubing to fittings on outdoor unit vapor- unit. and liquid-service valves. Service valves are closed from factory and ready for brazing. After wrapping service valve with a wet NOTE: Install branch circuit disconnect of adequate size per cloth,tubing set can be brazed to service valve using either silver NEC to handle unit starting current.Locate disconnect within sight bearing or non-silver bearing brazing material.Consult local code from and readily accessible from unit,per Section 440-14 of NEC. requirements.Refrigerant tubing and indoor coil are now ready for ROUTE GROUND AND POWER WIRES leak testing.This check should include all field and factory joints. Remove access panel to gain access to unit wiring. Extend wires from disconnect through power wiring hole provided and into unit PISTON BODY control box. NA WARNING The unit cabinet must have an uninterrupted or unbroken ground to minimize personal injury if an electrical fault should occur. The ground may consist of electrical wire or metal conduit when installed in accordance with existing PISTON electrical codes.Failure to follow this warning can result in an PISTON electric shock,fire,or death. RETAINER CONNECT GROUND AND POWER WIRES STRAINER Connect ground wire to ground connection in control box for safety. Connect power wiring to contactor as shown in Fig. 8. CONNECT CONTROL WIRING SWEAT/FLARE ADAPTER Route 24v control wires through control wiring grommet and connect leads to control wiring. See Thermostat Installation Instructions for wiring specific unit combinations. (See Fig. 9.) A97512 Use No. 18 AWG color coded,insulated(35°C minimum)wire.If thermostat is located more than 100 ft from unit, as measured Fig. 7—Liquid-Service Valve along the control voltage wires,use No. 16 AWG color coded wire IMPORTANT:Check to be certain factory tubing on both indoor to avoid excessive voltage drop. and outdoor unit has not shifted during shipment.Ensure tubes are All wiring must be NEC Class 1 and must be separated from not rubbing against each other or any sheet metal. Pay close incoming power leads. 4 Table 2—Accessory Usage REQUIRED FOR REQUIRED FOR REQUIRED FOR ACCESSORY LOW-AMBIENT LONG-LINE BURIED LINE APPLICATIONS APPLICATIONS* APPLICATIONSt (BELOW 55°F) (OVER 50 FT) (OVER 3 FT) Crankcase Heater Yes Yes Yes Evaporator Freeze Thermostat Yes No No Accumulator No No Yes Compressor Start-Assist Yes Yes Yes Capacitor and Relay MotorMaster@ Control, or Yes No No Low-Ambient Pressure Switch Wind Baffle See low-ambient No No Instructions Unit Risers Recommended No No Liquid-Line Solenoid Valve See Long-Line or No Application Yes Hard-Shutoff TXV Guideline Ball-Bearing Fan Motor Yes$ No No 'Fortubing line sets between 50 and 175 ft,refer to Application Guideline and Service Manual—Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps. t For buried line applications,refer to Application Guideline and Service Manual—Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps. $Required for low-ambient controller(full-modulation feature)and MotorMaster®Control only. DISCONNECT Step 13—Start-Up PER N. E.C.AND/OR LOCAL CODES r CAUTION CONTACTOR FIELD POWER I To prevent compressor damage or personal injury, observe –FIELD P --------------------- O the following: WIRING -Do not overcharge system with refrigerant. ---------------------------- *Do not operate unit in a vacuum or at negative pressure. Q O •Do not disable low-pressure switch. FIELD GROUND In scroll compressor applications: WIRING GROUND *Dome temperatures may be hot. LUG A91056 CAUTIONr Fig. 8—Line Power Connections To prevent personal injury wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and gloves when handling refrigerant and observe Use furnace transformer,fan coil transformer,or accessory trans the following: former for control power, 24v/40va minimum. -Back-seating service valves are not equipped with Schrader NOTE: Use of available 24v accessories may exceed the mini- valves.Fully back seat(counterclockwise)valve stem before mum 40va power requirement. Determine total transformer load- removing gage-port cap. ing and increase the transformer capacity or split the load with an -Front-seating service valves are equipped with Schrader accessory transformer as required. valves. IMPORTANT:Check factory wiring and wire connections toCAUTION r ensure terminations are secured properly. Check wire routing to ensure wires are not in contact with tubing, sheet metal, and so 7nosphere. ons require that you do not vent refrigerant to forth. cover during system repair or final unit Step 11—Compressor Crankcase Heater When equipped with a crankcase heater,furnish power to heater a Follow these steps to properly pumpdown a system and avoid minimum of 24 hr before starting unit.To furnish power to heater negative suction pressure. only, set thermostat to OFF and close electrical disconnect to 1. Fully back seat(open) liquid-and vapor-tube service valves. outdoor unit.A crankcase heater is required if refrigerant tubing is 2. Unit is shipped with valve stem(s) front seated (closed) and longer than 50 ft. caps installed. Replace stem caps after system is opened to Step 12—Install Electrical Accessories refrigerant',flow. Replace caps finger-tight and tighten with Refer to the individual instructions packaged with kits or acces- wrench an additional 1/12 turn. sories when installing. 3. Close electrical disconnects to energize system. 5 4. Set room thermostat to desired temperature. Be sure set point outdoor temperature falls below setting of outdoor thermostat is below indoor-ambient temperature. (field-installed option),contacts close to complete circuit and bring 5. Set room thermostat to HEAT or COOL and fan control to ON on second bank of supplemental electric heat. or AUTO mode, as desired. Operate unit for 15 minutes. When thermostat is satisfied, its contacts open, de-energizing Check system-refrigerant charge. contactor and relay. All heaters and motors should stop. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION DEFROST NOTE: Defrost-control board may be equipped with 5-minute The defrost control is a time/temperature control which includes a lockout timer that may be initiated upon any interruption of power. field-selectable(quick-connects located at board edge)time period With power supplied to indoor and outdoor units, transformer is between defrost cycles (30, 60, or 90 minutes), factory set at 90 energized. minutes. COOLING The electronic timer and defrost cycle start only when contactor is energized and defrost thermostat is closed. On a call for cooling, thermostat makes circuits R-O, R-Y, and. R-G.Circuit R-O energizes reversing valve,switching it to cooling Defrost mode is identical to cooling mode except that outdoor-fan position. Circuit R-Y energizes contactor, starting outdoor-fan motor stops and second-stage heat is turned on to continue motor and compressor circuit.R-G energizes indoor unit-blower warming conditioned space. relay, starting indoor-blower motor on high speed. To initiate defrost,the defrost thermostat must be closed.This can When thermostat is satisfied, its contacts open,de-energizing the be accomplished as follows: contactor and blower relay. Compressor and motors should stop. 1. Turn off power to outdoor unit. NOTE: If indoor unit is equipped with a time-delay relay circuit, 2. Disconnect outdoor-fan motor lead from OF2 on control the blower runs an additional 90 sec to increase system efficiency. board. (See Fig. 10.)Tape lead to prevent grounding. TYPICAL HEAT HP THERMOSTAT FAN COIL QPUMPP 24 VAC HOT R R — R—L_51 24 VAC COM HEAT STAGE 2 W2 t--W2 * COOL/HEAT [� E STAGE 1 Y INDOOR FAN G G R4RVS COOLING O ---- -- EMERGENCY * HEAT IF AVAILABLE A02325 Fig. 9—Generic Wiring Diagram (See Thermostat Installation Instructions for wiring specific unit combinations.) LEGEND 24-V FACTORY WIRING ---- 24-V FIELD WIRING rR FIELD SPLICE CONNECTION OUTDOOR THERMOSTAT HR EMERGENCY HEAT RELAY SUPPLEMENTAL HEAT RELAY A97413 HEATING 3. Restart unit in heating mode,allowing frost to accumulate on On a call for heating, thermostat makes circuits R-Y and R-G. outdoor coil. Circuit R-Y energizes contactor, starting outdoor-fan motor and 4. After a few minutes in heating mode, liquid-line temperature compressor. Circuit R-G energizes indoor-blower relay, starting should drop below closing point of defrost thermostat (ap- blower motor on high speed, proximately 30°F). Should temperature continue to fall, R-W2 is made through 5. Short between speed-up terminals with a flat-blade screw- second-stage room-thermostat bulb. Circuit R-W2 energizes a driver. (See Fig. 10.) This reduces the timing sequence to relay, bringing on first bank of supplemental electric beat and 1/256th of original time.(See Table 3.) providing electrical potential to second heater relay (if used). If 6 EXAMPLE: O O To calculate additional charge required for a 25–ft line set: DF, O 25 ft– 15 ft 10 ft X 0.6 oz/ft=6 oz of additional charge ® Units installed with cooling mode TXV require charging with the subcooling method. O�� 1. Operate unit a minimum of 10 minutes before checking charge. ® 2. Measure liquid service-valve pressure by attaching an accurate _o-®�� gage to service port. ❑ 3. Measure 'liquid-line temperature by attaching an accurate thermistor type or electronic thermometer to liquid line near O R T2 Y TI DFT C TEST 00 50 90 outdoor coil. ° 4. Refer to unit rating plate for required subcooling temperature. W, 5. Refer to Table 4. Find the point where required subcooling O O temperature intersects measured liquid service-valve pressure. D R 6. To obtain required subcooling temperature at a specific W2 liquid-line pressure, add refrigerant if liquid-line temperature Y is higher than indicated or reclaim refrigerant if temperature is CES0110063, lower. Allow a tolerance of f 3°F.CES0130024 O Table 4—Required Liquid-Line Temperature (°F) A91444 Table 3—Defrost Control Speedup- LIQUID REQUIRED SUBCOOLING PRESSURE AT TEMPERATURE(°F) Timing Sequence SERVICE VALVE PARAMETER MINIMUM MAXIMUM SPEEDUP (PSIG) 5 10 15 20 (MINUTES) (MINUTES) (NOMINAL) 134 71 66 61 56 30–minute cycle 27 33 7 sec 141 74 69 64 59 50–minute cycle 45 55 12 sec 148 77 72 67 62 90–minute cycle 81 99 21 sec 156 80 75 70 65 10–minute cycle 9 11 2 sec 163 83 78 73 68 5 minutes 4.5 5.5 1 sec 171 86 81 76 71 179 89 84 79 74 Fig. 10—Defrost Control 187 92 87 82 77 196 95 90 85 80 6. When you hear reversing valve change position, remove 205 98 93 88 83 screwdriver immediately; otherwise, control will terminate 214 101 96 91 86 normal 10-minute defrost cycle in approximately 2 sec. 223 104 99 94 89 NOTE: Length of defrost cycle is dependent upon length of time 233 107 102 97 1 92 it takes to remove screwdriver from test pins after reversing valve 243 110 105 100 95 has shifted. 253 113 108 103 98 7. Unit will remain in defrost for remainder of defrost-cycle time 264 116 111 106 101 or until defrost thermostat reopens at approximately 80°F coil 274 119 114 109 104 temperature of liquid line. 285 122 117 112 107 8. Turn off power to outdoor unit and reconnect fan motor lead 297 125 120 115 1 110 309 128 123 118 113 to OF2 on control board. (See Fig. 10.) 321 131 126 121 116 331 134 129 124 119 Step 14—Check Charge 346 137 132 127 122 Factory charge is shown on unit rating plate. To check charge in 359 140 1 135 130 125 cooling mode,refer to Cooling Only Procedure. To check charge in heating mode,refer to Heating Check Chart Procedure. HEATING CHECK CHART PROCEDURE COOLING-ONLY PROCEDURE To check system operation during heating cycle, refer to the Heating Check Chart on outdoor unit.This chart indicates whether NOTE: If superheat- or subcooling-charging conditions are not a correct relationship exists between system operating pressure and favorable,charge must be weighed in accordance with unit rating air temperature entering indoor and outdoor units.If pressure and plate i 0.6 oz/ft of 3/8-in. liquid line above or below 15 ft temperature do not match on chart,system refrigerant charge may respectively. not be correct. Do not use chart to adjust refrigerant charge. 7 ;t NOTE: When charging is necessary during heating season, 3. Leave User's Manual with owner. Explain system operation charge must be weighed in accordance with unit rating plate f 0.6 and periodic maintenance requirements outlined in manual. ozJft of 3/8-in. liquid line above or below 15 ft respectively. 4. Fill out Dealer Installation Checklist and place in customer EXAMPLE: file. To calculate additional charge required for a 25–ft line set: CARE AND MAINTENANCE 25 ft– 15 ft= 10 ft X 0.6 oz/ft= 6 oz of additional charge Step 15—Final Checks For continuing high performance and to minimize possible equip- ment failure, periodic maintenance must be performed on this IMPORTANT:Before leaving job,be sure to do the following: equipment. 1. Securely fasten all panels and covers. Frequency of maintenance may vary depending upon geographic 2. Tighten service valve-stem caps to 1/12-tum past finger-tight. areas, such as coastal applications. Copyright 2002 CARRIER Corp.•7310 W.Morris St.•Indianapolis,IN 46231 38bye3si Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue,or change at any time,specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Book 1 4 PC 101 Catalog No. 533-80078 Printed in U.S.A. Form 38BYC-3SI Pg 8 11-02 Replaces: 38BYC-2SI Tab I al a t Installation Instructions Direct Expansion FK4D Fan Coil 001 -006 7 A98023 Fig. 1—Model FK4D NOTE: `Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation. This symbol —4 indicates a change since the last issue. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Improper installation,adjustment,alteration,service,maintenance,or use can cause explosion,fire,electrical shock,or other conditions which may cause personal injury or property damage.Consult a qualified installer,service agency,or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product.Refer to the individual instructions packaged with kits or accessories when installing. Follow all safety codes.Wear safety glasses and work gloves.Use quenching cloth for brazing operations.Have fire extinguisher available.Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and National Electrical Code (NEC) for special requirements. Recognize safety information.This is the safety-alert symbol®.When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions manuals,be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE. These words are used with the safety-alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death.WARNING signifies hazards which could result in personal injury or death.CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which would result in minor personal injury or product and property damage.NOTE is used to highlight suggestions which will result in enhanced installation,reliability, or operation. 8 WARNING: Before installing or servicing unit,always turn off all power to unit.There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Turn off accessory heater power if applicable. Electrical shock can cause personal injury or death. INTRODUCTION Model FK4D Fan Coil units are designed for flexibility and can be used for upflow,horizontal,or downflow(kits required and manufactured and mobile homes) applications. These units are designed to meet the low air leak requirements'currently in effect. Because of this,the units need special attention in the condensate pan and drain connection area and when brazing tubing. Form: IM-FK4D-02 Cancels: IM-FK4D-01 Printed in U.S.A. 6-03 Catalog No. 63FK-4D1 POWER ENTRY FIELD SUPPLIED OPTIONS �SUPPLY DUCT LOW VOLT ENTRY OPTIONS 001-005 21-IN. ° 006 24-IN.FRONT SERVICE CLEARANCE UNIT A A COIL 001 17 In. UNITS 003 19 In. of ° UPFLOW/DOWNFLOW SECONDARY DRAIN 1 1/2" 1 e � UPFLOW/DOWNFLOW ° ° %1 19" PRIMARY DRAIN o ° I I FIELD MODIFIED jI A SIDE RETURN I LOCATION FOR 1 21/2" SLOPE COIL ° o I 1 UNITS ONLY 60 UPFLOW/DOWNFLOW SECONDARY DRAIN o 1% UPFLOW/DOWNFLOW :I� o FIELD SUPPLIED PRIMARY DRAIN L--,T RETURN PLENUM A00088 Fig. 2—Slope Coil Unit in Upflow Application These units are available for application in systems of 24,000 through 60,000 Btuh nominal cooling capacities.Factory-authorized,field-installed electric heater packages are available in 5 through 30 kw. See Product Data for available accessory kits. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1—CHECK EQUIPMENT Unpack unit and move to final location. Remove carton taking care not to damage unit. Inspect equipment for damage prior to installation.File claim with shipping company if shipment is damaged or incomplete. Locate unit rating plate which contains proper installation information. Check rating plate to be sure unit matches job specifications. PROCEDURE 2—MOUNT FAN COIL Unit can stand or lie on floor, or hang from ceiling or wall. Allow space for wiring,piping, and servicing unit. IMPORTANT: When unit is installed over a finished ceiling and/or living area,building codes may require a field-supplied secondary condensate pan to be installed under the entire unit. Some localities may allow the alterative of running a separate,secondary condensate line. Consult local codes for additional restrictions or precautions. When installing any fan coil over a finished ceiling and/or living area,installation of a secondary drain pan under entire unit to avoid damage to ceiling is recommended. FK4D Fan Coils can be installed for Upflow and horizontal-left applications as factory shipped. (See Fig. 2,4 and 8.)Units can be installed for horizontal-right applications with field modifications. (See Fig. 5.)Units may be converted for downflow applications using factory-authorized accessory kit. NOTE: To ensure proper drainage for horizontal installations,unit must be installed so it is within 1/8 in. level of the length and width of unit. A. Upflow Installation If return air is to be ducted, install duct flush with floor. Set unit on floor over opening. Only use return-air opening provided. All return air must pass through the coil. (See Fig. 2.) B. Modular Units The FK4D Fan Coil in size 006 is a 2-piece modular unit.Modular construction allows installer to disassemble unit into 2 components,coil box and blower box, for ease of installation. (See Fig. 3.) To disassemble unit,remove rear corner brackets by removing 2 screws which secure brackets.(See Fig.3.)Remove either 2 screws in each front corner of coil box,or 2 screws in blower box.Do not remove all 4 screws in each corner. (See Fig. 3.)Sections may now be separated by lifting top section from lower section. To reassemble,reverse above procedure. Be certain to reinstall all fasteners when reassembling. —2— BLOWER BOX - -� r 2 SCREWS 2 SCREWS REAR CORNER BRACKET \ 2 SCREWS COIL BOX A95293 Fig. 3—Modular Unit Assembly C. Horizontal Installations Be sure installation complies with all applicable building codes that may require installation of a secondary condensate pan. 1. Arrange support for unit by setting it in or above secondary condensate pan. 2. When suspending unit from ceiling dimples in casing indicate proper location of screws for mounting metal support straps. (See Fig.4.) D. Horizontal-Right Conversion of Units with Slope Coils NOTE: Gasket kit number KFAHDO 101 SLP is required for horizontal slope coil conversion to maintain low air leak/low sweat performance. 1. Remove blower and coil access panels and fitting panel. (See Fig. 5.) 2. Remove screw securing coil assembly to right side casing flange. 3. Remove coil assembly. 4. Lay fan coil on its right side and reinstall coil assembly with condensate pan down. (See Fig. 5.) S. Attach coil to casing flange using previously removed coil mounting screw. 6. Make sure the pan cap in the fitting door is properly seated on the fitting door to retain the low air leak rating of the unit. 7. Add gaskets from kit KFAHD per kit instructions. 8. Reinstall access panels and fitting panel, aligning holes with tubing connections and condensate pan connections. Make sure liquid and suction tube grommets are in place to prevent air leaks and cabinet sweating. install grommets after brazing. E. Horizontal Right Conversion of Units With A-Coil To convert units for horizontal right installations: 1. Remove blower and coil access panels. (See Fig. 6.) 2. Remove metal clip securing fitting panel to condensate pan. Remove fitting panel. 3. Remove 2 snap-in clips securing A-coil in unit. 4. Slide coil and pan assembly out of unit. 5. Remove horizontal drain pan support bracket from coil support rail on left side of unit and reinstall on coil support rail on right side of unit. 6. Convert air-seal assembly for horizontal right. a. Remove air-seal assembly from coil by removing 4 screws. (See Fig. 6.) b. Remove air splitter(B) from coil seal assembly by removing 3 screws. (See Fig. 6-factory-shipped inset.) c. Remove filler plate (A) and install air splitter(B) in place of filler plate. —3— A-COIL HORIZONTAL LEFT SECONDARY PRIMARY FIELD DRAIN DRAIN SUPPLIED HANGING STRAPS 001-005 21-IN. 006 24-IN. FRONT SERVICE CLEARANCE (FULL FACE UNIT OF UNIT) LOW VOLT ENTRY OPTIONS 0 0 13/4 IN. FILTER ACCESS Qb CLEARANCE o 0 0 PRIMARY ^ DRAIN SECONDARY POWER DRAIN ENTRY OPTIONS A00095 Fig. 4—Slope Coil in Horizontal-Left Application (Factory Ready) COIL MOUNTING BLOWER SCREW ASSEMBLY COIL SUPPORT O� RAIL 0� SLOPE COIL SKI DRAINPAN REFRIGERANT PRIMARY DRAIN CONNECTIONS OVERFLOW HOLE SECONDARY DRAIN A02002 Fig. 5—Slope Coil in Horizontal Right Application d. Install filler plate (A) as shown in horizontal right application. e. Remove condensate troughs (C) and install on opposite tube sheets. f. Install hose onto plastic spout. —4— A REFRIGERANT AIR SEAL CONNECTIONS ASSEMBLY q HORIZONTAL _ RIGHT COIL APPLICATION SUPPORT RAIL B COIL C BRACKET [�• DRAIN PAN SUPPORT c9 BRACKET ` COIL \ �� SUPPORT RAIL COIL BRACKET HORIZONTAL DRAIN PAN PRIMARY DRAIN HORIZONTAL RIGHT SECONDARY DRAIN HORIZONTAL RIGHT A00071 Fig. 6—A-Coil in Horizontal-Right Application 7. Install horizontal pan on right side of coil assembly. 8. Slide coil assembly into casing. Be sure coil bracket on each corner of vertical pan engages coil support rails. 9. Reinstall 2 snap-in clips to correctly position and secure coil assembly in unit. Be sure clip with large offset is used on right side of unit to secure horizontal pan. 10. Remove two oval horizontal fitting caps from the left side of the coil door and fitting panel. 11. Remove insulation knockouts on right side of coil access panel. 12. Remove 2 oval coil access panel plugs and reinstall into holes on left side of coil access panel and fitting panel. 13. Install condensate pan fitting caps(from Step 10)in the right side of the coil door making sure that the cap snaps and seats cleanly on the back side of the coil door. Make sure no insulation interferes with seating of the cap. 14. Reinstall access and fitting panels,aligning holes with tubing connections and condensate pan connections. Be sure to reinstall metal clip between fitting panel and vertical condensate pan. Make sure liquid and suction tube grommets are in place to prevent air leaks and cabinet sweating. F. Downflow Installations As CAUTION: The conversion of the fan coil to downflow requires special procedures for the condensate drains on both A-coil and Slope units. The vertical drains have an overflow hole between the primary and secondary drain holes. This hole is plugged for all applications except downflow, but must be used for downflow. During the conversion process, remove the plastic cap covering the vertical drains only and discard. Remove the plug from the overflow hole and discard.At completion of the downflow installation,caulk around the vertical pan fitting to door joint to retain the low air leak performance of the unit. In this application, field conversion of the evaporator is required using accessory downflow kit along with an accessory base kit. Use fireproof resilient gasket, 1/8-to 1/4-in. thick,between duct, unit, and floor. NOTE: To convert units for downflow applications,refer to Installation Instructions supplied''with kit for proper installation.For slope fan coils, use kit Part No.KFADCO201SLP.For A fan coils use kit Part No.KFADC0401ACL.Use fireproof resilient gasket, 1/8-to 1/4-in.thick,between duct, unit, and floor. NOTE: Gasket kit number KFAHDO101 SLP is also required for all downflow applications to maintain low air leak/low sweat performance. G. Manufactured and Mobile Home Housing Applications 1. Fan coil unit must be secured to the structure using field-supplied hardware. 2. Allow a minimum of 24"clearance from access panels. 3. Recommended method of securing for typical applications —5— 4"MAX ® SECURE FAN COIL TO STRUCTURE I UNIT AWAY FROM WALL PIPE STRAP o° 0 (TYPICAL BOTH SIDES) R OR ® \ UNIT AGAINST WALL N.THICK ANGLE MOUNTING BRACKET (TYPICAL BOTH SIDES) DOWN FLOW 0 BASE KIT(KFACB) 0 SECURE UNIT TO FLOOR ANGLE BRACKET OR PIPE STRAP r� 4"MAX A02003 Fig. 7—A-Coil a. if fan coil is away from wall,attach pipe strap to top of fan coil using No. 10 self tapping screws.Angle strap down and away from back of fan coil, remove all slack, and fasten to wall stud of structure using 5/16-in. lag screws. Typical both sides of fan coil. b. If fan coil is against wall, secure fan coil to wall stud using 1/8-in. thick right-angle brackets. Attach brackets to fan coil using No. 10 self tapping screws and to wall stud using 5/16-in. lag screws. (See Fig. 7.) PROCEDURE 3—AIR DUCTS Connect supply-air duct over outside of 3/4-in. flange provided on supply-air opening.Secure duct to flange with proper fasteners for type of duct used, and seal duct-to-trait joint. Duct connection flanges are provided on unit air discharge connection. When using FK4D units with 20-,24-,and 30-kw electric heaters,maintain a 1-in.clearance from combustible materials to discharge plenum and ductwork for a distance of 36 in. from unit.Use accessory downflow base to maintain proper clearance on downflow installations. Use flexible connectors between ductwork and unit to prevent transmission of vibration.When electric heater is installed,use heat resistant material for flexible connector between ductwork and unit at discharge connection.Ductwork passing through unconditioned space must be insulated and covered with vapor barrier. Ductwork Acoustical Treatment Metal duct systems that do not have a 90° elbow and 10 ft of main duct to first branch takeoff may require internal acoustical insulation lining. As an alternative, fibrous ductwork may be used if constructed and installed in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA construction standard on fibrous glass ducts.Both acoustical lining and fibrous ductwork shall comply with National Fire Protection Association Standards 90A or B as tested by UL Standard 181 for Class 1 air ducts. PROCEDURE 4—ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS On Units with a factory installed disconnect with pull-out removed,service and maintenance can be safely performed on only the load side of the control package. zL WARNING: Field wires on the line side of the disconnect found in the fan coil unit remain live,even when the pull-out is removed. Service and maintenance to incoming wiring can not be performed until the main disconnect switch (remote to the unit) is turned off. Failure to do so will result in electrical shock causing personal injury or death. A. Line-Voltage Connections If unit contains an electric heater,remove and discard power plug from fan coil and connect male plug from heater to female plug from unit wiring harness. (See Electric Heater Installation Instructions.) For units without electric heat: 1. Connect 208/230v power leads from field disconnect to yellow and black stripped leads. 2. Connect ground wire to unit ground lug. —6— 1 A 0 FACTORY SHIPPED COIL HORIZONTAL LEFT — BRACKET APPLICATION COIL OO SUPPORT B RAIL • C 0 DRAIN PAN SUPPORT BRACKET 0 o �O • o C COIL 0 0 BRACKET HORIZONTAL DRAIN PAN PRIMARY DRAIN AIR SEAL HORIZONTAL LEFT ASSEMBLY SECONDARY DRAIN HORIZONTAL LEFT REFRIGERANT CONNECTIONS A00072 Fig. 8—A-Coil in Horizontal Left Application (Factory Ready) Check all factory wiring per unit wiring diagram and inspect factory wiring connections to be sure none were loosened in transit or installation. 8 WARNING: Before installing or servicing system, always turn off all power to system. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Turn off accessory heater power if applicable. Electrical shack can cause personal injury or death. 0 CAUTION: If a disconnect switch is to be mounted on the unit,select a location where drill or fastener will not contact electrical or refrigerant components. Electrical shock can cause personal injury or death. NOTE: Before proceeding with electrical connections,make certain that supply voltage,frequency,and phase are as specified on unit rating plate. Be sure that electrical service provided by the utility is sufficient to handle the additional load imposed by this equipment. See unit wiring label for proper field high-and low-voltage wiring.Make all electrical connections in accordance with NEC and any local codes or ordinances that may apply.Use copper wire only.The unit must have a separate branch electric circuit with a field-supplied disconnect switch located within sight from, and readily accessible from the unit. B. 24–V Control System Connections to Unit Printed-Circuit Board (PCB) Refer to unit wiring instructions for recommended wiring procedures. Use No. 18 AWG color-coded, insulated(35°C minimum)wires to make low-voltage connections between thermostat and unit. If thermostat is located more than 100 ft fi-Orn unit (as measured along the low-voltage wires),use No. 16 AWG color-coded,insulated(35°C minimum)wires.PCB is circuited for single-stage heater operation.When additional heater staging is desired using outdoor thermostats or Intelligent Heat Staging, remove Jumper J2 on PCB to enable staging. Connect low-voltage leads to thermostat and outdoor unit. (See Fig. 9, 10, 11, or 12.) C. Intelligent Heat Staging Option Intelligent Heat staging of the electric heat package is possible when the FK4D is installed as a part of a single-speed heat pump system using a corporate 2-speed programmable thermostat(model TSTATXXP2S01-B), ThermidistatTM Control, or capable zoning control and any 1 of the following electric heat packages: Relay heaters KFCEH1401N09,KFCEH1501F15,KFCEH1701C15,KFCEH 180 1 F20,KFCEH 190 1 C20,KFCEH21011724,OR KFCEH2201F30. Complete system low-voltage wiring as shown in Fig. 9, 10, 11, or 12. NOTE: Where local codes require thermostat wiring be routed through conduit or raceways, splices can be made inside the fan coil unit. All wiring must be NEC Class 1 and must be separated from incoming power leads. A factory-authorized disconnect kit is available for installation of 0-through 10-kw applications.When electric heat packages with circuit breakers are installed,the circuit breaker can be used as a disconnect.Transformer is factory wired for 230-v operation.For 208-v applications,disconnect black wire from 230-v terminal on transforner and connect it to 208-v terminal. (See Fig. 13.) The secondary circuit of transformer is protected by a 5-amp fuse mounted on printed-circuit board. IMPORTANT: Do not use outdoor thermostat with Intelligent Heat Staging. D. Manufactured Housing In Manufactured Housing applications,the Code of Federal Regulations,Title 24,Chapter XX,Part 3280.714 requires that supplemental electric heat be locked out at outdoor temperatures above 40 degrees F.,except for a heat pump defrost cycle.A corporate thermostat in conjunction with an outdoor sensor can be used to lock out supplemental heat above 40 degrees F. Refer to thermostat instructions for details. If a non-corporate thermostat is used, an outdoor thermostat may be required. —7— INDOOR CONTROL FAN COIL 1-SPEED AIR CONDITIONER HEAT STAGE 2 O/W2 --- 47-21 NIA Y1NV2 Y1 REMOVE J2 JUMPER FOR HEAT STAGING HEAT STAGE 1 FW/-W1 --- W1 COOL STAGE 17/Y2 --- Y/Y2 -- R--M FAN = --- G 24 VAC HOT --- R REMOVE J1 JUMPER p FOR ❑ DEHUMIDIFY MODES DEHUMIDIFY DHUM --- DH 24 VAC COMM --- C -- — —LJ HUMIDIFY HUM — HUMIDIFIER 24 VAC OUTDOOR OUTDOOR A B — SENSOR SENSOR _ CONNECTION S2 ---------- —� A98477 Fig. 9—FK4D Fan Coil Wiring with 1-Speed Air Conditioner INDOOR CONTROL FAN COIL 2-SPEED AIR CONDITIONER HEAT STAGE 2 O/W2 L REMOVE J2 JUMPER HEAT STAGE 1 W/W1 ---JWL FOR HEAT STAGING COOL STAGE 1 F_1/w__2L Y1 -- Y1 COOL STAGE 2FLY/Y2 1. --- Y/Y FAN 24 VAC HOT --- R -- — U REMOVE El JI JUMPER FOR DEHUMIDIFY MODES DEHUMIDIFY HUM --- DH 24 VAC COMM --- C -- — HUMIDIFY HUM — HUMIDIFIER (24 VAC) N/A =B OUTDOOR OUTDOOR S1 — SENSOR i SENSOR CONNECTION S2 ------------j A98478 Fig. 10—FK4D Fan Coil Wiring with 2-Speed Air Conditioner E. Comfort Options-Perfect Heat Plus/Super Comfort Heat and Superdehumidify Warmer heating and Superdehumidify options are possible when the FK4D Fan Coil is installed with an outdoor temperature sensor(needed for warmer heating only), a ThermidistatTM Control, Zone Perfect Plus, or Comfort Zone II. See Procedure 8, I. Comfort Options for complete description of these features. Complete the system low-voltage wiring as shown in Fig. 9, 10, 11,or 12. —8— INDOOR CONTROL FAN COIL 1-SPEED HEAT PUMP RVS COOLING FO/w2 HEAT STAGE 3 1/W2 REMOVE J2 JUMPER FOR HEAT STAGING HEAT STAGE 2 W71 L W2 HEAT/COOL Y/Y2 -- -- CJ STAGE 1 — Y/Y2 J �Y FAN [:�::F --- G 24 VAC HOT REMOVE Y1 DE UMIDFyOR El MODES DEHUMIDIFY FHUM --- DH 24 VAC COMM HUMIDIFY HUM — HUMIDIFIER (24 VAC RVS HEATING OUTDOOR OUTDOORFC��:J — SENSOR ti SENSOR CONNECTIO ------------� A98475 Fig. 11—FK4D Fan Coil Wiring with 1-Speed Heat Pump INDOOR CONTROL FAN COIL 2-SPEED HEAT PUMP RVS COOLING O/W2 HEAT/COOL STAGE 1 HEAT STAGE 3 W1 W1 HEAT/COOL Y/Y2 __ REMOVE J2❑ JUMPER FOR STAGE 2 i W2 HEAT STAGING FAN -, Y/Y2 -- Y2 24 VAC HOT R� - REMOVE J1 FOR DEHUMIDIFY HUM --- DH DEHUMIDIFY MODES 24 VAC COMM HUMIDIFY HUM - HUMIDIFIER (24 VAC) J RVS HEATING OUTDOOR OUTDOOR S1 - SENSOR SENSOR CONNECTION S2 -------------J A02005 Fig. 12—FK4D Fan Coil Wiring with 2-Speed Puron Heat Pump F. Ground Connections Q WARNING: The cabinet must have an uninterrupted or unbroken ground according to NEC,ANSI/NFPA 70 and local codes to minimize personal injury if an electrical fault should occur. The ground may consist of electrical wire or metal conduit when installed in accordance with existing electrical codes. (See Ground/Conduit Note below.)Failure to follow this warning could result in an electrical shock, fire, or death. NOTE: Use UL listed conduit and conduit connector to connect supply wire(s)to unit and obtain proper grounding. If conduit connection uses reducing washers, a separate ground wire must be used. Grounding may also be accomplished by using grounding lug provided in control box. Use of dual or multiple supply circuits will require grounding of each circuit to ground lugs provided on unit and heaters. —9— SECONDARY BRN RED v YEL h ry BLK o ) PRIMARY A94067 Fig. 13—Transformer Connections PROCEDURE 5—REFRIGERANT TUBING CONNECTION AND EVACUATION Use accessory tubing package or field-supplied tubing of refrigerant grade. Insulate entire suction tube if field-supplied tubing is used. Tubing package has an insulated suction tube. Do not use damaged, dirty, or contaminated tubing because it may plug refrigerant flow control device. When tubing package is used and sweat connections are made within 60 sec,coil and tubing system does not require evacuation.Always evacuate coil and field-supplied tubing to 500 microns before opening outdoor unit service valves. Q CAUTION: A brazing shield MUST be used when tubing sets are being brazed to the unit connections to prevent damage to the unit surface and condensate pan fitting caps. Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. Units have sweat suction and liquid tube connections. Make suction tube connection first. OWN 1. Cut tubing to correct length. 2. Insert tube into sweat connection on unit until it bottoms. 3. Braze connection using silver bearing or non-silver bearing brazing materials. Do not use solder (materials which melt below 800°F). Consult local code requirements. 0 CAUTION: Wrap a wet cloth around rear of fitting to prevent damage to TXV and factory-made joints.Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. 4. Evacuate coil and tubing system to 500 microns using deep vacuum method. PROCEDURE 6—CONDENSATE DRAIN Q CAUTION: The conversion of the fan coil to downflow requires special procedures for the condensate drains on both A-coil and Slope units.The vertical drains have an overflow hole between the primary and secondary drain holes.This hole is plugged for all applications except downflow, but must be used for downflow. During the conversion process, remove the plastic cap covering the vertical drains only and discard. Remove the plug from the overflow hole and discard.At completion of the downflow installation, caulk around the vertical pan fitting to door joint to retain the low leak performance of the unit.Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. To connect drains the cap openings must be removed. Use a knife to start the opening near the tab and using pliers,pull the tab to remove the disk.Clean the edge of the opening if necessary and install the condensate line.Finally caulk around the lines where they exit the fitting to retain the low leak rating of the unit. Units are equipped with primary and secondary 3/4-in. FPT drain connections.For proper condensate line installation see Fig.2,4,5,and 6.To prevent property damage and achieve optimum drainage performance,BOTH primary and secondary drain lines should be installed and include properly-sized condensate traps.(See Fig. 14 and 16.)Factory-approved condensate traps are available.Be sure to install plastic push-in plugs in amused condensate drain fittings.It is recommended that PVC fittings be used on the plastic condensate pan.Do not over-tighten.Finger-tighten plus 1-1/2 turns.Use pipe dope. zL CAUTION: Shallow running traps are inadequate and DO NOT allow proper condensate drainage.(See Fig.15.)Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE: When connecting condensate drain lines avoid blocking filter access panel. Prime both primary and secondary condensate traps after connecting to drain pan. —10— UNIT } 2"MIN UMINA03002 —� Fig. 14—Recommended Condensate'Trap 1,p DO NOT USE SHALLOW RUNNING TRAPS! A03013 —� Fig. 15—Insufficient Condensate Trap 0 0 ® � e e e 0 0 FILTER ACCESS PANEL SECONDARY DRAIN WITH APPROPRIATE TRAP REQUIRED (USE FACTORY KIT OR FIELD-SUPPLIED TRAP) PRIMARY TRAP REQUIRE (USE FACTORY KIT OR FIELD-SUPPLIED TRAP OF SUFFICIENT DEPTH. STANDARD P-TRAPS ARE NOT SUFFICIENT.SEE FIGURE OF RECOMMENDED CONDENSATE TRAP) A03003 Fig. 16—Condensate Trap and Unit NOTE: If unit is located in or above a living space where damage may result from condensate overflow,a field-supplied external condensate pan Should be installed underneath the entire unit, and a secondary condensate line(with appropriate trap) should be run from the unit into the pan. Any condensate in this external condensate pan should be drained to a noticeable place.As an alternative to using an external condensate pan,some localities may allow the use of a separate 3/4-in. condensate line(with appropriate trap)to a place where the condensate will be noticeable.The owner of the structure must be informed that when condensate flows from the secondary drain or external condensate pan, the unit requires servicing, or water damage will occur. Install traps in the condensate lines as close to the coil as possible. (See Fig. 16.) Make sure,that the outlet of each trap is below its connection to the condensate pan to prevent condensate from overflowing the drain pan.Prime all traps,'test for leaks,and insulate traps if located above a living area. —11— Table 1—CFM Range for FK4D Units FAN COIL SIZE SYSTEM SIZES CPM RANGE FK41)NI'001,002 018,024,030,036 450-1275 FK4DNF003 024,030,036,042 525-1475 FK4DNF005 030,036,042,048 550-1700 FK4DNB006 036,042,048,060 550-2150 Condensate drain lines should be pitched downward at a minimum of I in.for every 10 ft.of length.Consult local codes for additional restrictions or precautions. 0 CAUTION: Never operate unit without a filter or with filter access door removed. Damage to blower motor or coil can result. Failure to follow this CAUTION could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. IMPORTANT: Factory authorized filters must be used when locating the filter inside the unit.For those applications where access to an internal filter is impractical, a field-supplied filter must be installed in the return duct system. PROCEDURE 7—UNIT START-UP Refer to outdoor unit Installation Instructions for system start-up instructions and refrigerant charging method details. PROCEDURE 8—EASY SELECT CONFIGURATION TAPS Easy SelectTM taps are used by the installer to configure a system.ECM motor uses the selected taps to modify its operation to a pre-programmed table of airflows.(See Table 2 and 3.)Airflows are based on system size or mode of operation and those airflows are modified in response to other inputs such as the need for de-humidification. (See Fig. 17 and 18.) The FK4D Fan Coil must be configured to operate properly with system components with which it is installed.To successfully configure abasic system(see information printed on circuit board label located next to select pins),move the 6 select wires to the pins which match the components used. A. AUX HEAT KW/CFM - Select heater range for size of electric heater installed Installer must select the auxiliary heat airflow approved for application with kw size heater installed. If no heater is installed, this step can be skipped.Each select pin is marked with a range of heaters for which airflow,also marked,is approved.For increased comfort select the narrowest kw range matching the heater size,for example, 0-10 for 10-kw heater.This airflow must be greater than the minimum CFM for electric heater application with the size system installed for safe and continuous operation. (See Table 4 and 5 for airflow delivery and minimum CFM.)Note that airflow marked is the airflow which will be supplied in emergency heat mode and heating mode on air conditioners when electric heat is the primary heating source.In heat pump heating mode when electric heaters are energized,the ECM will run the higher of heat pump heating airflow and electric heater airflow to ensure safe heater operation.The factory selection is the largest heater range approved.(See Fig. 17,A as indicated.) B. AC/HP SIZE -Select system size installed The factory setting for air conditioner or heat pump size is the largest unit meant for application with the model of fan coil purchased. Installer needs to select air conditioner or heat pump size to ensure that airflow delivered falls within proper range for the size unit installed.This applies to all operational modes with the exception of electric heat modes. (See Fig. 17, B as indicated.) C. SYSTEM TYPE -Select system type installed AC or HP The type of system must be selected: 1. AC - Air conditioner 2. HP-COMFORT - Heat Pump Comfort provides approximately 315 CFM per ton for higher normal heating air delivery temperature. Provides approximately 350 CFM per ton cooling airflow for good humidity removal. 3. HP-EFF-Heat Pump Efficiency provides same airflow for heating and cooling modes to increase overall HP efficiency;approximately 350 CFM per ton. The factory setting is AC. (See Fig. 17, C as indicated.) D. AC/HP CFM ADJUST -Select Medium, Low, or High airflow To provide airflow at rates described above,the AC/HP ADJUST select is factory set to the nominal(nom)tap.The adjust selections HI/LO will regulate airflow supplied for all operational modes,except non-heat pinup heating modes. HI provides 15 percent airflow over nominal unit size selected and LO provides 10 percent airflow below nominal unit size selected. Adjust selection options are provided to adjust airflow supplied to meet individual installation needs for such things as noise, comfort, and humidity removal. (See Fig. 17, D as indicated.) E. ON/OFF DELAY -Select desired time delay profile Four motor operation delay profiles are provided to customize and enhance system operation. (See Fig. 17, E as indicated) NOTE: The ON/OFF time delay profiles are active only in heat pump only heating and cooling modes. In auxiliary heat modes, there is a zero on delay and a one minute off delay programmed into the motor that cannot be overridden. . Selection options are: 1. The standard 90 sec off delay (Factory setting)at 100 percent airflow. 2. No delay option used for servicing unit or when a thermostat is utilized to perform delay functions. 3. A 30 sec on delay with no airflow/90 sec off delay at 100 percent airflow profile is used when it is desirable to allow system coils time to heat-up/cool-down in conjunction with the airflow. —12— LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BLOCK PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD SECT SEC2 A O J1 ELECT'" T KW/CFM R 16 —8 J2A _D _D�P SIZE I024 _018 Jll DY, SYSTEM TYPE _� AC RP COMFORT NP.EFF YfY ORN ]l 8 8 2 AC/HP CFM ADJUST ® GD NOM Lo Ri DLK 8 1 8 y ON/OFF DELAY U�! IJ{I E WHT a 9p 9 ENR �W Y U ONTINUOUS FAN AUX1 HUM1 F�I LO MED HI 1 EL ® B VEL 8 8 11111111 CEBD430226-016 CFS 10226-CTB AU X2 HUM2 0 0 OOOO00000000 24VAC ® o HEATER/MOTOR GRV ' MOLEX 12-PIN CONNECTOR A95275 Fig. 17—Detail of FK4D Printed-Circuit Board 4. ENH,enhanced selection,provides a 30 see on delay with no airflow/plus 150 sec at 70 percent airflow/no off delay for added comfort. This profile will minimize cold blow in heat pinup operation and could enhance system efficiency. F. CONTINUOUS FAN - Select desired fan speed when thermostat is set on continuous fan NOTE: 1f installed with a 2-speed outdoor unit,do not select HI speed continuous fan.If HI is selected,low speed compression will also run HI speed possibly resulting in insufficient dehumidification. 1. LO speed - factory setting, 50 percent cooling mode airflow. 2. MED speed- move connector to MED, 65 percent cooling mode airflow. 3. HI speed - move connector of HI, 100 percent cooling mode airflow. (See Fig. 17, F as indicated.) G. Low-Voltage Circuit Fusing and Reference Thelow-voltagecircuit is fused by a board-mounted 5-amp automotive fuse placed in series with the transformer SEC2 and the R circuit.The C circuit of the transformer is referenced to chassis ground through a printed circuit run at SECp connected to metal standoff marked with ground symbol. H. Basic Fan Coil Configuration The following basic configuration of the fan coil will provide ARI rated performance of the heat pump: I. AUX HEAT KW/CFM- Select the heater range for the size electric heater installed. 2. AC/HP SIZE- Select system size installed. 3. SYSTEM TYPE- Select system type HP-EFF. 4. AC/HP CFM ADJUST- Select NOM. 5. ON/OFF DELAY- Select 0/90 profile. 6. CONTINUOUS FAN- Select desired fan speed when thermostat is set to continuous fan. 1. COMFORT OPTIONS-Perfect Heat Plus/Super Comfort Heat and Superdehumidify(See Fig.20 for Quick Reference Guide) Perfect Heat Plus/Super Comfort Heat and Superdehumidify options are possible when the FK4D Fan Coil is installed with an outdoor temperature sensor, a ThermidistatTM Control, Zone Perfect Plus, or Comfort Zone IL NOTE: The FK4D Fan Coil provides better than average humidity control and heated air temperature. This configuration will improve the comfort provided by the heat pump system if more humidity removal or if warmer heating air is desired.While providing this improved comfort, the heat pump system will operate efficiently, but not at the published HSPF or ARI SEER efficiency. The following fan coil configuration is recommended for maximum heating and cooling/dehumidifying comfort: (See Fig. 17.) 1. AUX HEAT KW/CFM - Select narrowest heater range to match size of electric heater installed (skip this step if no heater is installed). 2. AC/HP SIZE - Select system size installed. —13— SEC1 SEC2 Ji 0 cm 8 off EASY SELECTi° R AUX HEAT KWICFM IN, Il a Il ACIHP SIZE W2 111 Il 121 I Y, SYSTEM TYPE NPcQ a+. I" Y/Y2 OR CIHP CFMG` ••ADJUST ® BLK O ® O ON/OFF DELAY — fNII ® C WHT b ONTINUCUS FAN AUX1 HUM1 LO MED HI EL YEL 8 b CEBD,I3 -1B CE55a30226-01B AU%2 HUM2 O HEATERIMOT Al 12-PIN MATE-N-LOCK ELECTRIC HEAT CONNECTOR A95275 Fig. 18—PCB Wiring Arrangement 3. SYSTEM TYPE- Select system type HP-COMFORT(for heat pump system)or AC (for air conditioner system). 4. AC/HP CFM ADJUST- Select LO. 5. ON/OFF DELAY-Select ENH profile. 6. CONTINUOUS FAN - Select desired fan speed when thermostat is set to continuous fan. 7. If the fan coil is installed with Intelligent Heat Staging capable electric heaters,remove jumper J2. (See Fig. 17.) NOTE: If configuring to run warmer heating, do not remove jumper J2 when using 5-, 8-, or 10-kw heaters. 8. Remove jumper J1 to activate dehumidify modes. 9. Wire low voltage connections as shown in Fig. 9, 10, 11,or 12. 10. Configure Thermidistat(or capable zoning system) following its installation instructions for Super Dehumidify operation. This configuration provides the following comfort enhancements: a. A 30 second blower on delay with 150 seconds at 70 percent airflow to allow the indoor coil to warm up or cool down before the blower is asked to deliver 100 percent airflow reducing the cold blow sensation at start up in heating and allowing the indoor coil to more quickly reach wet coil operating conditions in cooling. b. No blower off delay eliminates cold blow which may be associated with running the blower after shut down of the compressor and avoids re-evaporation of condensed moisture after cooling/dehumidifying operation. c. Lower airflow while the compressor is running to reduce draft effects and increase heating air temperature and improved humidity control during cooling operation. d. Intelligent Staging of the electric heater elements to more closely match heating load requirements and provide more consistent heating air temperatures. PROCEDURE 9—ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Accessory Electric Heaters Electric heaters may be installed with the FK4D Fan Coil per instructions supplied with electric heater package. See unit rating plate for factory-approved electric heater kits. —14— NOTE: Units installed without electric heat should have a field-supplied sheet metal block-off plate covering the heater opening. This reduces air leakage and formation of exterior condensation. B. Auxiliary Terminals The AUX and HUM terminals on the Easy Select Board are tied directly to the G terminal,and provide a 24-vac signal whenever the G terminal is energized.(See Fig. 17 and 18.)During Perfect Heat Plus/Super Comfort Heat and Superdehumidify modes,the G signal is not present and the auxiliary terminals are not energized. If the installation includes the use of one of these operating modes, do not use these terminals to control accessories. See Electronic Air Cleaner and Humidifier sections for further information. C. Electronic Air Cleaner Connections The AUXI and AUX2 terminals are not always energized during blower operation,as described above.When using an electronic air cleaner with the FK4D Fan Coil, use Airflow Sensor Part No.KEAAC0101 AAA.The airflow sensor turns on electronic air cleaner when the fan coil blower is operating. D. Humidifier/Humidistat Connections The HUM] and HUM2 terminals are not always energized during blower operation, as described under Auxiliary Terminals section. To ensure humidifier will operate properly,use HUM output of Thermidistat Control,Zone Perfect Plus,for Comfort Zone II to control humidifier operation. Alternatively,the 24-vac signal can be sourced from the W and C terminal block connections when electric heaters are used as the primary heating source, or if another humidistat is desired to control the humidifier. (See Fig. 9, 10, 11, and 12.) E. Dehumidify Capability with Standard Humidistat Connection Latent capacities for systems using the FK4D Fan Coil are better than average systems.If increased latent capacity is an application requirement, the field wiring terminal block provides connection terminals for use of a standard humidistat. The FK4D Fan Coil will detect the humidistat contacts opening on increasing htnnidity and reduce its airflow to approximately 80 percent of,nominal cooling mode airflow.This reduction will increase the system latent capacity until the humidity falls to a level which causes the humidistat to close its contacts.When the contacts close, the airflow will return to 100 percent of the selected cooling airflow.To activate this mode,remove Juniper JI and wire in a standard humidistat. F. Dehumidify and Super Dehumidify Capabilities This model fan coil is capable of responding to a signal from indoor system control(thermostat,Thermidistat,zoning control)to operate in comfort control modes such as Super Dehumidify Mode.Consult literature provided with indoor system control to determine if these operating modes are available, and to see control set up instructions.No special setup or wiring of fan coil is required. PROCEDURE 10—FK4D FAN COIL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION The FK4D will supply airflow in a range which is more than twice the range of a standard Jan coil. It is designed to provide nominal cooling capacities at a 50°F evaporator temperature and the required airflow which enables it to match with 4 air conditioner or heat pump system sizes. Table 1 outlines the CFM range for the different FK4D Fan Coil sizes. A. Continuous Fan • Thermostat closes circuit R to G. • The blower runs at continuous fan airflow. B. Cooling Mode -Single speed or 2-Speed High • If indoor temperature is above temperature set point and humidity is below humidity set point, thermostat closes circuits R to G,R to Y/Y2 and R to O. The fan coil delivers single speed cooling airflow. • Thermostat closes circuits R to G, R to Y1,R to Y2 and R to O. The fan coil delivers 2-speed high cooling airflow. C. Cooling mode -2-Speed Low If indoor temperature is above temperature set point and humidity is below humidity set point,thermostat closes circuits R to G,R to Y1 and R to 0. The fan coil delivers 2-speed low cooling airflow. D. Cooling Mode -Dehumidification • If indoor temperature is above temperature set point and humidity is above humidity set paint,thermostat or ThermidistatTM closes circuits R to G,R to O, and R to Y/Y2, and humidistat or Thermidistat opens R to DH. • The fan coil delivers airflow which is approximately 80 percent of the nominal cooling airflow to increase the latent capacity of the system. E. Cooling Mode -Superdehumidify Operation (See Fig. 20 for Quick Reference Guide) NOTE: The indoor control used, such as Thermidistat, must be capable of providing Super Dehumidify operation mode and control must be configured as outlined in its installation instructions. Consult indoor control literature to determine if control is capable of providing Super Dehumidify inputs and for configuration instructions. If the indoor temperature is below the temperature set point and the humidity is above the humidity set point,the Thermidistat closes circuit R to O,opens circuits R to DH and R to G,and cycles circuit R to Y/Y2(for single speed system R to Y1,or R to Y1 and Y/Y2 for 2-speed system). The ECM motor reads the G signal to the fan coil while the heat pump is operating,(circuit R to Y/Y2 for single speed system,R to Y1 or R to Y1 and Y/Y2 for 2-speed system),closed(24 vac).If circuit R to G is closed(24 vac),the motor will deliver airflow at the full cooling or cooling plus dehumidify mode requested value.If circuit R to G is open(0 vac)for super dehumidify mode,the motor delivers reduced airflow to maximize the humidity removal of the system while minimizing overcooling. F. Electric Heat Heating Mode • Thermostat closes circuit R to W/W1, or W2. • The fan coil delivers the selected electric heat airflow. —15— Table 2—FK4D Fan Coil Airflow Delivery (CFM) in Cooling Mode OPERATING MODE Two-Speed OUTDOOR Single-Speed Application UNIT Application FAN ONLY SIZE UNIT High Speed Low Speed LO/MED/H1 CAPACITY Nominal A/C Nominal A/C Nominal A/C A/C Cooling A/C Cooling A/C Cooling Cooling Dehumidity Cooling Dehumidity Cooling Dehumidity 018 525 420 — — — — 350/350/525 002 024 700 560 735 590 440 350 350/440/700 030 875 700 — 440/550/875 036 1050 840 1100 880 660 530 525/660/1050 024 700 560 735 590 440 415 415/440/700 003 030 875 700 — — — — 440/550/875 036 1050 840 1100 880 660 530 525/660/1050 042 1225 980 — — — — 610/770/1225 030 875 700 — — — — 440/550/875 U05 036 1050 840 1100 880 660 530 525/660/1050 042 1225 980 — — 610/770/1225 048 1400 1120 1470 1175 880 705 700/880/1400 036 1050 840 1100 880 660 530 525/660/1050 006 042 1225 980 — — — — 610/770/1225 048 1400 1120 1470 1175 880 705 700/880/1400 060 1 1750 1400 1 1835 1470 1100 880 875/1100/1750 NOTE 1.The above airflows result with the AC/HP CFM ADJUST select jumper set on NOW 2.Airflow can be adjusted+15 percent or-10 percent by selecting HI or LO respectively for all modes except fan only. 3.Dry coil at 230 volts and with 10kw heater and filter installed. 4.Airflows shown are at standard air conditions. Table 3—FK4D Fan Coil Airflow Delivery (CFM) in Heat Pump Only Heating Mode OPERATING MODE Two-Speed UNIT OUTDOOR Single-Speed Application FAN ONLY SIZE UNIT Application High Speed Low Speed LO/MED/HI CAPACITY Heat Pump Heat Pump Heat Pump Heat Pump Heat Pump Heat Pump Comfort Efficiency Comfort Efficiency Comfort Efficiency 018 470 525 — — — — 350/350/470 002 024 630 700 660 735 395 440 350/395/630 030 785 875 — — — — 440/520/785 036 945 1050 990 1100 595 660 525/595/945 024 630 700 660 735 415 440 415/415/630 003 030 785 875 — — — — 440/520/785 036 945 1050 990 1100 595 660 525/595/945 042 1100 1225 — — 610/695/1100 030 785 875 — — — — 440/520/785 005 036 945 1050 990 1100 595 660 525/595/945 042 1100 1225 — — 610/695/1100 048 1260 1400 1320 1470 795 880 700/795/1260 036 945 1050 990 1100 595 660 525/595/945 006 042 1100 1225 — — 610/695/1100 048 1260 1400 1325 1470 795 880 700/795/1260 060 1 1575 1750 1655 1835 990 1 1100 875/990/1575 NOTE 1.The above airflows result with the AC/HP CFM ADJUST select jumper set on NOM. 2.Airflow can be adjusted+15 percent or-10 percent by selecting HI or LO respectively for all modes except fan only. 3.Dry coil at 230 volts and with 10kw heater and filter installed. 4.Airflows shown are at standard air conditions. G. Heat Pump Heating Mode -Single speed or 2-Speed High • Thermostat closes circuits R to G and R to Y/Y2. The fan coil delivers single speed heat pump heating airflow. • Thermostat closes circuits R to G,R to Y1 and R to Y/Y2. The fan coil delivers 2-speed high heat pump heating airflow. H. Heat Pump Heating Mode -2-Speed Low • Thermostat closes circuits R to G and R to Yl. The fan coil delivers 2-speed heat pump heating low airflow. I. Heat Pump Heating with Auxiliary Electric Heat Thermostat closes circuits R to G, R to Y/Y2 and/or R to Y1 with R to W/W1 or W2 (and R to O in the case of defrost). In the event that electric heating is called for by the thermostat while the heat pump is also operating in either heating or defrost modes,the motor will modify its airflow output,if necessary,to provide an airflow which is defined as safe for the operation of the electric heater during heat pump operation. That airflow is the greater of the heat pump heating airflow and the electric heater only airflow. —16— Table 4—FK4D Airflow Delivery (CFM) OUTDOOR FAN UNIT ELECTRIC HEATER KW RANGE UNIT CAPACITY 0 5 0_10 0-15 SIZE 0-20 BTU" LO NOM HI LO NOM HI LO NOM HI LO NOM HI 18,000 625 625 625 675 1 675 675 001 24,000 650 725 835 * 725 835 875 875 875 002 30,000 815 905 1040 * 905 1040 900 900 1040 1100 1100 1100 36,000 980 1085 1250 980 1085 1250 9801 1085 1250 1100 1100 1250 24,000 675 725 835 875 875 * * * . * 003 30,000 815 905 1040 875 9051040 1100 1100 1100 36,000 980 1085 1250 980 1085 [1460 250 1100 1100 1250 1225 1225 1250 42,000 1140 1270 1460 1140 1270 1140 1270 1460 1225 1270 1460 FAN OUT ELECTRIC HEATER KN'1' RANGE UNIT UNIT SIZE CAPACITY 0-10 0-15 0-20 0-30 BTUH I NOM HI LO NOM HI LO NOM HI LO NOM HI 30,000 975 975 1040 1100 1100 1100 * 005 36,000 980 1085 1250 1100 1100 1250 1250 1250 1250 42,000 1140 1270 1460 1140 1270 1460 1250 1270 1460 48,000 1305 1450 1 1665 1305 1450 1665 1 1305 1450 1665 1500 1500 1665 36,000 1100 1100 12.50 1350 1350 1350 006 42,000 1 1140 1270 1460 1350 1350 1460 1525 1525 1525 * * + 48,000 1305 1450 1665 1350 1450 1665 1525 1525 1665 1750 1750 1750 60,000 1630 1810 2085 1630 1810 2085 16.30 1810 2085 1750 1810 2085 Airflow not recommended for heater/system size. NOTE:LO,NOM,and HI refer to AC/HP CFM ADJUST selection. Table 5—FK4D Minimum CFM for Electric Heater Application FAN HEAT PUMP CFM COIL UNIT HEATER SIZE KW UNIT SIZE 5 8,9, 10 15 18,20 24,30 Heater Only 625 625 725 875 — 018 625 625 — 001 002 024 650 725 875 — — — 030 800 875 975 1040 — 036 970 970 970 ]040 — Heater Only 675 700 11050 1050 — 024 675 875 1050 — — 003 030 800 875 1100 — — 036 975 975 1100 1225 — 042 1125 1125 1'125 1225 — Heater Only 675 700 1!050 1050 1400 030 800 875 1100 — — 005 036 975 975 1100 1225 — 042 1125 1125 1125 1225 — 048 1305 1305 1305 1305 1400 Heater Only 1050 1050 1050 1050 1750 036 1100 1100 1350 1350 — 006 042 1125 1125 1,350 1350 — 048 1300 1 1300 1350 1465 1750 060 1625 1625 1 1625 1750 11750 NOTES: 1.Heater Only-Air conditioner with electric heater application. 2.These airflows are minimum acceptable airflows as UL listed.Actual airflow delivered will be per airflow delivery chart for Electric Heating Modes. J. Heat Pump Heating with ThermidistatTl Control,Zone Perfect Plus, or Comfort Zone II (See Fig. 20 for Quick Reference Guide) NOTE: The indoor control used, such as a Thermidistat, must be capable of providing warmer heating operation mode and control must be configured as outlined in its installation instructions. The system must be installed with appropriate outdoor temperature sensor. Consult indoor control literature to determine if control is capable of providing warmer heating control outputs and for configuration instructions.Consult indoor control and sensor instructions for installation and configuration details. If the outdoor temperature is in the range of 10°to 407,the Thennidistat closes circuit R to'Y/Y2(for single speed system R to Y1,or R to Yl and Y/Y2 for 2-speed system)and opens circuit R to G. —17— J1 JUMPER–PULL FOR DEHUMIDIFICATION CONTROL J2 Jig FOR LOW VOLTAGE SCREW TERMINALS ING C2 DH —DEHUMIDIFICATION INPUT TTN —24 VAC HOT CFM R oir J2 W1 —AUXILARY HEAT STAGE 1 AC/HP SIZE W2 —AUXILIARY HEAT STAGE 2 038 030 010 "a'BLU a A a a Y, —LOW SPEED COMPRESSOR SYSTEM TYPE AC RRC41ORT RF-EFF VY2 —SINGLE OR HI SPEED ORN a a a N CIHP CFMOADJUST„ ® G —COMPRESSOR BLK 8 8 8 ® O =FAN ONIOFF DELAY e 9t.NT�NUWS EN„ �UnJ ® C REVERSING VALVE WHT a 0 COMMON FAN AUX1LO HI EL BYEL a gUX2 HUM2 G YIY2 Wz 24V DH CEBD430226-01B CESS430226-018 � 0 000000000000 24VAC ❑❑❑ ❑❑❑ �� moi-® 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 PIN 12 � HEATERIMOTOR GRY— 12-PIN CONNECTOR ❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑ (PL-1) PIN 1 Y1 16-PIN PLUG C W1 C A03004 Fig. 19—Control Signals (Easy Select Board & 16-Pin Plug) The ECM motor reads the G signal to the fan coil.If circuit R to G is closed(24 vac),the motor will deliver airflow at the full heating requested value.If circuit R to G is open(0 vac)for maximum heating comfort,the motor delivers reduced airflow to maximize the temperature and minimize the draft effect of the heated air leaving the fan coil. PROCEDURE 11—TROUBLESHOOTING ECM MOTOR AND CONTROLS ® CAUTION: High voltage is always present at motor. Disconnect power to unit before removing or replacing connectors or servicing motor. Wait at least 5 min after disconnecting power before opening motor. The ECM motor used with this product contains two parts: the control module and motor winding section.Do not assume the motor or module is defective if it will not start. Go through the steps described below before replacing control module, Easy Select Board or entire motor. The control module is available as a replacement part. A. If motor turns slowly: 1. Replace panel. Motor may appear to run slowly if access panel is removed. 2. It is normal operation to run noticeably slower if G terminal is not energized in cooling or heat-pump modes. B. If motor does not run: Turn off power and check the following: 1. Check 5 amp fuse on Easy Select Board. 2. Check for 24vac on SEC1 and SEC2. If no voltage is present, check transformer. 3. Check all plugs and receptacles for any deformation which could cause loose connections. Be sure plugs are fully seated. 4. Verify that approximately 230vac is present at motor. 5. Verify low-voltage control signals to motor. The motor receives its control signals through the 12-pin plug(PL-1)on Easy Select Board and 16-pin plug on wiring harness.(See Troubleshooting Example.)The combinations of pins energized will determine motor speed.(See Fig. 19.) See Table 6 for circuit board, low-voltage screw terminals energized and for voltage present at each pin on 12-pin plug(PL-1). See Table 6 for pin number on 16-pin plug which should have voltage when Easy Select Board screw terminals have 24vac. �++ C. Use following procedure to check control signals: THERMOSTAT 1. Remove all thermostat wires from Easy Select Board. 2. Jumper screw terminals(1 at a time):R-G,R-Y/Y2,R-Y1,R-WI.If motor rums in all cases,thermostat is miswired,configured incorrectly or defective.If motor rums in some cases,but not others,continue to check wiring harness and circuit board. —18— Table 6—Wiring Connections of FK Fan Coil Wiring Harness 16-IN PLUG ON WIRING HARNESS'FO AIO'FOR WIRING HARNF4SS CONNECTION 1'0 EASY SELECT BOARD Pin on 12-Yin PILL Signal on Pin with Pin on 16-Pin Plug Description g or Set-up Selection Wire Color Screw Terminal aumpered to R* 1 Common Pin 9 on PL-1 Brown 2 W1 Auxiliary Heat Stage I Pin 7 on PL-1 Violet 24VAC** 3 Common Pin 10 on PL-1 Orange 4 On/Off Delay Selection On/Off Delay Seleclion White 5 AC/HP Size Selection AC/HP Size Selection Blue 6 YI Low Speed AC or HP Pin 3 on PL-1 Black (-) 12VDC** 7 AC/HP CFM Adjust AC/HP CFM Adjust Selection Selection Black 8 Not Used N/A Not Used 9 System Type Selection System Type Selection Orange 10 Dehumidify Pin 12 on PL-1 Gray OV(24VAC on no call) 11 Aux Heat Size Aux Heat Size Selection Selection Violet 12 24v AC Pin 8 on PL-I Red 24VAC continuous 13 W2 Auxiliary Heat Stage 2 Pin 4 on PL-1 White 24VAC** Single Speed AC or 14 Y/Y2 HP, High Speed Pin 2 on PL-1 Yellow (-) 12VDC** 2-Speed AC or HP 15 G Fan Pin 1 on PL-1 Green 24VAC** 16 Not Used N/A Not Used Check voltages with 16-Pin Plug disconnected from motor. These signals will start motor. WI ING N 1. Shut off power to unit; wait 5 min. 2. Remove 5-pin plug from motor. 3. Remove 16-pin from motor. 4. Replace 5-pin plug and turn power on. 5. Check for appropriate voltages on 16-pin connector with screw terminals jumpered. (See Table 6 for values and see examples below.) If signals check correctly and motor does not run, inspect wiring harness for loose pins or datmaged plastic that could cause poor connections. If connections are good, either control module or motor is defective. If proper signals are not present, check circuit board using procedure below: 12-PIN PLUG (PL-1) N Y L C B D 1. Unplug harness from board. 2. Check for appropriate voltages on pins with Easy Select Board screw terminals jumpered.(See Table 6 for values and see example below.) If proper signals are not present, replace Easy Select Board. If present at board and not at 16-pin connector,wiring harness is defective. UBL ING X PL Motor is not running on a call for heat-pump heating. System is a single-speed heat pump. 1. After performing checks in Thermostat section, follow steps 1 thru 5 in Wiring Harness section. Then proceed with example. 2. With all thermostat wires removed from Easy Select Board,place a jumper wire between R and Y/Y2 low-voltage screw terminals on the Easy Select board. 3. Check Table 6 for pin number on 16-pin connector associated with the Y/Y2 signal. The correct pin is#14. The far right column shows that(-) 12vdc should be present between pin#14 and pin#1 (common)on the 16-pin connector. 4. Set meter to read DC voltage.Place meter between pins#1 and#14 and check for(-) II2vdc(common side of meter on pin#1).If signal is present, the problem is in the module or motor. If signal is not,problem is either in''wiring harness or Easy Select Board. These steps can be repeated for other modes of operation. To check Easy Select Board: 1. Leave jumper wire in place between R and Y/Y2. 2. Check Table 6 under"Wiring Harness Connection to Easy Select Board"column and rpw for pin#14 to see pin#on Easy Select Board that should have voltage. The correct pin is#2. The column on far right will show voltage that should be present between pin#2 and#9 (or#10 common). 3. Place meter between pins#2 and#9 on Easy Select Board and check for(-) 12vde. 4. If voltage is present, the wiring harness is bad; if not, the Easy Select Board is bad. D. Verify Motor Winding Section: Before proceeding with module replacement, check the following to ensure motor winding section is functional. With control module removed and unplugged from winding section: 1. The resistance between any 2 motor leads should be similar. —19— 5 r R • , EASY SELECT BOARD LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BLOCK 1, Configuration Taps (See Installation Instructions,for detailed description.) D A. AUX HEAT-Set for heater size(Ex:0-10 for 10 kw) J1 B. AC/HP SIZE-Set for size of outdoor unit D" C. SYSTEM TYPE-Select"HP COMFORT" R D. AC/HP CFM ADJUST-Select"LO" E. ON/OFF DELAY-Select"ENH" A Jz W, F. CONTINUOUS FAN-Select desired speed wo 2. Install heater with Intelligent Heat Staging,and remove AC/HP SIZE Wx Jumper J2,except when using 5-,8-,or 10-kw heater. _� ox oso o.. me 3. Remove Jumper J1 to activate all dehumidify modes. B Il Il 8 Il Y, 4. Complete wiring and install outdoor temperature sensor BLU SYSTEM TYPE /�/ according to Installation Instructions. AG NPSONF°HT HPEFF Y/Ix C--,Or oRN Il 9 llCONTROL AC/HP CFM ADJUST G O e LK NOM 8 HI ® I. Set"DIP Switches"-Set the dip switches(back of Thermidistat (� ® 0 Control Board)appropriately for specific system being installed. ON/OFF DELAY ¢j ® 2. Thermidistat Control Configurations . -.- ENH IJ C (See ThermidistatTm Control Installation Instructions for E WHT b B0 ° tl detailed description.) • Option 5(Variable Speed Motors)-set to ON ONTINUOUS FAN qU%1 HUM1 . Option 7(Super Dehumidify)-set to ON F�/EL LO MaD EL B 8 • Option 9(Intelligent Heat)-set to ON if installing with AUX HUM2 CEBD430226-01B CE55430226-01B o o a single speed heat pump 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o e o o 24VAC Option 12(Heaters during Defrost)-setting"2"is o suggested for all heaters oRv_C:0 • Option 16-Set to ON for warmer heat below 40°F. ® HEATER/MOTOR • Option 17-Select programmable or non-programmable mode. 3. Set desired humidity level on front of Thermidistat MOLEX 12-PIN CONNECTOR (50 to 55%RH recommended). For cool to dehumidify operation,both"dhu"and"cool"must be displayed. ..�r�, A03100 Fig. 20—Set-Up Instructions for Warmer Heating Temperatures and Super Humidity Control in Cooling 2. The resistance between any motor lead and the unpainted motor end plate should be greater than 100K ohms. If motor winding section fails one of these tests, it is defective and must be replaced. START-UP PROCEDURES Refer to outdoor unit Installation Instructions for system start-up instructions and refrigerant charging method details. CARE AND MAINTENANCE For continuing high performance, and to minimize possible equipment failure, it is essential that periodic maintenance be performed on this equipment. The only required maintenance that may be performed by the consumer is filter maintenance. Q WARNING: Disconnect all power to unit before servicing field wires or removing control package. The disconnect (when used) on access panel does not disconnect power to the line side of disconnect, but does allow safe service to all other parts of unit. If unit does not have a disconnect, disregard the foregoing. Instead, make sure that a disconnecting means is within sight from,and is readily accessible from,the unit.Disconnect all electrical power to unit before performing any maintenance or service on it.A failure to follow this warning can cause electrical shock,fire, personal injury, or death. The minimum maintenance requirements for this equipment are as follows: 1. Inspect and clean or replace air filter each month or as required. 2. Inspect cooling coil,drain pan,and condensate drain each cooling season for cleanliness.Clean as necessary.An inspection port is provided on all A-coil delta plates. Remove plastic plug to inspect. 3. Inspect blower motor and wheel for cleanliness each heating and cooling season. Clean as necessary. 4. Inspect electrical connections for tightness and controls for proper operation each heating and cooling season. Service as necessary. Consult Fan Coil Service Manual available from equipment distributor for maintenance procedures. Q WARNING: As with any mechanical equipment,personal injury can result from sharp metal edges,etc,therefore,care should be taken when removing parts. Using the Owner's/User Manual furnished in outdoor unit,the installing technician should explain system operation to the consumer with particular emphasis on indoor fan coil operation sounds and filter maintenance. ©2003 CAC/BDP 7310 W.Morris St.,Indianapolis,IN 46231 imfk4d02 —20— Book/Tab: 1/4,3d/2e Catalog No.63FK-4D1